JP7484085B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to provide a performance that allows the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, a pachinko machine is known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the playing area, a changing display of pictures is performed on the display surface of the display device, and if the lottery results in a winning result, a combination of specific pictures is displayed in a final stopped state on the display surface, and the machine transitions to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. When the machine transitions to the special gaming state, for example, a ball entry device provided in the playing area starts opening and closing, and gaming balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-125488 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable for players to be given a moderate amount of profit, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can provide a suitable profit to the player.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game machine including: a game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into a game area based on an operation by a player;
A first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter;
A determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is established;
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
a display control means capable of controlling the display means so that the display means starts dynamic display of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the judgment result is statically displayed, which constitutes one game;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the display control means;
A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means through which the game ball can enter;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
a special game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result and the bonus game ends;
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a predetermined condition is established in the special game state, the display control means executes a special effect for a period longer than the shortest period required from the start to the end of the bonus game,
The special effect is an effect that is executed in the game round, and is configured not to be executed in the game round in the predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a means for executing a notification during the execution of the special effect, which allows the player to know the remaining period of the special effect.

The present invention makes it possible to provide players with a reasonable amount of profit.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 1A to 1J are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 1A and 1B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a first special chart, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a second special chart. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing launch control processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control processing in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. A flowchart showing processing during special chart changes in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call start processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing during special line release in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the sound/light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing main side command response processing in the audio/optical side MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a period setting process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the data table for game round presentations that are selected when a small win result is not obtained. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a movie image dedicated to the longest period of time displayed on a pattern display device, and (b) is a time chart showing the timing at which the display of the remaining time image begins. 11A to 11C are time charts for explaining how the pattern display is changed in the pattern row of the pattern display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game play presentation. (a) is a flowchart showing the selection process of a final stop period in the main MPU; (b) is a flowchart showing the selection process of an opening period in the main MPU; (c) is a flowchart showing the selection process of an interval period in the main MPU; and (d) is a flowchart showing the selection process of an ending period in the main MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how restrictions on the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time are gradually introduced when the opening and closing execution mode, which results in a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly while the high-frequency support mode continues without any play in the low-frequency support mode. An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area in the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram to explain various areas of the main RAM used to manage the ball payout rate. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball payout rate monitoring process in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the goal management processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a period setting process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in a main MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the processing during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory area of the main RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing a period setting process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in a main MPU. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a base array table in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional array table. 13 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in a main MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first base arrangement table in the fifth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second base arrangement table, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third base arrangement table, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the fourth base arrangement table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a process for acquiring a fluctuation duration period executed by a master MPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 2A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal period table, and FIG. 2B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a shortened period table. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first base arrangement table in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second base arrangement table, and FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third base arrangement table. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart confirmation in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. 6A to 6G are time charts showing how the non-restricted state, the first restricted state, and the second restricted state are set, respectively. A flowchart showing the processing during special drawing confirmation executed by the main MPU in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination executed by the main MPU in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the master RAM used to manage the total number of rounds in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a selection process of an opening period in a master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing special call start processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing during special line release in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of opening in the main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a selection process of a closed period in a main MPU. 13A and 13B are time charts showing how the execution mode of a round game changes according to the target round number stored in the target round number area. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending period selection process in a main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a selection process of an opening period executed by a main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing an ending period selection process in a main MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device in the twelfth embodiment. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the display mode of the patterns changes when a game-round performance is executed while the pattern sequence is maintained. 13 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern in the sound/light side MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game play presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing an extension setting process in the audio/optical side MPU. 13A and 13B are time charts showing how the execution period of the standby display of the pattern is extended. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring hold information executed by the main MPU in the thirteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a destination specification process in a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration executed by the main MPU in the fourteenth embodiment; A flowchart showing the processing during special drawing confirmation executed by the main MPU in the fifteenth embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing a period setting process in the main MPU 62 , and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 . (a) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU; (b) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the opening period in the main MPU; (c) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the interval period in the main MPU; and (d) is a flowchart showing the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. 13A to 13E are time charts showing how restrictions are imposed on the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time depending on the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode. 23 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU in the sixteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the command receiving processing in the MPU of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the dispensing control process in the MPU of the dispensing control device.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected at all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating a launching operation device (or operating handle) 28 provided in the lower right corner of the front door frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, the launch operation device 28 is provided so as to protrude forward from the base surface of the front door frame 14, and is equipped with an operation base 29a and an operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is formed in an annular shape, and is supported rotatably on the operation base 29a while being sandwiched between the operation base 29a from the front and rear. The rotation axis of the operation handle 29b is in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and there is a part on the outer circumferential surface where the player's fingers can be placed when rotating the operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is biased toward the initial position by a spring (not shown), and when the player rotates it toward the right, it rotates to the right against the biasing force. The greater the amount of rotation toward the right, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 has multiple openings of various sizes that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are dispensed. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first operating opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating opening 34, one game ball is dispensed, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten game balls are dispensed, and when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen game balls are dispensed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "ball entry" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 24a, game balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are also referred to as winning.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are united as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are open facing upward. In addition, both actuation ports 33, 34 are lined up vertically with the first actuation port 33 facing upward. The second actuation port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second actuation port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second actuation port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operating port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows down. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that runs vertically through it, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after entering the game. This makes it possible for the game ball that enters the through gate 35 to enter the second operating port 34.

When a ball wins the through gate 35, the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a ball wins the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38 located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning electric role release, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the normal power open state is entered. In the normal power open state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured with a segment display in which a number of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The image displayed on the map display unit 38a may be a number of different types of letters, a number of symbols, a number of characters, or a number of colors that are switched between.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by the entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The lottery result is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special chart unit 37 in detail, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display section 37a and a second special chart display section 37b. The display area of the first special chart display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special chart display section 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the area of the combined display area of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b is also narrower than the display surface 41a.

In the first special symbol display section 37a, a winning lottery is held using the winning entry into the first operating port 33 as a trigger, and a variable display of the pattern or a specified display is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special symbol display section 37b, a winning lottery is held using the winning entry into the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and a variable display of the pattern or a specified display is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b are configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the images displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

In the special chart unit 37, a first special chart reserve display section 37c and a second special chart reserve display section 37d are provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b. The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special chart reserve display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special chart reserve display section 37d.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 90 described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when a pattern change or a specified display is performed in the first special pattern display section 37a based on a winning entry in the first operating port 33, a pattern change or a specified display is performed accordingly, and when a pattern change or a specified display is performed in the second special pattern display section 37b based on a winning entry in the second operating port 34, a pattern change or a specified display is performed accordingly. In addition to display effects triggered by winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the pattern display device 41 also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode described below, which is entered after a winning entry is achieved.

The display contents when the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern will be described in detail with reference to Figures 4 and 5. Figure 4 is a diagram showing individual patterns that are displayed in a changing manner by the pattern display device 41, and Figure 5 is a diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to 4(j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower rows, set as multiple display areas. Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper pattern row Z1 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern arranged between each main pattern. The lower pattern row Z3 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern arranged between each main pattern.

In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. In contrast, the middle pattern row Z2 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub-symbol arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone has 10 main symbols arranged, making up a total of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display surface 41a is configured to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Also, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five active lines are set on the display surface 41a, namely, a left line L1, a center line L2, a right line L3, a downward-right line L4, and an upward-right line L5.

When the display surface 41a displays a changing pattern based on the winning of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the changing display starts so that the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Then, the changing display is switched to a standby display basically in the order of the upper pattern row Z1 → the lower pattern row Z3 → the middle pattern row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined patterns being statically displayed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3. Also, when the changing display of the patterns ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result, which will be described later, a combination of the same odd number patterns or a combination of the same even number patterns is formed on one of the valid lines, and if the result of the internal lottery is a 2R high probability big win result or a small win result, which will be described later, a combination of the predetermined patterns (for example, "3, 4, 1") is formed on one of the valid lines.

In addition, based on a winning entry into any of the operating ports 33, 34, the variable display begins in any of the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and one game round is played until the specified result is displayed and the game ends. Furthermore, the manner in which the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is displayed is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the symbols displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols and, for example, the symbols may be configured to display only numbers.

If a big prize or a small prize is won in the lottery based on winning through the first operating port 33, the mode will transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning through the special electric winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, if a big prize or a small prize is won in the lottery based on winning through the second operating port 34, the mode will transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning through the special electric winning device 32 is possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if an internal lottery is selected to transition to an open/close execution mode. The open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode is transitioned when a winning result is obtained. Note that while a winning entry is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which a winning entry is more difficult to occur than in the open state.

The round display unit 39 displays the number of rounds that occur in the open/close execution mode. Here, the open/close execution mode includes a round number-defined mode that occurs when a big win is won, and an open/close number-defined mode that occurs when a small win is won. The round number-defined mode is an open/close execution mode that is executed with a predetermined number of rounds as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined open duration has elapsed, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric winning device 32. The number of rounds that are executed in the round number-defined mode differs depending on the type of big win result that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 displays the number of rounds or a display corresponding to it. In addition, the display on this round display unit 39 starts when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, the open/close number-specified mode is terminated when round play is not set and either one of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes reaches the upper limit, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric winning device 32. In the open/close number-specified mode, the round display unit 39 remains hidden.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted into it. The window panel 52 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are also provided to output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56, which bulge toward the front, are arranged vertically below the window 51. An upper tray 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out by the payout device 76 (described later) and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 56a also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60 that mainly controls the game. The main control device 60 is configured by housing a main control board 61 in a board box. The board box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box and requires destruction of a specified portion when separating them, or a structure in which a seal sticker that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled off is affixed across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies. Also, a trace structure may be a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed from a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power source on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply and launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62. The MPU 62 has a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and RAM 64 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 62, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control unit 60, and to a dispensing control unit 77. The power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power supply and launch control unit 78 that has the function of supplying operating power, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e. The winning detection sensors 66a to 66e include detection sensors that are provided one-to-one with the winning entry sections such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35, and the MPU 62 judges whether a prize has been won at each entry section. The MPU 62 also executes various lotteries based on the winning at the first operating port 33 or the winning at the second operating port 34.

The power outage monitoring board 65, payout control device 77, and sound and light emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning ball determination result in the winning ball entry section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound and light emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be explained later. The MPU 62 transmits commands to the sound and light emission control device 80 via parallel communication.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to the special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, the normal electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, the normal chart unit 38, and the round display unit 39. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b, the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, and the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with the normal chart display unit 38a and the normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 32b so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the open state of the normal power role 34a is selected, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 34b so that the normal power role 34a is opened and closed. Also, during the game round and open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the display of the special chart unit 37. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not the normal power role 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the MPU 62 controls the display of the normal chart unit 38. Also, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the display of the round display unit 39.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and also monitors the maximum voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on and a power supply unit 78b for when power is turned off. The power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on is connected to a commercial power source in, for example, a game hall, and has the function of generating operating power and supplying the generated operating power when external power is being supplied from the commercial power source. The power supply unit 78b for when power is turned off is composed of a capacitor, and is charged by the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a for when power is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when power is being supplied from an external power source). In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power outage occurs in the commercial power source, or in other power-off state (when power supply from an external power source is cut off), the power supply unit 78b is discharged and backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM of the dispensing control device 77 is retained and not erased while backup power is being supplied from the power outage power supply unit 78b.

Here, the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 temporarily stores information on the current game state and game progress, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. In this case, by supplying backup power from the power supply unit 78b during power outage as described above to these RAMs, it is possible to store and hold the current game state, game progress, and prize ball information for a predetermined period of time even in a situation where there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power on. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power outage to the sound and light emission control device 80 and the display control device 90. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the sound and light emission control device 80 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 is not backed up, and is destroyed or erased when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power on is stopped.

The power supply unit 78b for use during power outage is secured to have a relatively large capacity, and information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 before the power is cut off is retained for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days). The power supply unit 78b for use during power outage is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, there is no need to store electricity in the power supply unit 78b for use during power outage when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it will be necessary to replace it periodically.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for use during power outages (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit for use during power outages 78b. The power supply and launch control device 78 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the driving power source for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute power outage processing, by discharging from the power supply unit for use during power outages, even after the stable 24-volt DC power supply falls below 22 volts. This allows the main control device 60 and other devices to execute and complete power outage processing normally.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with various power supply units 78a and 78b as well as a launch control unit 78c. The touch sensor 28a, push sensor 28b, and variable resistor 28c built into the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle 29b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a specified electrical signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is output to the launch control unit 78c. Upon receiving the specified electrical signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is touching the outer surface of the operating handle 29b. The launch control unit 78c also determines whether the launch stop switch of the launch operating device 28 has been operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and determines the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition fulfillment signal (e.g., a HI level signal) to the MPU 62 when a predetermined condition for launching a game ball is fulfilled. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c continues to transmit a condition fulfillment signal to the MPU 62 on the condition that it receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle 29b is being touched by the player and receives a signal from the push sensor 28b indicating that the launch stop switch is not being manually operated by the player. If any of the above signals is not received, the condition fulfillment signal is not transmitted to the MPU 62 (e.g., a LOW level signal). In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball dispensing device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition fulfillment signal.

In the MPU 62, when a predetermined firing cycle has elapsed while a condition establishment signal has been received and the firing of game balls is permitted, the MPU 62 transmits a pulsed firing instruction signal to the firing control unit 78c. When the firing control unit 78c receives a pulsed firing instruction signal from the MPU 62, it controls the game ball firing mechanism 27 once. In this case, if game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball firing mechanism 27, one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every time the predetermined firing cycle elapses. In addition, the firing strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c during this firing, so that the game ball is fired with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b. The above-mentioned predetermined firing cycle is measured by the MPU 62, as will be described in detail later. There are multiple patterns of the predetermined firing cycle, specifically a first cycle that allows 100 game balls to be fired per minute, a second cycle that allows 90 game balls to be fired per minute, a third cycle that allows 80 game balls to be fired per minute, and a fourth cycle that allows 70 game balls to be fired per minute.

The audio and light emission control device 80 includes an audio and light emission control board 81 equipped with an MPU 82. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, a RAM 84 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The MPU 82 determines the content of the presentation to be executed in the game round, open/close execution mode, etc., based on the command received from the main control device 60. Then, to perform the operation corresponding to the determined content, it controls the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14, and controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the performance determined based on the command received from the main control device 60, and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. Note that the display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the audio and light emission control device 80, and can be said to be located downstream in the communication direction relative to the main control device 60.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The MPU 92 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the sound and light emission control device 80.

Although not shown, the display control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the audio/light emission control device 80 are referred to as the audio/light side MPU 82, audio/light side ROM 83, and audio/light side RAM 84, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as the display side MPU 92, display side ROM 93, and display side RAM 94, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main MPU 62 uses various counter information during play to perform a winning lottery, settings for the display of the first special symbol display unit 37a, the display of the second special symbol display unit 37b, settings for the symbol display of the symbol display unit 41, settings for the display of the normal symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery to determine the winning lottery, a big win type counter C2 used for determining the big win type, a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display unit 41 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change duration of the game number in each special symbol display unit 37a, 37b and the symbol display unit 41. In addition, a normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the normal electric role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the electric role open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are located in the lottery counter area 121 of the RAM 64.

Each counter C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special chart reserve area 122 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The special chart reserve area 122 includes a first special chart reserve area 125, a second special chart reserve area 126, and an execution area 127 for special charts.

The first special chart reserve area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 125a to 125d as reserved information on the first special chart side according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. In this case, when winnings occur multiple times consecutively in the first operating port 33, the numerical information is stored in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d in the order of the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the fourth area 125d in chronological order. In this way, the four areas 125a to 125d are provided, so that up to four winning histories of game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the number of reserved items that can be stored in the first special chart reservation area 125 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The second special chart reserve area 126 includes a first area 126a, a second area 126b, a third area 126c, and a fourth area 126d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 126a to 126d as reserved information on the second special chart side according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. In this case, when winnings occur multiple times consecutively in the second operating port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d in the order of the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the fourth area 126d in chronological order. In this way, the four areas 126a to 126d are provided, so that up to four winning histories of game balls in the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the number of reserved items that can be stored in the second special chart reservation area 126 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The execution area 127 for special charts is an area in which reserved information for targets for which hit/fail judgments and allocation judgments for special charts are performed when variable display is started in either of the special chart display units 37a, 37b is stored. Specifically, when variable display is started in the first special chart display unit 37a, the reserved information on the first special chart side stored in the first area 125a of the first special chart reserve area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for special charts. On the other hand, when variable display is started in the second special chart display unit 37b, the reserved information on the second special chart side stored in the first area 126a of the second special chart reserve area 126 is moved to the execution area 127 for special charts.

Information corresponding to the normal random number counter C4 is stored in the normal map reserve area 123 when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs. The normal map reserve area 123 has a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and the numerical information of the normal random number counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 128a to 128d as reserved information on the normal map side according to the winning history of the through gate 35. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in succession, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area 128a → the second area 128b → the third area 128c → the fourth area 128d. In this way, by providing four areas 128a to 128d, the winning history of game balls into the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored up to four times. In addition, the number of items that can be reserved and stored in the general map reservation area 123 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be any number such as two, three, five or more, or may be a single number.

The regular map reserve area 123 has an execution area 129 for regular maps. The execution area 129 for regular maps is an area in which reserved information for targets for support pass/fail judgment is stored when change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a. Specifically, when change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a, the reserved information stored in the first area 128a of the regular map reserve area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for regular maps.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, the regular random number counter C4 will be described. The regular random number counter C4 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The regular random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the regular map reserve area 123 of the main RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the regular random number device 34a to an open state, based on the value of the stored regular random number counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in the same manner into the game area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the normal power role 34a is in the open state when the normal power open state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening period for one time is set to be longer. In this case, when the normal power open state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the normal power role 34a occurs multiple times, the closing period from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum period of time that is ensured between one normal power open lottery and the next normal power open lottery (i.e., the duration of one fluctuation in the normal power display unit 38a) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode being in the normal power release state per unit time compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of guaranteed periods (for example, the period of variable display executed in the normal power display unit 38a based on winning the through gate 35) are provided for when one normal power release lottery is performed and the next normal power release lottery is performed, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter guaranteed period is more likely to be selected or the average guaranteed period is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening period, shortening the guaranteed period for when one normal power release lottery is performed and the next normal power release lottery is performed, shortening the average period of the guaranteed period, and increasing the winning probability.

When the normal power open state is won in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4, the normal power open state is entered. The normal power open state ends when the normal power role 34a has been opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the second operating port 34. Specifically, the upper limit number is 10 regardless of whether the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode is selected. On the other hand, the number of times that the normal power role 34a is opened and closed is one time in the low frequency support mode, whereas in the high frequency support mode, it is multiple times, more than in the low frequency support mode, specifically three times. Also, the duration of one opening of the normal power role 34a is one second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is two seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 of the special chart reserve area 122 when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 of the special chart reserve area 122 when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The stored value of the winning random number counter C1 is then used to determine whether or not the game has won.

The random number value that is the winning result when determining whether or not a win is true is stored in the main ROM 63 as a winning/losing table. In the winning/losing table, the winning/losing results are set as big win results, small win results, and losing results. The big win result is a winning/losing result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, and can also trigger a transition to at least one of the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode. The small win result is a winning/losing result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, but does not trigger a transition to either the winning/losing lottery mode or the support mode. The losing result is a winning/losing result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to the winning/losing lottery mode or the support mode.

There are a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the same win/lose table is referenced for the reserved information on the first special symbol side acquired based on a winning entry into the first operating port 33 and the reserved information on the second special symbol side acquired based on a winning entry into the second operating port 34, and in either case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery.

To explain each win/loss table in more detail, the win/loss table for the low probability mode has two random number values that result in a big win (for example, "5" and "305"), and three random number values that result in a small win (for example, "55", "355", and "555"). The rest are random number values that result in a losing result.

In the hit/miss table for the high probability mode, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set to be greater than that in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, specifically 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the random number value that results in a small jackpot is the same as in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a win are arbitrary, and the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a low probability mode situation may be configured so that only a part of the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a high probability mode situation is included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result, or may not be included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a high probability mode situation.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 of the special chart reserve area 122 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 of the special chart reserve area 122 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 34. Then, the allocation determination is made using this stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, this pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of jackpot results set, and these jackpot results differ in at least one of the following three contents: (1) the contents of the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the contents of the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As already explained, the opening and closing execution mode that is executed when a jackpot is won is the round number-defined mode. In the round number-defined mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 is relatively high and low between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for a single opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. In detail, a long-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long period, and a short-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.5 seconds, which is a period shorter than the long period, are set.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that game balls are launched toward the game area PA at a launch cycle of 100 balls per minute, 90 balls per minute, 80 balls per minute, or 70 balls per minute. The shortest launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the longest launch cycle is about 0.86 seconds. In addition, the upper limit number of balls for the end condition of the round game is set to 10 balls. In this case, in the long-term mode among the above-mentioned release modes, the open duration is set to a time longer than the product of the longest launch cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of balls in one round game. On the other hand, in the short-term mode, the open duration is set to a time shorter than the product of the shortest launch cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of balls in one round game, more specifically, a time shorter than the shortest launch cycle of the game balls. Therefore, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round of play, and when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short-term mode, it is expected that no prizes will be won in the special electric winning device 32. The duration of the short-term mode may be the same or approximately the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game balls, or may be a period longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game balls (i.e., the first cycle) and shorter than the longest firing cycle of the game balls (i.e., the fourth cycle).

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a long-term mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a short-term mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of times per round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The opening and closing execution mode that is executed when a small jackpot is won is the opening and closing number specified mode, as already explained. In the opening and closing number specified mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened twice in a short period of time. In this case, the upper limit number of balls for the end condition of the opening and closing number specified mode is set to 10 balls, and the total open duration of the opening and closing number specified mode is set to a time shorter than the product of the shortest game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of balls in the opening and closing number specified mode. Therefore, the opening and closing number specified mode is configured such that a round of play is not executed, and whether or not the upper limit number is reached is determined based on the total number of winning balls during the opening and closing number specified mode, but the probability of the special electric winning device 32 opening and closing the maximum number of times is increased.

The allocation destination of the type of jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the main ROM 63. The contents of the allocation table will be explained using Figures 8(a) and 8(b).

As shown in Figures 8(a) and 8(b), the distribution table sets the following types of jackpot results: a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 2R high probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, and a 10R high probability jackpot result.

In the case of a 10R low probability jackpot result, the open/close execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 10 rounds of play occur. In addition, after the open/close execution mode ends, it becomes a low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode transitions accordingly. In addition, after the open/close execution mode ends, it becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode ends when the number of plays after the transition reaches a termination reference number (specifically 80 times) set as 1 or more times. In this case, it becomes a low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode that is transitioned to after the high frequency support mode ends continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode transitions accordingly. In addition, regardless of the jackpot result or small jackpot result that is the trigger, the support mode in the open/close execution mode becomes a low frequency support mode.

In the case of a 2R high probability jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a low frequency winning mode in which two rounds of play occur. In this opening and closing execution mode, since winning into the special electric winning device 32 is not expected, the number of game balls paid out is essentially 0. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes a high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly. Furthermore, if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition is the high frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, whereas if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition is the low frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. These support modes continue until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly.

When a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 5 rounds of play occur. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode, regardless of the win/lose lottery mode that was in effect before the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high frequency support mode, regardless of the support mode that was in effect before the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result.

When a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 10 rounds of play occur. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes a high probability mode, regardless of the win/lose lottery mode that was in effect before the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes a high frequency support mode, regardless of the support mode that was in effect before the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result.

As shown in Figures 8(a) and 8(b), there is provided an allocation table for the first special chart, which is used when determining the allocation of reserved information on the first special chart side acquired based on winning at the first operating port 33, and an allocation table for the second special chart, which is used when determining the allocation of reserved information on the second special chart side acquired based on winning at the second operating port 34.

To explain each allocation table in detail, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the allocation table for the first special chart has the following types of jackpot results set for allocation: 10R low probability jackpot result, 2R high probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, and 10R high probability jackpot result. In the allocation table for the first special chart, "0-39" corresponds to a 10R low probability jackpot result, "40-59" corresponds to a 2R high probability jackpot result, "60-79" corresponds to a 5R high probability jackpot result, and "80-99" corresponds to a 10R high probability jackpot result.

Here, if a small win result is obtained, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this opens and closes the special electric winning device 32 twice in a short-term mode. On the other hand, if a 2R high probability big win result is obtained, the mode switches to a round number regulation mode in which rounds are played with a maximum number of times of two, and in each round, the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes once in a short-term mode. In other words, if either a 2R high probability big win result or a small win result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode appears to be the same. Also, in the game rounds in which these game results are obtained, the first special chart display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the pattern display unit 41, which has a display area set larger than the first special chart display unit 37a, displays the stop results in a manner that makes them indistinguishable. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the pattern display unit 41 displays a common pattern combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on one of the effective lines. In addition, when a 2R high probability jackpot result is obtained in the low frequency support mode, during the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this, the performance is executed in a manner in which it cannot be distinguished from the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a small jackpot result based on winning the first operating port 33, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the performance is executed in the same manner as after the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a small jackpot result based on winning the first operating port 33, without executing a performance on the pattern display device 41, etc. that clearly indicates that it is a high probability mode. In addition, in both the case of a 2R high probability jackpot result and a small jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation where the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are in place, when an opening and closing execution mode that becomes a low frequency winning mode or an opening and closing number specified mode occurs, the player will play while hoping that the high probability mode will be entered after the opening and closing execution mode ends, which increases the interest of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the allocation table for the second special chart has 10R low probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, and 10R high probability jackpot result set as the types of jackpot results to be allocated. In the allocation table for the second special chart, "0-39" corresponds to a 10R low probability jackpot result, "40-59" corresponds to a 5R high probability jackpot result, and "60-99" corresponds to a 10R high probability jackpot result.

The allocation table for the first special symbol and the allocation table for the second special symbol have the same probability of going into the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode in the event of a jackpot win. On the other hand, the allocation table for the second special symbol has a higher probability of going into the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode than the allocation table for the first special symbol. More specifically, the allocation table for the first special symbol can go into the low frequency winning mode, whereas the allocation table for the second special symbol cannot go into the low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the allocation table for the second special symbol has a higher probability of going into the opening and closing execution mode in which 10 rounds of play occur in the high frequency winning mode than the allocation table for the first special symbol. Therefore, as for the type of jackpot result that can be selected in the event of a jackpot win, it is more advantageous for the player to have an internal lottery drawn when an internal lottery is ...

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expectation effect is set as a type of display effect in the pattern display device 41. The expectation effect is a display state for making a player think that the change display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result from the start of the change display of the patterns in the pattern display device 41 and before the stop result is derived and displayed in a gaming machine equipped with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing a change display of the patterns, in which the final stop result in a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot result is a grant corresponding result. In addition, specifically, the grant corresponding result is a combination of patterns with the same number attached on one of the pay lines that is stopped and displayed. Two types of expectation effects are set: reach display and notice effect.

The reach display includes a display state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of the patterns for some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a reduced or hidden display of the reach pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display surface 41a.

Preview effects include a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when symbols are displayed in a varying manner in some symbol rows but multiple symbol rows after the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 starts displaying the varying symbols, or when a reach display is being performed. Preview effects also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner, and a mode in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner. Such preview effects can occur in both play times when a jackpot result is obtained and when a jackpot result is not obtained, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a jackpot result is obtained than when a jackpot result is not obtained.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round where the same symbol combination is finally displayed. Also, in a game round corresponding to a 2R high probability big win result and a small win result where the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed if the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform a preview performance is made not by the main MPU 62 but by the sound/light MPU 82. In this case, the sound/light MPU 82 executes a lottery process for the preview performance so that a game round corresponding to a jackpot result is more likely to produce a preview performance than a game round corresponding to a miss result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when a performance for a game round is executed by the pattern display device 41.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main MPU 62 to determine the change duration of a game round (the change duration in the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, and the change duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 41). Specifically, the value of the change type counter CS is obtained when the change display in the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern by the pattern display device 41 starts is determined.

<Regarding the processing configuration required for the main MPU 62>
Next, we will explain each process executed to progress the game by the master MPU 62. The processes of the master MPU 62 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In this power-on wait processing, for example, the main processing is started and the process waits until 1 second has elapsed without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

Then, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 has been manually operated, and in the following step S105, it is determined whether the power outage flag in the main RAM 64 has been set to "1". In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data is determined.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example when the gaming hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by a checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared to initialize the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 is set to an initial value, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 80 to recognize the current game state.

Then, proceed to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In other words, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10). In the following step S111, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processing, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

Here, we will explain the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency divider circuit is provided so as to be located midway along the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62.

The frequency divider circuit functions as a frequency changer that changes the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for the main MPU 62 to specify the start timing of the timer interrupt process. In other words, the frequency divider circuit supplies the main MPU 62 with a pulse signal at a specific period of 4 msec. The main MPU 62 executes a process to confirm the occurrence of a specific signal form, such as the rising or falling edge of such a pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed as at least one of the conditions.

In this case, if the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt goes from a prohibited state to a permitted state. In other words, depending on the execution status of the processing in the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may start 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt processing started, and if such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing will start 3.9 msec after the previous timer interrupt processing started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed at a specific cycle, such as 4 msec, regardless of the progress of the processing in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is set so that even if the timer interrupt processing at a specific timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed in the timer interrupt processing at the next timing after the specified timing, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

Now, in the timer interrupt process, first in step S201, the power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 65, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed.

In the next step S202, a random number update process for lottery is executed. In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variable counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the next step S205, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a specific event set as a target for fraudulent activity has occurred. In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and if it is determined that a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1."

In the next step S206, it is determined whether the game progress has been stopped by determining whether the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the process proceeds to step S207 and thereafter.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the next step S208, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, in step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In this winning detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor 66a-66e are read, and a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball has entered the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35.

In the next step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64. In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the updating of both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters in a consolidated manner.

In the next step S211, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game ball. The contents of the launch control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S212, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are checked for disconnections and the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are checked for opening.

In the next step S213, a special chart special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode. The details of the special chart special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

In the next step S214, a normal map normal power control process is executed. In the normal map normal power control process, a process is executed to acquire the numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 as reserved information on the normal map side when a winning entry to the through gate 35 occurs. In addition, when reserved information on the normal map side is acquired in a situation where the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is not being performed and the normal power role 34a is not in the open state, a normal power opening lottery is performed using the reserved information on the normal map side and a variable display is started on the normal map display unit 38a. The variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time, and then a stop result corresponding to the result of the normal power opening lottery is displayed. Then, when the normal power opening state is won in the normal power opening lottery, the stop result corresponding to the winning of the normal power opening state is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and then the normal power opening state is entered, and the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner (i.e., the second operating port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner). The above-mentioned normal power release lottery, display control of the normal power display unit 38a, and normal power release state are performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Note that in the open/close execution mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode regardless of the type of support mode before the open/close execution mode was started and the type of winning result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode.

In the next step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the first special chart display unit 37a in the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the second special chart display unit 37b in the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the ordinary chart display unit 38a in the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to update the display contents of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, and output information is set to update the display contents of the ordinary chart display unit 38a. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213, output information is set to update the display contents of the round display unit 39.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout status receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. In addition, in step S217, if a situation exists in which a payout of a game ball should be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a payout output process is executed to set a prize ball command as an output target to execute the payout of the game ball. In the following step S218, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process.

If a positive determination is made in step S206, or after steps S207 to S218 have been executed, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Launch control processing>
Next, the launch control process executed in step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether a condition fulfillment signal has been received from the firing control unit 78c of the power supply and firing control device 78 (step S301). As already explained, the firing control unit 78c transmits the signal on the condition that it receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle 29b is being touched by the player, and receives a signal from the push sensor 28b indicating that the firing stop switch has not been manually operated by the player. If the condition fulfillment signal has not been received (step S301: NO), it clears the period measurement counter 64a (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 to "0" (step S302). The period measurement counter 64a is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine whether the firing period has elapsed in a situation where a condition fulfillment signal has been received from the firing control unit 78c.

If a condition establishment signal is received (step S301: YES), the value of the period measurement counter 64a in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1 (step S303). Then, it is determined whether the value of the period measurement counter 64a after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing period stored in the firing period area 64b (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 (step S304). As already explained, multiple firing periods are set in this pachinko machine 10, and specifically, a first period that allows 100 game balls to be fired per minute, a second period that allows 90 game balls to be fired per minute, a third period that allows 80 game balls to be fired per minute, and a fourth period that allows 70 game balls to be fired per minute are set. The firing period area 64b stores information corresponding to any one of these first to fourth periods.

If the value of the period measurement counter 64a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing period stored in the firing period area 64b (step S304: YES), a pulsed firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c (step S305). When the firing control unit 78c receives a pulsed firing instruction signal from the MPU 62, it controls the game ball firing mechanism 27 once. In this case, if game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball firing mechanism 27, one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in the firing period measured by the main MPU 62. In addition, the firing strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c during this firing, so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b.

When the process of step S302 has been executed, when a negative determination has been made in step S304, or when the process of step S305 has been executed, a period setting process is executed (step S306). The details of the period setting process will be described later, but a process is executed to store information corresponding to one of the first to fourth periods in the firing period area 64b.

<Special chart special signal control processing>
Next, the special picture special power control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special chart special electricity control process, if a winning entry has been made into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, a process is executed to acquire reserved information on the special chart side, and if reserved information on the special chart side is stored, a judgment is made as to whether the reserved information on the special chart side is correct or not, and a process is executed to perform a game operation based on the judgment. In addition, based on the result of the judgment, a process is executed to transition to an opening/closing execution mode after the game operation has ended, and processes are executed during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Specifically, first, a process for acquiring reserved information is executed (step S401). In this process, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, the number of reserved information on the first special chart side stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 is read, and when the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit (specifically, "4"), the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the first special chart reserve area 125 where reserved information on the first special chart side is not stored. In addition, in this process, when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the number of reserved information on the second special chart side stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 is read, and when the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit (specifically, "4"), the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the second special chart reserve area 126 where reserved information on the second special chart side is not stored.

In this acquisition process, if reserved information on the first special chart side or reserved information on the second special chart side is acquired, a reserved command is sent to the audio/visual side MPU 82. The audio/visual side MPU 82 sends a command corresponding to the received reserved command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the reserved command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of reserved information on the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the reserved number. In this case, since the reserved command includes information indicating which of the reserved information on the first special chart side or the reserved information on the second special chart side has increased, the display of the reserved number corresponding to the side that has increased is changed on the pattern display device 41.

In addition, when the number of reserved items increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 10), display control is performed so that the display content of either the first special chart reserved display section 37c or the second special chart reserved display section 37d, whichever corresponds to the increase in the number of reserved items, is changed to one that corresponds to the increase in the number of reserved items.

In the next step S402, the information of the special diagram special electric counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read, and in step S403, the special diagram special electric address table stored in the main ROM 63 is read. Then, in step S404, a start address corresponding to the information of the special diagram special electric counter is obtained from the special diagram special electric address table.

As already explained, the special chart special electricity control process includes a process for controlling the presentation for a play round and a process for controlling the open/close execution mode. The processes for controlling the presentation for a play round include a special chart change start process (step S406), which is a process for starting the presentation for a play round, a special chart change in progress process (step S407), which is a process for progressing the presentation for a play round, and a special chart confirmation process (step S408), which is a process for ending the presentation for a play round.

The processes for controlling the opening and closing execution mode include a special line start process (step S409) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening and closing execution mode, a special line open process (step S410) which is a process for controlling the state of the special line winning device 32 while it is open, a special line closed process (step S411) which is a process for controlling the state of the special line winning device 32 while it is closed, and a special line end process (step S412) which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening and closing execution mode and the transition of the game state when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

The special diagram special charge counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine which of the above multiple types of processing should be executed. The special diagram special charge address table is set with the start address of the program for executing the above multiple types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the special diagram special charge counter.

When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, incremented by 2, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" depending on the processing to be executed in the special chart special electricity control processing in the next processing round, triggered by the condition for updating the numerical information being met. Therefore, in the special chart special electricity control processing in each processing round, it is sufficient to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the special chart special electricity counter. The special chart special electricity counter is set to 0 as its initial value.

After executing the process of step S404, execute a process to jump to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 (step S405). Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, jump to the special chart change start process of step S406, if the acquired start address is SA1, jump to the special chart change process of step S407, if the acquired start address is SA2, jump to the special chart confirmation process of step S408, if the acquired start address is SA3, jump to the special line start process of step S409, if the acquired start address is SA4, jump to the special line open process of step S410, if the acquired start address is SA5, jump to the special line closed process of step S411, if the acquired start address is SA6, jump to the special line end process of step S412. If any of the processes of steps S406 to S412 is executed, this special chart special line control process is terminated. Below, we will explain the processing of steps S406 to S412 individually.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart variation start process in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, it is determined whether reserved information for the special chart is stored in either the first special chart reserve area 125 or the second special chart reserve area 126 (step S501). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the special chart change start process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S502, where data setting process is executed.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether the number of reserved information items on the second special drawing side is "0". If the number of reserved items in the second special drawing reserve area 126 is "0", the data setting process for the first special drawing is executed, and if the number of reserved items in the second special drawing reserve area 126 is 1 or more, the data setting process for the second special drawing is executed.

As already explained, the data setting process is executed when reserved information on the special chart side is stored in either the first special chart reserve area 125 or the second special chart reserve area 126. In this case, the data setting process determines whether the reserved number in the second special chart reserve area 126 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, when reserved information on the second special chart side is stored, the reserved information on the second special chart side is set as the target for starting a game round, regardless of whether the number of reserved information on the first special chart side is 1 or more. As a result, when reserved information on the special chart side is stored in both the first special chart reserve area 125 and the second special chart reserve area 126, the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the second operating port 34 is prioritized as the target for starting a game round.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special chart reserve area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special chart. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first special chart reserve area 125. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d is shifted in order to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second area 125b to the first area 125a, the third area 125c to the second area 125b, and the fourth area 125d to the third area 125c, and then the fourth area 125d is cleared to "0".

Then, the second special chart flag provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0". The second special chart flag is a flag for specifying whether the current variable display starts in the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b. Then, a shift command, which is information for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that the data in the first special chart reserve area 125 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. The sound/light side MPU 82 sends a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, thereby changing the display of the number of reserved information corresponding to the first special chart reserve area 125 in the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number. Also, when the number of reserved information in the first special chart reserve area 125 has decreased as described above, the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) controls the display of the first special chart reserve display section 37c to change to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the reserved number.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special chart reserve area 126 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special chart. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second special chart reserve area 126. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d is shifted in order to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second area 126b to the first area 126a, the third area 126c to the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d to the third area 126c, and so on, and then the fourth area 126d is cleared to "0".

Then, the second special chart flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". Then, a shift command, which is information for making the audiovisual MPU 82 recognize that the data in the second special chart reserve area 126 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. The audiovisual MPU 82 sends a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, thereby changing the display of the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special chart reserve area 126 in the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number. Also, when the number of reserved information in the second special chart reserve area 126 has decreased as described above, the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) controls the display of the second special chart reserve display unit 37d to change to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the reserved number.

After the data setting process (step S502) is executed, the winning/losing determination process is executed (step S503). In the winning/losing determination process, first, it is determined whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the winning/losing determination information stored in the execution area 127 for the special chart, that is, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for the high probability, by referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. Also, if it is the low probability mode, it is determined whether the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 127 for the special chart matches the jackpot numerical information for the low probability by referring to the winning/losing table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is a jackpot result (step S504: YES), an allocation determination process is executed (step S505). In the allocation determination process, by determining whether the second special chart flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the reserved information on the first special chart side or the reserved information on the second special chart side. Then, the allocation table corresponding to the determination result is selected from the allocation table for the first special chart (see FIG. 8(a)) and the allocation table for the second special chart (see FIG. 8(b)). After the allocation table is selected, it is determined which type of jackpot result the information for allocation determination among the reserved information stored in the execution area 127 for the special chart, that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, corresponds to in the above selected allocation table. Specifically, when the allocation table for the first special chart is selected, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to among the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 2R high probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, and the 10R high probability jackpot result. In addition, when the allocation table for the second special chart is selected, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to among a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, and a 10R high probability jackpot result.

Then, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S506). Specifically, information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of pattern patterns to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result, and in step S506, information on the pattern patterns corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S505 is stored in the main RAM 64.

The type of picture displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the type of picture may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or multiple types of picture types may be set for each jackpot result.

After that, a flag set process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S507). Specifically, flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result are provided in the main RAM 64, and in step S507, the flag corresponding to the distribution determination result of step S505 is set to "1" among the flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a small win result (step S508: YES), a stop result setting process for the small win result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the pattern type to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for small win results pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a big win result. After that, the small win flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S510).

If the result of the win/loss determination process is neither a big win result nor a small win result, a stop result setting process for a loss result is executed (step S511). Specifically, information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for loss results pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the pattern form selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern form selected in the case of a big win result and the information on the pattern form selected in the case of a small win result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S507, step S510, and step S511, a process for obtaining the variable duration is executed (step S512). The execution period of a game round is composed of a variable duration, which is the period from when the variable display of the patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 starts on the pattern display device 41 until the static display of each pattern starts, and a final stop period, which is the period from when the static display of each pattern starts until the static display ends. In the process for obtaining the variable duration, a process is executed to determine the variable duration of the execution period of the game round that is currently being started. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the process for obtaining the variable duration.

If the current win/loss judgment result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S601: YES), the current win/loss judgment result and the allocation judgment result are either a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result that triggers the execution of the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, and it is judged whether the value of the total round number counter 64c (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S602). The total round number counter 64c is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp the total number of rounds of the open/close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode that have occurred without playing in the low frequency support mode since the occurrence of a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high frequency support mode in the normal game state that is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The third reference value is the largest number of reference values set, specifically "60". The total round number counter 64c and the third reference value will be described in detail later.

If the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S602: YES), the longest period among the multiple types of game round fluctuation continuation periods set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round (step S604). In other words, even if the current game round is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value, the processing of step S604 is not executed, and further, even if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, if the current game round is either a 5R high probability big win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a small win result, the processing of step S604 is not executed. When the processing of step S604 is executed, a variation command including the information on the above-mentioned maximum period and a type command including the current pass/fail judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the audio-visual side MPU 82 (step S615), and then the period adjustment process is executed (step S616).

If the current result is neither a 10R low probability big win result nor a 10R high probability big win result, or if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S602: NO), a winning time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S603). The winning time period table includes a first winning time period table selected when the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result, a 5R high probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result, and a second winning time period table selected when the current result is either a 2R high probability big win result or a small win result.

In the first winning time period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS from "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the first winning time period table, multiple types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the number of times played that results in a 10R low probability big win result, a 5R high probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result is relatively long and short, and each of the fluctuation type counters CS of "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation duration. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the first winning time period table, information on the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is acquired as information on the fluctuation duration of the current number of times played.

The first winning period table is set with a longer duration of fluctuation than the durations of fluctuation set in the second winning period table, the normal period table and the shortened period table described later. Therefore, the duration of fluctuation of a game resulting in a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result and a 10R high probability jackpot result can be longer than the duration of fluctuation of a game resulting in a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small probability jackpot result, and the duration of fluctuation of a game in which no reach display occurs. In addition, the average duration of fluctuation according to the first winning period table is longer than the average duration of fluctuation according to the second winning period table, the average duration of fluctuation according to the normal period table described later and the average duration of fluctuation according to the shortened period table. Therefore, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small probability jackpot result, and the average duration of the fluctuation of game times in which no reach display occurs.

The variable duration set in the first winning period table is the same as the variable duration set in the reach period table described later. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a jackpot result will occur after the reach display from the variable duration of the number of times of play. However, this is not limited to this, and some of the variable durations set in the first winning period table may be longer than all of the variable durations set in the reach period table. In this case, there will be a variable duration of the number of times of play in which the occurrence of a jackpot result is confirmed. In addition, the average period of the variable duration of the number of times of play according to the first winning period table is longer than the average period of the variable duration of the number of times of play according to the reach period table described later. Therefore, the variable duration of the number of times of play in which a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is likely to be longer than the number of times of play in which a miss reach display is displayed and no jackpot result occurs after the reach display. However, this is not limited to this, and the average duration of the fluctuation in the number of times played according to the first winning period table may be the same or approximately the same as the average duration of the fluctuation in the number of times played according to the reach period table described below.

Here, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than the longest of the variable duration periods set in the first winning period table. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than any of the variable duration periods of the number of play times selected in other situations. Therefore, the variable duration period of the number of play times when the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value is the longest period.

In the second winning period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the variable duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the second winning period table, multiple types are set so that the variable duration of the number of times played that results in either a 2R high probability big win result or a small win result is relatively long and short, and each of the "0 to 198" variable type counters CS is assigned to one of these multiple types of variable duration. By comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS obtained in step S614 described later with the second winning period table, information on the variable duration corresponding to the numerical information is obtained as information on the variable duration of the current number of times played.

The second winning period table is set with a longer duration of fluctuation than the durations set in the normal period table and the shortened period table described below. Therefore, the duration of fluctuation for a game that results in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result can be longer than the duration of fluctuation for a game that does not result in a reach display. In addition, the average duration of fluctuation according to the second winning period table is longer than the average duration of fluctuation according to the normal period table described below and the average duration of fluctuation according to the shortened period table. Therefore, the average duration of fluctuation for a game that results in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result is longer than the average duration of fluctuation for a game that does not result in a reach display.

If the current hit/miss judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit (step S601: NO), it is judged whether a miss reach display will occur in the current game round (step S605). Specifically, it is judged whether the reach judgment information among the information stored in the execution area 127 for the special chart, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3, matches the numerical information set in the reach occurrence judgment table stored in advance in the main ROM 63. If a miss reach display will occur in the current game round (step S605: YES), the reach period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S606).

In the reach time period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS from "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the reach time period table, multiple types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the number of times played that will result in a reach miss display is relatively long and short, and each of the fluctuation type counters CS from "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation duration. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step S614 described later with the reach time period table, information on the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is obtained as information on the fluctuation duration of the current number of times played.

The reach time period table is set with a longer duration of fluctuation than the duration of fluctuation set in the second winning time period table, the normal time period table and the shortened time period table described later. Therefore, the duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a reach is displayed can be longer than the duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result is obtained, and the duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a reach display does not occur. In addition, the average duration of fluctuation according to the reach time period table is longer than the average duration of fluctuation according to the second winning time period table, the average duration of fluctuation according to the normal time period table described later, and the average duration of fluctuation according to the shortened time period table. Therefore, the average duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a reach is displayed is longer than the average duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result is obtained, and the average duration of fluctuation of the game times in which a reach display does not occur. On the other hand, as already explained, the variable duration set in the reach time period table is the same as the variable duration set in the first win time period table, and the average period of the variable duration of the number of times played according to the reach time period table is shorter than the average period of the variable duration of the number of times played according to the first win time period table, as already explained.

If a miss reach display does not occur in the current game round (step S605: NO), it is determined whether the high-frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" to determine whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode (step S607). The high-frequency support flag is a flag that the main MPU 62 uses to determine whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode or not, and a situation in which the high-frequency support flag is set to "1" indicates the high-frequency support mode, and a situation in which the high-frequency support flag is set to "0" indicates the low-frequency support mode.

If the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S607: YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved information items on the second special chart side reserved in the second special chart reserved area 126 is three or more (step S608). As already explained, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high, so that reserved information on the second special chart side is easily acquired. Furthermore, as already explained, reserved information on the second special chart side is prioritized as the target for starting a game round over reserved information on the first special chart side. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the period table referenced to determine the variable duration of a game round is changed according to the number of reserved information items on the second special chart side reserved.

If the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two (step S608: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S609). In the normal period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the variable type counter CS from "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the variable duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the normal period table, multiple types are set so that the variable duration of the number of times played in which there is no winning result and no reach display is relatively long and short, and each of the variable type counters CS from "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of variable duration. By comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS obtained in step S614 described later with the normal period table, information on the variable duration corresponding to the numerical information is obtained as information on the variable duration of the current number of times played.

If the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more (step S608: YES), the shortened period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S610). In the shortened period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the variable type counter CS from "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the variable duration of the number of times of play is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the shortened period table, multiple types are set so that the variable duration of the number of times of play in which there is no winning result and no reach display is relatively long and short, and each of the variable type counters CS from "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of variable duration. By comparing the numerical information of the variable type counter CS obtained in step S614 described later with the shortened period table, information on the variable duration corresponding to the numerical information is obtained as information on the variable duration of the current number of times of play.

The shortened period table is set with a shorter duration of fluctuation than the duration of fluctuation set in other period tables, including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, when two or more reserved pieces of information on the second special chart are reserved and stored, if a game round is started in which no winning result is obtained and no reach display occurs, the duration of fluctuation of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. In addition, the average duration of fluctuation according to the shortened period table is shorter than the average duration of fluctuation according to other period tables, including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, when two or more reserved pieces of information on the second special chart are reserved and stored, if a game round is started in which no winning result is obtained and no reach display occurs, the average duration of fluctuation of the game round will be shorter than in other situations.

If it is the low frequency support mode (step S607: NO), it is determined whether the number of reserved information on the first special chart side reserved in the first special chart reserved area 125 is three or more (step S611). As already explained, in the low frequency support mode, the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively low, so that reserved information on the second special chart side is difficult to obtain and reserved information on the first special chart side is easier to obtain than reserved information on the second special chart side. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the period table referenced to determine the variable duration of the game play is changed according to the number of reserved information on the first special chart side stored in reserve.

If the number of reserved information items stored on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S611: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S612), and if the number of reserved information items stored on the first special drawing side is three or more (step S611: YES), the shortened period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S613). The contents of the normal period table and the shortened period table have already been explained.

As already explained, the shortened period table is set with a shorter duration of fluctuation than the duration of fluctuation set in other period tables, including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, when three or more reserved pieces of information on the first special chart are reserved and stored, if a game round is started without a winning result and without a reach display, the duration of fluctuation of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. Also, as already explained, the average duration of fluctuation according to the shortened period table is shorter than the average duration of fluctuation according to other period tables, including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, when three or more reserved pieces of information on the first special chart are reserved and stored, if a game round is started without a winning result and without a reach display, the average duration of fluctuation of the game round is shorter than in other situations.

When the winning period table is read in step S603, when the reach period table is read in step S606, when the normal period table is read in step S609, when the shortened period table is read in step S610, when the normal period table is read in step S612, or when the shortened period table is read in step S613, a period acquisition process is executed (step S614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is compared with the period table read as described above to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round.

When the process of step S604 or step S614 is executed, a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the currently acquired game round and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S615). After that, a period adjustment process is executed (step S616). The period adjustment process will be described in detail later.

The change command is composed of two bytes of data, and the two bytes of data include data corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and data corresponding to the change duration of the game. Specifically, the upper four bits of the two bytes of data set identification data to indicate that it is a change command, the next four bits of data set lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process, the next one bit of data sets trigger data indicating which of the reserved information in the first special chart reserve area 125 and the second special chart reserve area 126 is the trigger, and the remaining seven bits of data set time data corresponding to the change duration of the game. Therefore, when the sound/light side MPU 82 receives a change command, it recognizes that it is a change command from the identification data, recognizes the result of the hit/miss judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process from the lottery result data, and recognizes the change duration of the current game from the time data. Here, the main MPU 62 selects a different duration of fluctuation for game counts depending on whether or not a reach occurs, so even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not a reach occurs, the audio/video MPU 82 can determine whether or not a reach has occurred from information on the duration of fluctuation for game counts. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation command may also include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

The type command is composed of two bytes of data, and the two bytes of data include data corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, data on whether the mode is high probability mode or not, and data on whether the mode is high frequency support mode or not. Specifically, the upper four bits of the two bytes of data set identification data to indicate that it is a type command, the next four bits of data set lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process, and the remaining eight bits of data set status recognition data on whether the mode is high probability mode or not and high frequency support mode or not. Therefore, when the audio-visual side MPU 82 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, recognizes the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process from the lottery result data, and recognizes whether the mode is high probability mode or not and high frequency support mode or not from the status recognition data.

Both the variable command and the type command contain data corresponding to the result of the winning/losing judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process. Therefore, the sound/light side MPU 82 can identify whether or not a communication abnormality such as noise has occurred in the reception of the variable command and the type command by comparing the lottery result data included in the variable command with the lottery result data included in the type command. If both lottery result data match, it is possible to execute control for the performance corresponding to the contents of the variable command and the type command, and if both lottery result data do not match, it is possible to notify this. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound/light side MPU 82 may execute a game round operation corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game round, and for example, in the game round operation, regardless of the results of the winning/losing judgment process and the distribution judgment process, the pattern display device 41 may stop and display a combination of patterns corresponding to a complete miss. In this case, the game round operation may be configured to be performed over a variation continuation period corresponding to the time data included in the variable command, or may be configured to continue until the next variable command and type command are received. The variation command may be configured to not include either the result of the pass/fail determination process or the result of the allocation determination process, or may not include both data.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), after the fluctuation duration acquisition process is executed in step S512, the information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times played acquired in the fluctuation duration acquisition process is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S513). The numerical information set in the special chart special electricity timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

Then, the display of the changing pattern is started on the display section that is the target of the current game round, either the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b (step S514). Then, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S515). This updates the value of the special chart special electricity counter from the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change in progress processing.

<Special chart change processing>
Next, the special chart changing process in step S407 in the special chart special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, by checking whether the value of the special symbol special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the variable duration period for the current game has elapsed (step S701). If the variable duration period for the current game has not elapsed (step S701: NO), a display update process is executed (step S702). In the display update process, a process is executed to regularly change the display mode of the image in the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b, whichever is the target of the current game. This regular change continues until the timing for starting the final stop display arrives. This regular change is also performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether a winning result is obtained or whether a reach display occurs.

If the variation continuation period of the current game round has elapsed (step S701: YES), a display process of the stop result is executed (step S703). In this display process, the display mode of the pattern on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, which is the target of the current game round, is set to a display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. Specifically, at the start of the current game round, the stop result information stored in the main RAM 64 is read in step S506, step S509, or step S511 of the special chart variation start process (FIG. 13), and the pattern corresponding to the read stop result information is continuously displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, which is the target of the current game round. This display state of the pattern is continued until the next pattern variation display is started on the corresponding special chart display unit 37a, 37b.

Then, a process for selecting the final stop period is executed (step S704). As already explained, the execution period of a game round is composed of a variable duration period, which is the period from when the variable display of the patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 starts on the pattern display device 41 until the static display of each pattern starts, and a final stop period, which is the period from when the static display of each pattern starts until the static display ends. In step S704, the latter period, the final stop period, is selected. Two types of periods are set for the final stop period in this pachinko machine 10: 0.5 seconds (first final stop period) and 3 seconds (second final stop period), and the process for selecting the final stop period selects one of these two periods to be the final stop period for the current game round.

Then, the information on the final stop period of the game round selected in step S704 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S705). This starts the measurement of the final stop period of the current game round.

Then, a final stop command including information on the final stop period of the currently selected game round is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S706). By receiving the final stop command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, it starts static display of each pattern that will be the stop result of the current game round on the pattern display device 41. The static display continues for the final stop period of the current game round.

Then, the value of the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S707). This updates the value of the special chart special electric counter from the value corresponding to the special chart changing process to the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation process.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special drawing confirmation process in step S408 in the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for the current game has elapsed (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game has elapsed (step S801: YES), the process for transitioning to the open/close execution mode is executed on the condition that the result of the hit/miss judgment that triggered the current game is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S802: YES). Specifically, the opening period selection process is executed first (step S803). The opening period is the period secured until the first opening of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the open/close execution mode, and during the opening period, an opening performance is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display unit 41 to indicate that the open/close execution mode is started. As will be described in detail later, two types of periods are set as the target period of the opening period in this pachinko machine 10: 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and the opening period selection process selects one of these two periods to be the opening period for the current open/close execution mode.

Then, the information on the opening period selected in step S803 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S804). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command including information about the currently selected opening period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S805). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

Then, the value of the special chart special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S806). This updates the value of the special chart special transmission counter from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment that triggered the current game round is neither a big hit nor a small hit (step S802: NO), the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is determined to be "0" and the high frequency support flag is determined to be "1" to determine whether the game round that ended this time was a game round executed in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big hit result (step S807). The high probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether the lottery mode in the hit/miss lottery is the high probability mode or not, and the situation in which the high probability flag is set to "1" is the high probability mode, and the situation in which the high probability flag is set to "0" is the low probability mode. The high frequency support flag is also a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode or not, and the situation in which the high frequency support flag is set to "1" is the high frequency support mode, and the situation in which the high frequency support flag is set to "0" is the low frequency support mode.

If the mode is low probability and high frequency support (step S807: YES), the value of the play count counter provided in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S808). The play count counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to determine the number of remaining play times in the low probability and high frequency support mode situation. When the open/close execution mode ends as a result of a 10R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "80", which is the end reference number.

After that, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times has been executed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S809). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S809: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S810). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

After that, the total round number counter 64c in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S811). In other words, the value of the total round number counter 64c is not cleared to "0" if the high-frequency support mode continues even if there is a transition from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, but is cleared to "0" if there is a transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S807, if a negative judgment is made in step S809, or if the processing of step S811 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S812). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

<Special call start processing>
Next, the special call start processing of step S409 in the special call control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the system checks whether the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" to determine whether the opening time for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, the system ends the special call start process.

If the opening period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S901: YES), the setting process for the jackpot result is executed on the condition that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is the result of any jackpot (step S902: YES).

In the setting process when a jackpot result is obtained, the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 is set to the number of rounds of play corresponding to the current jackpot result (step S903). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "2", if the current jackpot result is a 5R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "10". The round counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine the number of remaining rounds of play in the open/close execution mode.

After that, on the condition that the current jackpot result is not a 2R high probability jackpot result, that is, the current jackpot result is any one of a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, and a 10R high probability jackpot result (step S904: NO), a setting process is executed for the round history counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S905). In other words, the setting process is executed when the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, is executed, and is not executed when the open/close execution mode, which is the low frequency winning mode, is executed. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 5R high probability jackpot result, the round history counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the round history counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "10". The value set in the round history counter is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 at the end of the current open/close execution mode, as will be described in detail later. In this way, by configuring the number of rounds executed in the current opening/closing execution mode to be added to the total rounds counter 64c when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to make the value of the total rounds counter 64c the total number of times that round play has already been executed.

If a positive determination is made in step S904, or if the processing of step S905 is executed, the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S906). The winning counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine whether or not the maximum number of game balls has won in one round of play or one opening/closing number-specified mode.

After that, the open duration corresponding to the jackpot result is read (step S907). Specifically, if the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a 2R high probability jackpot result, information on the open duration corresponding to the short-term mode is read from the main ROM 63. The open duration is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game balls (0.6 seconds). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is any of a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, and a 10R high probability jackpot result, information on the open duration (29 seconds) corresponding to the long-term mode is read from the main ROM 63.

On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode has occurred as a result of a small win (step S902: NO), the setting process for the small win result is executed. In the setting process for the small win result, the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "2" (step S908), and the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S909). The opening/closing counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number specified mode.

After that, a process of reading the open duration corresponding to the small win result is executed (step S910). The open duration is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and is specifically 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds). The open duration corresponding to the small win result may be longer than the short-term mode open duration and shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, may be the same as or approximately the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, or may be longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (i.e., the first cycle) and shorter than the longest firing cycle of the game ball (i.e., the fourth cycle).

When the processing of step S907 or step S910 is executed, the read information on the open duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S911). This starts the measurement of the open duration. The open duration is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. In addition, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the total round number counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls paid out in response to a winning in the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, an open setting process is executed to set the special electric winning device 32 to the open state (step S912). An open command is also sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S913). The open command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that the special electric winning device 32 has been opened. By receiving the open command, the sound/light side MPU 82 executes control to switch the performance during the open/close execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41 accordingly.

Then, the special diagram special call counter is incremented by 1 (step S914). This updates the value of the special diagram special call counter from the value corresponding to the special call start process to the value corresponding to the special call open process.

<Special call open processing>
Next, the special line open processing of step S410 in the special chart special line control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the open monitoring process is executed (step S1001). In the open monitoring process, when one game ball wins the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the winning counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition is met. Also, if the value of the special chart special electric timer counter is "0", that is, if the open duration has elapsed, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

If it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied as a result of the open monitoring process (step S1002: YES), a closing setting process is executed to set the special electric winning device 32 in a closed state (step S1003). Also, a process for grasping the termination condition is executed (step S1004). Specifically, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any big win result, the value of the round counter in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the termination condition of the current opening/closing execution mode is satisfied. Also, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result, the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the opening/closing counter after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the termination condition of the current opening/closing execution mode is satisfied. Also, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result, the termination condition of the current opening/closing execution mode is determined to be satisfied even if the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0".

If the condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is not satisfied (step S1005: NO), the selection process for the interval period is executed (step S1006). The interval period is the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is kept closed between the first opening and the next opening of the special electric winning device 32, and during the interval period, the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display unit 41 execute the performance corresponding to the interval period. As will be described later in detail, two types of interval periods are set in this pachinko machine 10 as the target interval period: 2 seconds (first interval period) and 6 seconds (second interval period), and the selection process for the interval period selects one of these two types of periods to be the current interval period. Note that, although the interval period occurs multiple times during one opening/closing execution mode, the interval period does not change during one opening/closing execution mode, and all interval periods are constant during one opening/closing execution mode.

Then, the information on the interval period selected in step S1006 is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S1007). This starts the measurement of the current interval period.

Then, a close command including information on the currently selected interval period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1008). By receiving the close command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute a performance corresponding to the current interval period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes a performance corresponding to the current interval period.

Then, the value of the special diagram special line counter is incremented by 1 (step S1009). This updates the value of the special diagram special line counter from the value corresponding to the special line open processing to the value corresponding to the special line closed processing.

If the conditions for ending the opening and closing execution mode are met (step S1005: YES), the selection process for the ending period is executed (step S1010). The ending period is the period secured from the end of the opening state of the last special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode until the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and during this ending period, an ending performance indicating the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display unit 41. As will be described in detail later, this pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods set as the target of the ending period: 6 seconds (first ending period) and 12 seconds (second ending period), and the selection process for the ending period selects one of these two periods to be the ending period for the current opening and closing execution mode.

Then, the information on the ending period selected in step S1010 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S1011). This starts the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an ending command including information on the currently selected ending period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1012). By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

Then, the value of the special diagram special line counter is incremented by 2 (step S1013). This updates the value of the special diagram special line counter from the value corresponding to the special line open processing to the value corresponding to the special line end processing.

<Special line shutdown processing>
Next, the special line closed processing of step S411 in the special chart special line control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101). If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the special call closed processing is terminated.

If the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), and on the condition that the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any of the big win results (step S1102: YES), the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S1103), and the open duration corresponding to the big win result is read (step S1104). The contents of the open duration corresponding to the big win result are the same as in step S907 in the special power start process (FIG. 17). Also, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result (step S1102: NO), the open duration corresponding to the small win result is read (step S1105). The contents of the open duration corresponding to the small win result are the same as in step S910 in the special power start process (FIG. 17).

When the processing of step S1104 or step S1105 is executed, the read information on the open duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1106). This starts the measurement of the open duration. Here, the open duration is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. In addition, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the total round number counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls paid out in response to a winning in the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, an open setting process is executed to set the special electric winning device 32 to the open state (step S1107). An open command is also sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1108). The open command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that the special electric winning device 32 has been opened. By receiving the open command, the sound/light side MPU 82 executes control to switch the performance during the open/close execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41 accordingly.

Then, the special chart special line counter is decremented by 1 (step S1109). This updates the value of the special chart special line counter from the value corresponding to the special line closed processing to the value corresponding to the special line open processing.

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special call termination process in step S412 in the special call control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the ending period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S1201). If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the special call termination process is terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S1201: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S1202). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode was a 10R low probability big winning result, the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", the high frequency support flag is set to "1", and the game count counter is set to "80", which is a value corresponding to the ending reference number of times. As a result, the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode with an upper limit of 80 times of play. Also, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode was a 5R high probability big winning result or a 10R high probability big winning result, the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" and the high frequency support flag is set to "1". As a result, the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery becomes a high probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode is a 2R high probability big winning result, the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" and the high frequency support flag is set to the state before the current opening/closing execution mode was started. As a result, if the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode was started was a low frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and if the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode was started was a high frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode is a small winning result, both the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 are set to the state before the current opening/closing execution mode was started.

After that, on condition that the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S1203: YES), the value of the round history counter of the main RAM 64 is read (step S1204), and the read value is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 (step S1205). As already explained, at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode triggered by a jackpot result, the round history counter of the main RAM 64 is set with the value of the number of rounds that occur in the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, the total round number counter 64c stores the total number of rounds that have been executed in the opening and closing execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode.

When a 2R high probability big win result is obtained, an open/close execution mode, which is a low frequency winning mode, is executed, but the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is not added to the total rounds counter 64c. Also, when a small win result is obtained, an open/close execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode is executed, but the total rounds counter 64c is not added even in the open/close execution mode. As a result, the payout of game balls is essentially executed, in other words, the number of rounds played that essentially give the player a profit is measured in the total rounds counter 64c.

The addition process to the total round number counter 64c (step S1205) is executed on the condition that the high frequency support flag is set to "1", so even if an open/close execution mode that becomes a low frequency support mode after the end occurs, the addition to the total round number counter 64c is not executed. Also, as already explained, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S810 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 16), the value of the total round number counter 64c is cleared to "0" (step S811), and the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is executed only in step S810 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 16). Therefore, the total round number counter 64c stores the number of rounds of play executed in the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the total number of rounds of play executed in the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode that was executed in the low probability mode until the start of the game in the low frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1205 is executed, the special chart special transmission counter is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, the value of the special chart special transmission counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special transmission end processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

<Processing Configuration of the Acoustic/Light Side MPU 82>
Next, each process for controlling the execution of the performance and notification by the sound/light side MPU 82 will be described.

Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals (e.g., 4 msec) by the sound/light side MPU 82.

First, the main command storage process is executed (step S1301). The main command storage process is a process for storing a command in the audio/light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 84 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored.

Then, the master MPU 62 executes a master command response process to perform processing corresponding to the command received from the master MPU 62 (step S1302). Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the master command response process.

If a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S1401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, from the information included in the variation command, information regarding the win/lose judgment result and allocation judgment result determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round is identified, and a process is executed to write the identified information to the sound/light side RAM 84. Note that during this storage process, the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command are compared to determine whether the communication of the variation command and the type command is normal or not, and if the communication is abnormal, a corresponding notification process and data storage process are executed.

Then, the process for determining the presentation pattern is executed (step S1403). In the process for determining the presentation pattern, the details of which will be described later, a process for determining whether or not to perform a notice presentation is executed, and a stop pattern determination process for determining the stop pattern that will be displayed when the variable continuation period of the current game round in the pattern display device 41 ends is executed. Then, a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable continuation period of the game round set in the variable command, the contents of the win/lose judgment result and the allocation judgment result in the current game round, and the presence or absence of a notice presentation is selected, and a data table for the game round presentation corresponding to the presentation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. In addition, if an extension command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the contents of the data table for the game round presentation are modified according to the contents of the extension command. The data table for the game round presentation finally stored in the sound/light side RAM 84 in step S1403 has the same execution period of the presentation as the variable continuation period of the game round determined by the main MPU 62 this time. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the performance of the current game round corresponding to the above performance pattern is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

Then, a game round command is sent to the display side MPU 92 (step S1404). The game round command includes a pattern command corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read into the sound/light side RAM 84 in the presentation pattern determination process (step S1403), and a stop result command corresponding to the information on the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process, which are sent to the display side MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display side MPU 92 reads out the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display of the current game round corresponding to the presentation pattern and the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process is executed on the pattern display device 41.

If a final stop command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1405: YES), the final stop process is executed (step S1406). In the final stop process, the final stop period of the current game is grasped from the contents of the final stop command, and measurement of the final stop period is started, and a data table corresponding to the final stop period is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of final stop periods, 0.5 seconds and 3 seconds, are set as final stop periods, so a data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and a data table corresponding to 3 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the final stop period. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the performance corresponding to the current final stop period is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current final stop period to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 starts the still display of each pattern that will be the stop result of the current game in the pattern display device 41. The still image will continue for the final pause period of the current game.

If an opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1407: YES), the opening process is executed (step S1408). In the opening process, the current opening period is grasped from the contents of the opening command, and measurement of the opening period is started, and a data table corresponding to the opening period is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of opening periods, 4 seconds and 10 seconds, are set, so that a data table corresponding to 4 seconds and a data table corresponding to 10 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the opening period. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening period to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display corresponding to the current opening period is executed on the pattern display device 41. The opening performance is not only set to correspond to the type of opening period, but may also be set to correspond to the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the opening performance for the 2R high probability big winning result and the small winning result are the same.

If an open command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1409: YES), the open process is executed (step S1410). In the open process, the current open duration is grasped from the contents of the open command, and a data table corresponding to the open duration is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of open duration are set, 0.5 seconds and 29 seconds, so a data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and a data table corresponding to 29 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the open duration. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the open performance corresponding to the current open duration is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current open duration to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display corresponding to the current open duration is executed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the open duration effects are not only set to correspond to the type of open duration, but may also be configured to correspond to the type of winning result that triggered the open/close execution mode, or the number of rounds played in one open/close execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the open duration effects for the 2R high probability big win result and the small win result are the same.

If a closing command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1411: YES), the closing process is executed (step S1412). In the closing process, the current interval period is grasped from the contents of the closing command, and a data table corresponding to the interval period is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of interval periods, 2 seconds and 6 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 2 seconds and a data table corresponding to 6 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the interval period. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the closing performance corresponding to the current interval period is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current interval period to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display corresponding to the current interval period is executed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the closed performance is not only set to correspond to the type of interval period, but may also be configured to correspond to the type of winning result that triggered the open/close execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the closed performance for the 2R high probability big winning result and the small winning result are the same.

If an ending command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1413: YES), the ending process is executed (step S1414). In the ending process, the current ending period is grasped from the contents of the ending command, and measurement of the ending period is started, and a data table corresponding to the ending period is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84. As already explained, two ending periods, 6 seconds and 12 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 6 seconds and a data table corresponding to 12 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the ending period. The light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, the sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current ending period to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display corresponding to the current ending period is executed on the pattern display device 41. The ending performance is not only set to correspond to the type of ending period, but may also be set to correspond to the type of winning result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ending performance for the 2R high probability big winning result and the small winning result are the same.

In addition to the various processes described above, the main command response process also executes other processes (step S1415). These other processes include processes for issuing notifications and processes for performing demo effects.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after executing the main command response process in step S1302, light emission control process is executed (step S1303) and sound output control process is executed (step S1304). In the light emission control process, processing is executed to control the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 53 according to the data table stored in the sound/light side RAM 84. In the sound output control process, processing is executed to control the sound output of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table stored in the sound/light side RAM 84.

<Processing configuration for awarding appropriate profits to players>
Next, a process for awarding an appropriate profit to a player will be described. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing a cycle setting process executed in step S306 of the launch control process (Fig. 11) in the master MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S1501). As already explained, the total round number counter 64c stores the number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the total number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode executed in the low probability mode until the game in the low-frequency support mode is started. The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, and is the value of the number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability big win result (or a 10R low probability big win result). Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the value of the total round number counter 64c does not reach the first reference value even if the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result occurs only once in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, if an open/close execution mode occurs once in the low-frequency support mode triggered by a 10R high-probability big win result (or a 10R low-probability big win result), the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the first reference value.

The first reference value is not limited to "10", and may be a value greater than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively small, and may be a value less than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively large. The first reference value may be a value greater than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively large, and may be a value less than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively small.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the first reference value (step S1501: YES), information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, it is judged whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503). The second reference value is a value greater than the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result (or the 10R low probability big win result) occurs twice, which is the first multiple, and is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result (or the 10R low probability big win result) occurs three times, which is the second multiple. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, even if an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs in the low frequency support mode, and an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c will not reach the second reference value. Furthermore, if an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the second reference value. Note that the second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 or may be greater than "30" as long as it is greater than the first reference value and less than the third reference value.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503: YES), information corresponding to a second period that allows 90 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1504). The second period is the second shortest launch period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the second period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503, it is judged whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505). The third reference value is a value greater than the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result (or the 10R low probability big win result) occurs five times, which is the third multiple, and is the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result (or the 10R low probability big win result) occurs six times, which is the fourth multiple. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, even if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs in the low frequency support mode, and furthermore, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs four times in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c does not reach the third reference value. Furthermore, if an open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the third reference value. Note that the third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or may be greater than "60" as long as it is greater than the second reference value.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505: YES), information corresponding to the third period that allows 80 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1506). The third period is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the third period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the third period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the third period elapses.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S1505: NO), information corresponding to a fourth period that allows 70 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1507). The fourth period is the longest launch period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting information corresponding to the fourth period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the fourth period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth period elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game balls. This results in a longer firing cycle of the game balls when the opening and closing execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low-frequency support mode. And, by lengthening the firing cycle of the game balls, the number of game balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The game ball firing cycle becomes gradually longer as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

If the high frequency winning mode open/close execution mode, in which there are five rounds of play, occurs only once, the game ball launch period is maintained at the shortest launch period of 0.6 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time.

Even if the open/close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, no increment is made to the total rounds counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

The total rounds counter 64c is incremented when the opening and closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the ball launch cycle from suddenly slowing down during the opening and closing execution mode.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process executed in step S616 of the process of acquiring the variable duration period in the master MPU 62 ( Figure 14 ).

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration period for the current game round (step S1601: YES), the process shown in step S1602 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round is not executed. As already explained, when a game round resulting in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the variable duration period for the current game round in step S604 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). In this case, by not executing the process shown in step S1602 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round when the longest period has already been selected, it is possible to prevent the variable duration period for the game round from being extended cumulatively for the variable duration period for a single game round.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1602: YES), a first extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S1603). Specifically, one second is added as the first extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1604). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. This will be described in detail later. Note that the first reference value is "10" as already explained, and the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1605: YES), a second extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S1606). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the acquisition process of the variable duration (FIG. 14). In addition, a second extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1607). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for the game performance in accordance with the extension. This will be explained in detail later. Note that the third reference value is "60" as already explained.

If the variable duration of the game is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S1608: YES), a third extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S1609). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 of the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, a third extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S1610). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it determines that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for game presentation in accordance with the extension. This will be explained in detail later.

As described above, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will be long even in the high-frequency support mode. And as the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer, the number of play times occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times gradually becomes longer as the value of the total rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the more times this occurs, the longer the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times will be. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of play times per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

The duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, in which the number of rounds is five, occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of play times per unit time.

Even if the open/close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, no increment is made to the total rounds counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of times a game is played per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the performance pattern executed in step S1403 of the main command response process (Figure 22) in the sound/light side MPU 82.

First, information on the duration of the change in the game round is obtained from the currently received change command (step S1701). Then, a lottery process for the preview effect is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process for the preview effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not a preview effect will be generated in the current game round. The preview effect is executed when the variable display of the patterns in the upper pattern column Z1 and the variable display of the patterns in the lower pattern column Z3 are stopped in the pattern display device 41, a combination of reach patterns with the same patterns is formed, and the variable display of the patterns in the middle pattern column Z2 is continued. In the preview effect, a character image different from the patterns on the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed for a predetermined period. In the lottery process for the preview effect, a lottery is executed so that a preview effect is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a miss result.

Then, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1703). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is any of a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, and a 10R high probability big win result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. The active lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

The probability that the same odd number symbol combination will be displayed is higher for a 5R high probability jackpot result and a 10R high probability jackpot result than for a 10R low probability jackpot result. Also, the probability that the "7" symbol combination will be displayed is higher for a 10R high probability jackpot result than for a 5R high probability jackpot result and a 10R low probability jackpot result. Also, if the result of the current game is a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small probability jackpot result, the information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not formed on all of the active lines L1 to L5 and a specific symbol combination ("3, 4, 1") is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the active lines L1 to L5 are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is a miss, the presence or absence of a reach display is identified from the content of the variation command. Then, if a reach display occurs, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are not formed on all of the active lines L1 to L5 and a reach symbol combination is formed on one or two of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if a reach display does not occur, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are not formed on all of the active lines L1 to L5 and a reach symbol combination is not formed on all of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result.

Then, a presentation pattern is selected that corresponds to the information on the duration of the game round fluctuation set in the currently received fluctuation command, the results of the win/lose judgment and the allocation judgment for the current game round, and the presence or absence of a preview presentation, and the data table for the game round presentation corresponding to that presentation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84 (step S1704). Note that the presentation pattern does not reflect the information on the stopping patterns determined in the stopping pattern determination process (step S1703), but the information on the stopping patterns is sent to the display side MPU 92 as already explained. Therefore, the video display of the current game round on the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the presentation pattern and the information on the stopping patterns determined in the stopping pattern determination process (step S1703).

Figure 26 is an explanatory diagram to explain the contents of the data table for the game round presentation that is to be selected when a small win result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 26, if the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is 2 or 3 seconds, it will not result in a jackpot, and the lottery process for the preview effect will not result in a winning result for the occurrence of the preview effect. Therefore, if the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times specified in the fluctuation command is 2 seconds, the first data table is selected as the data table for the game turn effect, and if the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is 3 seconds, the second data table is selected as the data table for the game turn effect.

When the duration of fluctuation of game times is 5 seconds or more, multiple data tables exist corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot result and the presence or absence of a preview effect. Therefore, when the duration of fluctuation of game times specified in the fluctuation command is 5 or more, a data table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot result and the presence or absence of a preview effect is selected from the corresponding multiple data tables.

The 10-minute fluctuation duration is the longest period of the fluctuation duration of a game in this pachinko machine 10. As already explained, when a game result results in either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the current game in step S604 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). The longest period is not selected in any other situation. Therefore, the longest period, the 10-minute fluctuation duration, is selected only in the case of a big win result. On the other hand, even in the case of the longest period, there are cases where a notice performance is performed and cases where it is not performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration is 10 minutes and a notice performance does not occur, the n+4th data table is selected, and when the fluctuation duration is 10 minutes and a notice performance occurs, the n+5th data table is selected.

As described above, when the value of the total rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game result that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. In a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without a game result in the low-frequency support mode, if an open/close execution mode that results in a high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly, the duration of the fluctuation in the game result that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. And, as the duration of the fluctuation in the game result becomes longer, it takes a long time for the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds that results in the high-frequency winning mode to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

When the longest period of 10 minutes is selected, the moving image display of the game on the pattern display device 41 starts displaying the changing patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, then stops displaying the changing patterns in the upper pattern column Z1, and further stops displaying the changing patterns in the lower pattern column Z3. In this case, the same pattern is displayed on one or two active lines L1 to L5 in the upper pattern column Z1 and the lower pattern column Z3, so that the combination of reach patterns is displayed. In this situation, the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern column Z2 continues, so that the reach display is performed. When a notice performance occurs, a character corresponding to the notice performance is displayed when the reach display is started. After that, an image showing the combination of reach patterns and the changing display of patterns in the middle pattern column Z2 is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the pattern display device 41, and instead, a long-term movie image, which is a live-action image following a series of stories, is displayed on almost the entire display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

Figure 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the movie image for the longest period displayed on the pattern display device 41.

27(a), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays an image G1 in the upper right corner, which indicates that a combination of reach patterns and a pattern change display are being performed in the middle pattern row Z2. A movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in a large display range including the center of the display surface 41a. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is not displayed when a miss reach display occurs or when a reach display does not occur. It is also not displayed in a game round that results in a 5R high probability big win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a small win result. Therefore, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is confirmed. In other words, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of the maximum round number of opening and closing execution mode, which is a high frequency winning mode, is confirmed. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period.

When the movie image G2 for the longest period is displayed, a remaining time image G3 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to notify the remaining time of the movie image G2 for the longest period. In this case, the movie image G2 for the longest period ends when the variable duration of the number of play rounds has elapsed, so it can be said that the remaining time of the variable duration of the number of play rounds is notified by the remaining time image G3. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the variable duration of the number of play rounds becomes the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the variable duration of the number of play rounds, making it possible to ease the player's anxiety that the number of play rounds is taking a long time to end.

The timing at which the remaining time image G3 starts to be displayed will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b1) shows the period during which a game round is being played, FIG. 27(b2) shows the period during which the pre-reach display is being performed in which the changing display of the patterns in the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 has not been stopped, FIG. 27(b3) shows the period during which the reach display is being performed, FIG. 27(b4) shows the period during which the movie image G2 for the longest period is being displayed, and FIG. 27(b5) shows the period during which the remaining time image G3 is being displayed.

At timing t1, the longest game duration is started as shown in FIG. 27(b1). In this case, the variable display of the symbols in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started as shown in FIG. 27(b2). After that, the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped, and further, at timing t2, the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped, so that at timing t2, the pre-reach display is ended as shown in FIG. 27(b2) and the reach display is started as shown in FIG. 27(b3).

After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the movie image G2 for the longest period starts as shown in FIG. 27(b4), and further at the timing of t3, the display of the remaining time image G3 starts as shown in FIG. 27(b5). Then, at the timing of t4, the display of the movie image G2 for the longest period ends as shown in FIG. 27(b3) and FIG. 27(b4), and the reach display ends. Also, at the timing of t4, the time displayed in the remaining time image G3 becomes 0 seconds, and further, as shown in FIG. 27(b5), the remaining time image G3 is not displayed. After that, the final stop period has elapsed at the timing of t5, and the current round of play ends as shown in FIG. 27(b1).

As described above, when the display of the longest period movie image G2 starts, the display of the remaining time image G3 starts. This allows the player to recognize that the start of the display of the longest period movie image G2 will trigger the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is a high frequency winning mode, and makes it possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the longest period movie image G2 from being reduced by the display of the remaining time image G3.

Returning to the explanation of the presentation pattern determination process (FIG. 25), after the data table for game number presentation is read into the sound/light side RAM 84 in step S1704, it is determined whether or not the first extension command, the second extension command, or the third extension command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (step S1705). If the first extension command, the second extension command, or the third extension command has been received (step S1705: YES), the variable duration extension process is executed (step S1706). In the variable duration extension process, if the first extension command has been received, the variable duration of the game number grasped in step S1701 is extended by 1 second, if the second extension command has been received, the variable duration of the game number grasped in step S1701 is extended by 2 seconds, and if the third extension command has been received, the variable duration of the game number grasped in step S1701 is extended by 3 seconds. This makes it possible to make the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played recognized by the sound/light side MPU 82 the same as the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played recognized by the main side MPU 62.

Then, a data table modification process is executed (step S1707). In the data table modification process, a process is executed to modify the contents of the data table for game number presentation read into the sound/light side RAM 84 in step S1704 in accordance with the extension of the variable duration of game number presentation. The modification of the data table for game number presentation is explained below.

28(a) to 28(c) are time charts for explaining the manner in which the variable display of the patterns is performed in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. Fig. 28(a) shows a case in which the variable display of the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially during a game turn for 5 seconds, and no reach display occurs, Fig. 28(b) shows a case in which the variable display of the patterns in all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped simultaneously during a game turn for 2 seconds, and no reach display occurs, and Fig. 28(c) shows a case in which the variable display of the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially during a game turn for 20 seconds, and the variable display of the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially during a game turn for 20 seconds, and a reach display occurs. In addition, Figures 28(a1), 28(b1), and 28(c1) show the period during which the changing pattern display is being performed in the upper pattern column Z1, Figures 28(a2), 28(b2), and 28(c2) show the period during which the changing pattern display is being performed in the middle pattern column Z2, and Figures 28(a3), 28(b3), and 28(c3) show the period during which the changing pattern display is being performed in the lower pattern column Z3.

When the duration of the variation of the game round is 5 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped in sequence and no reach display occurs, the variation display of the symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 28(a1) to FIG. 28(a3). In this case, high-speed variation display is performed so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in all of the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish in appearance. After that, first, for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display at the timing of t2 so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 becomes easy to distinguish in appearance, and then the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 28(a1). After that, the display is switched from high-speed to low-speed so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a of the lower pattern column Z3 are easily distinguished from the outside, and the display of the symbols in the lower pattern column Z3 is stopped at t4 as shown in FIG. 28(a3). After that, the display is switched from high-speed to low-speed so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a of the middle pattern column Z2 are easily distinguished from the outside, and the display of the symbols in the middle pattern column Z2 is stopped at t5 as shown in FIG. 28(a2). In the above case, the high-speed display is performed so that the symbols in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are difficult or impossible to distinguish from the outside from t1 to t2.

When the duration of the variation of the game is 2 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time, and the reach display does not occur, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 28(b1) to FIG. 28(b3). In this case, the high-speed variation display is performed so that it becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol columns of the upper symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the lower symbol column Z3. After that, at the timing of t12, the high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display so that it becomes easy to distinguish the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. After that, at the timing of t13, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28(b1) to FIG. 28(b3). In the above case, from timing t11 to timing t12, a high-speed variable display is performed so that it becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish the symbols in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

When the duration of the variation of a game is 20 seconds and the display of the variations of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped in sequence and a reach display occurs, the display of the variations of the symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 28(c1) to FIG. 28(c3). In this case, the high-speed variation display is performed so that it becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in all of the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. After that, the display of the variations of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display at the timing of t22 so that it becomes easy to distinguish the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the display of the variations of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped at the timing of t23 as shown in FIG. 28(c1). After that, the display is switched from high-speed to low-speed so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol column Z3 is easily distinguished from the outside, and the display of the symbols in the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped at the timing of t24 as shown in FIG. 28(c3). At the timing of t24, the symbols displayed in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 are stopped to form a combination of symbols to reach the goal, and the reach display is started. After that, in the situation where the reach display is being executed, the display is switched from high-speed to low-speed so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the middle symbol column Z2 is easily distinguished from the outside, and the display of the symbols in the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped at the timing of t25 as shown in FIG. 28(c2). In the above case, the high-speed display is performed so that each symbol in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is impossible or difficult to distinguish from the outside.

As described above, regardless of the duration of the game number of times the ...

Figure 29 is an explanatory diagram to explain an example of a data table for game play presentation.

In the data table for game play presentation, pointer information is set for the number of frames corresponding to the variable duration of the target game play, and task content information is set corresponding to each pointer information. The task content information is information set to perform presentation corresponding to the current game play, and light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed so that presentation corresponding to the task content information is performed in each frame.

In the data table for game play performance shown in FIG. 29, the pointer information "0" is set to data at the start of the change, the pointer information "160" is set to data at the start of the slow change display of the changing display of the patterns in the upper pattern column Z1, the pointer information "200" is set to data at the stop of the changing display of the patterns in the upper pattern column Z1, the pointer information "300" is set to data at the stop of the changing display of the patterns in the lower pattern column Z3, the pointer information "400" is set to data at the start of the preview performance, the pointer information "700" is set to data at the start of the super reach, and the pointer information "1400" is set to data at the stop of the changing display of the patterns in the middle pattern column Z2. Data for updating the content of the performance between each timing is set for the other pointer information.

In such a data table for game play presentation, the pointer information of "0" to "160" is the high-speed variable display period during which high-speed variable display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to distinguish each symbol in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, when the duration of the variable display for a game play is extended, pointer information for the period corresponding to the current extension is added to the range of pointer information of "0" to "160", thereby increasing the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display by the period corresponding to the current extension. Then, the combination of pointer information from "161" onwards and the information on the corresponding task content is shifted backward by the amount of the added pointer information. Furthermore, data for continuing the presentation corresponding to the high-speed variable display is written into the task content corresponding to the added pointer information in the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display. When adding the pointer information, if a first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display, if a second extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display, and if a third extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display. As a result, the data table for game play presentation stored in advance in the sound/light ROM 83 is modified to correspond to the extension of the variable duration of the current game play.

Here, as already explained, after the presentation pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main command response process (FIG. 22) of the sound/light side MPU 82, a pattern command corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read in the presentation pattern determination process (step S1403) and a stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process (step S1703) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. In this case, if the data table modification process (step S1707) has not been executed in the sound/light side MPU 82, a pattern command set with information corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read into the sound/light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704) is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. In addition, when the data table modification process (step S1707) is being executed in the sound/light side MPU 82, a pattern command is sent to the display side MPU 92, in which not only information corresponding to the data table for game number presentation read into the sound/light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704) but also information corresponding to the extended period of time during which the game number fluctuation continues is set.

When the display side MPU 92 receives a pattern command and a stop result command, it first reads from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94 the information corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read to the sound/light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704) in the pattern command, and the display data table corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the stop result command. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as the data table for game round presentation, and specifically, pointer information is set for the number of frames corresponding to the variable duration of the target game round, and task content information is set corresponding to each pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set to perform a video display corresponding to the current game round, and is information for controlling the display of the pattern display device 41 so that an image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in each frame.

In this case, if the received pattern command is set with information corresponding to the period in which the game play fluctuation continuation period has been extended, the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display in the display data table is increased by the period corresponding to the current extension, similar to the data table correction process (step S1707) in the sound and light side MPU 82. Then, the pointer information following the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display and the information of the corresponding task content are shifted backward by the amount of the added pointer information. Furthermore, data for continuing the high-speed fluctuation display is written into the task content corresponding to the added pointer information in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, if the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, if the second extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and if the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. This causes the display data table pre-stored in the display side ROM 93 to be modified to correspond to the extension of the variable continuation period for the current game round.

When the duration of the variation of the number of play times is extended as described above, the high-speed variation display period during which the high-speed variation display is performed so that each pattern in all pattern rows Z1 to Z3 becomes visually impossible or difficult to distinguish is extended. This makes it possible to extend the duration of the variation of the number of play times without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

When the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times is extended, the data table for the play times presentation stored in advance in the sound/light side ROM 83 is modified to correspond to the extension of the duration of fluctuation of the current play times, and the display data table stored in advance in the display side ROM 93 is modified to correspond to the extension of the duration of fluctuation of the current play times. This eliminates the need to store in advance in the ROMs 83, 93 the data table for the play times presentation and the display data table corresponding to the extension of the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times. Therefore, it is possible to execute presentations corresponding to the extension of the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required in the ROMs 83, 93.

Next, the final stop period selection process executed in step S704 of the special chart change process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 62 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(a).

If the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. If the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1803). The second final stop period is 3 seconds. As already explained, the second reference value is "30".

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game rounds executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any game rounds occurring in the low frequency support mode, the final stop period of the game rounds becomes longer even in the high frequency support mode. And, as the final stop period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the open/close execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The final stop period of a game round will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds occurs only twice, but the final stop period of a game round will be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game rounds per unit time.

Next, the opening period selection process executed in step S803 of the special chart determination process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 62 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(b).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S1812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S1813). The second opening period is 10 seconds. As already explained, the second reference value is "30".

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that results in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open/close execution mode is not extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, but the opening period of the open/close execution mode is extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Next, the interval period selection process executed in step S1006 of the special line release process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(c).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1823). The second interval period is 6 seconds. As already explained, the second reference value is "30".

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that results in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

If the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, the interval period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended, but if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times, the interval period of the open/close execution mode will be extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

The total rounds counter 64c is incremented when the opening and closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer during the opening and closing execution mode.

Next, the ending period selection process executed in step S1010 of the special line release process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(d).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening and closing execution mode (step S1832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening and closing execution mode (step S1833). The second ending period is 12 seconds. As already explained, the second reference value is "30".

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, but the ending period of the open/close execution mode will be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 31, we will explain how restrictions on the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time are gradually introduced when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly while the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low-frequency support mode. FIG. 31(a) shows the progress of the game state, FIG. 31(b) shows how the game ball launch cycle changes, FIG. 31(c) shows how the variable duration of play times is extended, FIG. 31(d) shows how the final stop period of play times changes, and FIG. 31(e) shows how the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening and closing execution mode change.

As shown in Figure 31 (a), in a normal game state that is a low probability mode, a low frequency support mode, and not an open/close execution mode, a game round that results in a 2R high probability jackpot result occurs at timing t1, and at timing t2, the open/close execution mode ends with two rounds of play in the low frequency winning mode triggered by the 2R high probability jackpot result. In this case, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is maintained at "0". Therefore, in a gaming state in which the high probability mode and low frequency support mode are in effect from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball launch period is maintained at the first period, which is the shortest launch period, as shown in FIG. 31(b), a situation is maintained in which the duration of fluctuation in the number of game rounds does not extend as shown in FIG. 31(c), the final stop period of the game round is the relatively short first final stop period as shown in FIG. 31(d), the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first opening period as shown in FIG. 31(e), the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at t3, which is the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, a game round resulting in a 5R high probability jackpot occurs, and at t4, the open/close execution mode ends with five rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result. In this case, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode switches to the high frequency support mode, and "5" is added to the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, which corresponds to the number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode that have now ended. Therefore, at t4, the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "5". This value is less than the first reference value of "10". Therefore, in the game state in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode spanning from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball launch period is maintained at the first period which is the shortest launch period as shown in FIG. 31(b), a situation is maintained in which the variable continuation period of the game round does not extend as shown in FIG. 31(c), the final stop period of the game round is the relatively short first final stop period as shown in FIG. 31(d), the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first opening period as shown in FIG. 31(e), the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at t5, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a game round resulting in a 10R high probability jackpot occurs, and at t6, the opening and closing execution mode ends with 10 rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result. In this case, since the high frequency support mode is maintained after the opening and closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode that have now ended is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Therefore, at the time t6, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "15". This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, in the game state in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode from timing t6 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball launch period is the second period, which is the second shortest launch period, as shown in FIG. 31(b), and the variable continuation period of the game round is extended by one stage (i.e., 1 second) as shown in FIG. 31(c). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(d), the final stop period of the game round is the relatively short first final stop period, as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first opening period, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at t7, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a game round resulting in a 10R low probability big win occurs, and at t8, the opening and closing execution mode ends with 10 rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result. In this case, since the high frequency support mode is maintained after the opening and closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode that have now ended is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Therefore, at the time t8, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "25". This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, in the game state in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode spanning from timing t8 to timing t9 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball launch period is maintained at the second period which is the second shortest launch period as shown in FIG. 31(b), a situation is maintained in which the variable duration of a game round is extended by one stage (i.e., 1 second) as shown in FIG. 31(c), the final stop period of a game round is the relatively short first final stop period as shown in FIG. 31(d), the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first opening period as shown in FIG. 31(e), the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at t9, which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a game round resulting in a 10R high probability big win occurs, and at t10, the opening and closing execution mode ends with 10 rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result. In this case, since the high frequency support mode is maintained after the opening and closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode that have now ended is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Therefore, at the time t10, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "35". This value is equal to or greater than the second reference value of "30" and less than the third reference value of "60". Therefore, in a gaming state in which the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is active from timing t10 to timing t11 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball launch period is the third period, which is the second longest launch period, as shown in FIG. 31(b), and the variable duration of the game round is extended by two stages (i.e., 2 seconds) as shown in FIG. 31(c), and the final stop period of the game round is the relatively long second final stop period as shown in FIG. 31(d).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), at timing t11 a game round resulting in a 10R high probability big win occurs, and at timing t12 the opening and closing execution mode ends with 10 rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high probability big win result. In the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second opening period, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second interval period, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second ending period, as shown in FIG. 31(e).

The situation that restricts the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time as described above is released when a game round resulting in a 10R low probability jackpot result occurs, the open/close execution mode triggered by that game round ends, and then 80 game rounds are played without a jackpot result occurring in the game state that is the low probability mode and high frequency support mode that is started after that, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In other words, when the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", so that the firing cycle of the game balls returns to the first cycle which is the shortest firing cycle, and the situation returns to one in which the extension of the variable duration of the game round does not occur, the final stop period of the game round returns to the relatively short first final stop period, the opening period of the open/close execution mode returns to the relatively short first opening period, the interval period of the open/close execution mode returns to the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode returns to the relatively short first ending period.

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The larger the value of the total round number counter 64c in the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game balls. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer. And, as the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The game ball firing cycle becomes gradually longer as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

If the high frequency winning mode open/close execution mode, in which there are five rounds of play, occurs only once, the game ball launch period is maintained at the shortest launch period of 0.6 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time.

Even if the open/close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, no increment is made to the total rounds counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

The total rounds counter 64c is incremented when the opening and closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the ball launch period from suddenly becoming longer during the opening and closing execution mode.

The larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will be long even in the high-frequency support mode. And as the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer, the number of play times occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times gradually becomes longer as the value of the total rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the more times this occurs, the longer the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times will be. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of play times per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

The duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, in which the number of rounds is five, occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of play times per unit time.

When the variable duration of the number of times played is varied according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c, the processing mode of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614) is not changed, but the variable duration of the number of times played acquired in the period acquisition process (step S614) is varied using the various period tables. This makes it possible to vary the variable duration of the number of times played according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c while not changing the processing mode of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614).

In the first extension process (step S1603) of the variable duration, which is executed when the value of the total round count counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, a fixed first extension period is added to the variable duration period of the number of times played determined in the period acquisition process (step S614) regardless of the variable duration period of the number of times played determined using various period tables in the period acquisition process (step S614). This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for extending the variable duration period of the number of times played. The same applies to the second extension process (step S1606) of the variable duration and the third extension process (step S1609) of the variable duration.

When the duration of the variation of the number of play times is extended, the high-speed variation display period during which the high-speed variation display is performed so that each pattern in all pattern rows Z1 to Z3 becomes visually impossible or difficult to distinguish is extended. This makes it possible to extend the duration of the variation of the number of play times without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

When the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is extended, the data table for the play times presentation stored in advance in the sound/light side ROM 83 is modified to correspond to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the current play times, and the display data table stored in advance in the display side ROM 93 is modified to correspond to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the current play times. This eliminates the need to store in advance in the ROMs 83, 93 the data table for the play times presentation and the display data table corresponding to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times. Therefore, it is possible to execute presentations corresponding to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required in the ROMs 83, 93.

When the value of the total rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value and a game round resulting in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs, the longest period is selected. In a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without a game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, if an open/close execution mode resulting in a high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly, the duration of the fluctuation in the game rounds resulting in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. And, as the duration of the fluctuation in the game rounds becomes longer, it takes a long time for the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds to occur, which results in a high-frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Even if the value of the total rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and a game result that results in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs, the longest period is not selected as the duration of fluctuation in game times, and a period shorter than the longest period is selected. This makes it possible to delay the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, which is a high frequency winning mode and results in the greatest number of rounds, by lengthening the duration of fluctuation in game times, while preventing the longest period from being selected excessively as the duration of fluctuation in game times.

In a game in which the duration of fluctuation of a game number is the longest, a movie image G2 dedicated to the longest duration is displayed on the pattern display device 41. When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest duration is displayed, a remaining time image G3 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to notify the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest duration. Since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest duration ends when the duration of fluctuation of a game number has elapsed, it can be said that the remaining time of the duration of fluctuation of a game number is notified by the remaining time image G3. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the duration of fluctuation of a game number is the longest, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the remaining time of the duration of fluctuation of the game number, and it becomes possible to ease the player's anxiety that the game number is not ending soon.

When the display of the movie image G2 for the longest period starts, the display of the remaining time image G3 starts. This allows the player to recognize that the opening and closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is a high frequency winning mode, will occur when the display of the movie image G2 for the longest period starts, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the movie image G2 for the longest period from being reduced by the display of the remaining time image G3.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game rounds executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any game rounds occurring in the low frequency support mode, the final stop period of the game rounds becomes longer even in the high frequency support mode. And, as the final stop period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the open/close execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The final stop period of a game round will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds occurs only twice, but the final stop period of a game round will be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game rounds per unit time.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that results in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open/close execution mode is not extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, but the opening period of the open/close execution mode is extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

If the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, the interval period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended, but if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times, the interval period of the open/close execution mode will be extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

The total rounds counter 64c is incremented when the opening and closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer during the opening and closing execution mode.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. And, by lengthening the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs only twice, but the ending period of the open/close execution mode will be extended if the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode with 10 rounds of play occurs three times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

The duration of the variation of the number of play times, the final stop period of the number of play times, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period, and the ending period, which can affect the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time, are varied according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players. In particular, since the contents of multiple events, namely the duration of the variation of the number of play times, the final stop period of the number of play times, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period, and the ending period, are varied according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time according to the value of the total round number counter 64c.

In addition, when the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of rounds that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, but this is not limited to the above, and the number of rounds that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode when the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode starts may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Alternatively, when the game round that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of rounds that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. This makes it possible to start the firing cycle of the game balls according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, and to lengthen the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening and closing execution mode early.

Also, the number of rounds of play occurring in the opening and closing execution mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 during a game round that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of that game round begins. This makes it possible to start early the firing cycle of game balls according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the final stop period of the game round, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, when a game round that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is started, the number of rounds of play that occur in the open/close execution mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. This makes it possible to start early the firing cycle of game balls, the variable duration of game rounds, the final stop period of game rounds, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c.

Also, in the high frequency winning mode, the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the main RAM 64 may be configured to be incremented by 1 each time a round of play is started or a round of play is completed in the open/close execution mode. This makes it possible to immediately reflect the execution of a round of play or the execution of a round of play in the value of the total rounds counter 64c.

In addition, the rounds of play that are to be added to the total round number counter 64c are not limited to rounds of play in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and the rounds of play executed in either the open/close execution mode in the low frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode may be configured to be added to the total round number counter 64c.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to one in which all rounds in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode are counted toward the total round number counter 64c, and rounds in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode with the greatest number of rounds may be counted toward the total round number counter 64c, while other rounds may not be counted toward the total round number counter 64c. In addition, the configuration may be one in which rounds in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result are counted toward the total round number counter 64c, while other rounds may not be counted toward the total round number counter 64c.

In addition, the open duration of the round game may be configured to include not only a long-term mode and a short-term mode, but also a medium-term mode that is a period between these. In this case, of the round games that are short-term modes, the round games that are medium-term modes, and the round games that are long-term modes, only the number of round games that are long-term modes may be added to the total round number counter 64c, or the number of round games that are long-term modes and the number of round games that are medium-term modes may be added to the total round number counter 64c, or all the number of round games that are long-term modes, round games that are medium-term modes, and round games that are short-term modes may be added to the total round number counter 64c.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the parameter for triggering the restriction of the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the following detection sensors 142a to 149a are provided instead of the various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e in the first embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and an outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and supplied to the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passages 142-148 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Game balls that flow into the discharge passages 142-148 flow down the discharge passages 142-148 and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are collected in a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The game balls collected in the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each discharge passage section 142-148 is provided with various detection sensors 142a-148a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 142-148 and detection sensors 142a-148a will be described below. Since there are four general winning openings 31, there are discharge passage sections 142-144 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 142a, 143a is provided for each of the first discharge passage section 142 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage section 143 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is provided so that the detection range is located in the middle of the first discharge passage section 142, and the second winning opening detection sensor 143a is provided so that the detection range is located in the middle of the second discharge passage section 143. A game ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a while passing through the first discharge passage section 142, and a game ball that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the left is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a while passing through the second discharge passage section 143. In addition, a third discharge passage section 144 is provided for the two general winning openings 31 on the right side, which are formed so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 144 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the entrance side areas merge at an intermediate position to form one exit side area. A third winning opening detection sensor 144a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area in the third discharge passage section 144. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 144a while passing through the third discharge passage section 144.

The fourth discharge passage section 145 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 145a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 145, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 145. The fifth discharge passage section 146 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. A first operating port detection sensor 146a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 146, and the game ball that enters the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 146. The sixth discharge passage section 147 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. A second actuation port detection sensor 147a is provided so that its detection range exists midway through the sixth discharge passage section 147, and a game ball that enters the second actuation port 34 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 147a as it passes through the sixth discharge passage section 147. A seventh discharge passage section 148 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 148a is provided so that its detection range exists midway through the seventh discharge passage section 148, and a game ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 148a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage section 148.

A gaming ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 142a-148a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 142a-148a. A gate detection sensor 149a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 149a.

The various detection sensors 142a-149a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 142a-149a are electrically connected to the main MPU 62, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 142a-149a are output to the main MPU 62. Specifically, the various detection sensors 142a-149a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Figure 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main RAM 64 used to manage the payout rate. Note that in this embodiment, the main RAM 64 does not have a total rounds counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main RAM 64 has an area 150 for the number of entering balls. The area 150 for the number of entering balls has a general winning counter 151, a special winning counter 152, a first operation counter 153, a second operation counter 154, and an out counter 155. The various counters 151-155 in the area 150 measure the number of entering game balls in all game states without distinguishing between game states. All game states specifically include game states that are neither the open/close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode, game states that are the open/close execution mode, and game states that are the high frequency support mode.

The general winning counter 151 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning port 31 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counter 152 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counter 153 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first operation port 33 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 154 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second operation port 34 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 155 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a since a predetermined measurement start trigger.

The various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. Specifically, in all of the above-mentioned game states, when it is determined that one game ball has entered the general winning opening 31 based on the detection results of the first winning opening detection sensor 142a, the second winning opening detection sensor 143a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 144a, the value of the general winning counter 151 is incremented by 1, when it is determined that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 based on the detection results of the special electric detection sensor 145a, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 based on the detection results of the first operation opening .... If it is determined based on the detection result of sensor 6a that one game ball has entered first actuation port 33, the value of first actuation counter 153 is incremented by one, if it is determined based on the detection result of second actuation port detection sensor 147a that one game ball has entered second actuation port 34, the value of second actuation counter 154 is incremented by one, and if it is determined based on the detection result of outlet detection sensor 148a that one game ball has entered outlet 24a, the value of out counter 155 is incremented by one.

In addition to the entering ball count area 150, the main RAM 64 also has a management area 160, a calculation area 171, and a write pointer 172. The management area 160, calculation area 171, and write pointer 172 are used to calculate the ball payout rate for a specified period. The ball payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in all game states. If the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the entering ball count area 150 are K1 to K5, the ball payout rate is as follows.

The ratio of the total number of game balls dispensed (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

The management area 160 is provided with 60 memory areas 161-166 for storing information on the unit ball payout rate when 100 game balls, which is the specified unit number, are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the management area 160 is provided with first through 60th memory areas 161-166. The first through 60th memory areas 161-166 all have the same memory capacity, and each has a memory capacity that is capable of storing information on the unit ball payout rate.

The calculation area 171 is used to calculate the unit ball payout rate when 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA using the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150. The write pointer 172 is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to grasp the memory area 161 to 166 in the first to sixtieth memory areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 to which the unit ball payout rate is to be written. When a new unit ball payout rate is calculated by discharging 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, from the game area PA, the new unit ball payout rate information is overwritten in the memory area 161 to 166 in the first to sixtieth memory areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 that corresponds to the value of the write pointer 172, and then the value of the write pointer 172 is incremented by one. In this case, the value of the write pointer 172 can range from "0" to "59", and when the value of the write pointer 172 is "n", new unit ball payout rate information is overwritten in the n+1th memory area in the management area 160. Also, when the value of the write pointer 172 is incremented by 1 and exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 160 is provided with 60 memory areas 161-166 capable of storing information on the unit ball payout rate when 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA. Therefore, when information on the unit ball payout rate is stored in all of the first through sixtieth memory areas 161-166 of the management area 160, information that enables calculation of information on the target ball payout rate when 6,000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA, is stored in the management area 160. Each time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the main MPU 62 calculates a unit ball payout rate corresponding to the discharge of the 100 game balls and overwrites the unit ball payout rate information in the memory area 161-166 indicated by the write pointer 172 among the first to 60th memory areas 161-166 of the management area 160, but also calculates a target ball payout rate for the discharge of the calculation reference number of game balls by adding up all the unit ball payout rate information stored in the first to 60th memory areas 161-166 immediately after the overwriting and dividing the sum by "60", which is the number of memory areas 161-166. Then, the calculated target ball payout rate information is overwritten in the target ball payout rate area 173 provided in the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the target ball payout rate information stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 becomes a parameter for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the ball output rate monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62. The ball output rate monitoring process is executed by the timer interrupt process (Figure 10).

If the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S1901: NO), the ball entry management process is executed (step S1902). Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the ball entry management process.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 142a (step S2001: YES), i.e., if it is confirmed that the signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 142a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level; if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 143a (step S2003: YES), i.e., if it is confirmed that the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 143a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level; or if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 144a (step S2005: YES), i.e., if it is confirmed that the signal received from the third winning hole detection sensor 144a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level, the value of the general winning counter 151 is incremented by one (steps S2002, S2004, S2006). In addition, the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 10) also monitors the detection results of the first to third winning port detection sensors 142a to 144a, and if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by any of the first to third winning port detection sensors 142a to 144a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning port 31.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a (step S2007: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 145a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is incremented by 1 (step S2008). Note that the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 145a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and a process is executed to identify the trigger for ending the round of play.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 146a (step S2009: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the first actuation port detection sensor 146a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, the value of the first actuation counter 153 is incremented by 1 (step S2010). Note that the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 146a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 146a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the first actuation port 33, and a process is executed to identify the trigger for obtaining the reserved information on the first special chart side.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 147a (step S2011: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the second actuation port detection sensor 147a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, the value of the second actuation counter 154 is incremented by 1 (step S2012). Note that the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 147a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 147a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the second actuation port 34, and a process is executed to identify the trigger for obtaining reserved information on the second special chart side.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 148a (step S2013: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 148a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, the value of the out counter 155 is incremented by 1 (step S2014). Note that the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 148a is not monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 10).

By executing the ball entry management process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 is counted using the general winning counter 151, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is counted using the special electric winning counter 152, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is counted using the first operating counter 153, the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is counted using the second operating counter 154, and the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted using the outlet counter 155. This makes it possible for the main MPU 62 to grasp the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34.

Returning to the explanation of the payout rate monitoring process (FIG. 34), if a positive judgment is made in step S1901, or if the process of step S1902 is executed, a calculation process of the total number of dispensed balls is executed (step S1903). In the calculation process of the total number of dispensed balls, the sum of the values of the general winning counter 151, the special winning counter 152, the first operation counter 153, the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the ball entry number area 150 is calculated. The result of this calculation becomes the current total number of dispensed balls. Then, it is determined whether the calculated current total number of dispensed balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined unit number of "100" (step S1904). If the current total number of dispensed balls is less than the predetermined unit number (step S1904: NO), the payout rate monitoring process is terminated.

If the current total number of dispensed balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined unit number (step S1904: YES), a calculation process for the unit payout rate is executed (step S1905).
The ratio of the total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) is calculated. The calculation area 171 is used for this calculation.

The calculated unit ball payout rate information is overwritten in the memory area 161-166 indicated by the value of the write pointer 172 among the first to sixtieth memory areas 161-166 in the management area 160 (step S1906). After that, an update process for the write pointer 172 is executed (step S1907). In this update process, the value of the write pointer 172 is incremented by 1, and if the value after the increment exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

Then, all the unit ball payout rate information stored in the 1st to 60th memory areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 is added (step S1908), and the total value after the addition is divided by "60", which is the number of memory areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 (step S1909). Then, the numerical information obtained by multiplying the division result by 100 is overwritten in the target ball payout rate area 173 as the target ball payout rate information (step S1910). The target ball payout rate information is binary information, but is expressed as numerical information in the range of "0%" to "999%" in decimal notation. In this case, when the target ball payout rate is "100%, it means that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA, is the same as the total number of game balls paid out. If the target ball payout rate is below "100%", it means that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA, is greater than the total number of game balls paid out. If the target ball payout rate is above "100%", it means that the total number of game balls paid out when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA, is greater than the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. After that, the general winning counter 151, the special line winning counter 152, the first operation counter 153, the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the ball number area 150 are each cleared to "0" (step S1911).

By executing the ball payout rate monitoring process (Figure 34) as described above, the target ball payout rate for the previous calculation reference number of 6,000 game balls discharged from the game area PA is calculated each time the predetermined unit number of 100 game balls is discharged from the game area PA. This makes it possible to calculate the target ball payout rate each time the predetermined unit number of game balls is discharged from the game area PA.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the period setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the first reference value (step S2101). The first reference value is set to "134%". If the value of the target ball payout rate is less than the first reference value (step S2101: YES), information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2102). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the first period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled each time the first cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA each time the first cycle elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101, it is judged whether the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103). The second reference value is set to "200%". If the value of the target ball payout rate is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103: YES), information corresponding to the second period that allows 90 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2104). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, if the condition establishment signal is continuously received from the firing control unit 78c in the firing control process (FIG. 11), a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the second period elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled each time the second cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is sufficient to cause the game balls to reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA each time the second cycle elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, it is judged whether the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105). The third reference value is set to "300%". If the value of the target ball payout rate is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105: YES), information corresponding to the third period that allows 80 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2106). The third period is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the third period in the firing period area 64b, if the condition establishment signal is continuously received from the firing control unit 78c in the firing control process (FIG. 11), a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the third period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is enough to cause the game balls to reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

If the value of the target ball payout rate is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2105: NO), information corresponding to a fourth period that allows 70 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2107). The fourth period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting information corresponding to the fourth period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the fourth period elapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth period elapses.

As described above, the larger the target ball payout rate, the longer the game ball firing cycle. This lengthens the game ball firing cycle when the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode. And, by lengthening the game ball firing cycle, the number of game balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the open/close execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The game ball firing cycle becomes gradually longer as the target payout rate value increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time 100 game balls, which is the specified unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball payout rate is calculated for when 6,000 game balls, which is the previous calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA. The game ball launch cycle is then changed according to the calculated target ball payout rate value. This makes it possible to change the game ball launch cycle as appropriate according to changes in the target ball payout rate value even during the open/close execution mode or in the middle of a game round.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current win/loss determination result is a big win or small win result (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether the current win/loss determination result and allocation determination result are either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result that triggers the execution of the open/close execution mode with the greatest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, and whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2202). The third reference value is the largest reference value among the multiple reference values set, and is "300%" as already explained.

If the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2202: YES), the longest period among the multiple types of game times set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable duration period for the current game time (step S2204). The longest period is longer than the longest variable duration period among the variable duration periods set in the first winning time period table, as in the first embodiment. In other words, the longest period obtained in step S2204 is longer than any of the variable duration periods for game times selected in other situations. Therefore, the variable duration period for game times in which the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value is the longest period. Similarly to the first embodiment, when the longest period is selected, the variable duration of the number of play attempts is not extended, and when the longest period is selected as the variable duration of the number of play attempts, a movie image dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3 is displayed.

As described above, when the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a play round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. In a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without a play round in the low-frequency support mode, if an open/close execution mode that results in a high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly, the duration of the fluctuation in the play rounds that result in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. And, as the duration of the fluctuation in the play rounds becomes longer, it takes a long time for the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds that results in the high-frequency winning mode to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being given to a player in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, a variable command including the information on the above-mentioned maximum period and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2215), and then a period adjustment process is executed (step S2216). However, the period adjustment process after the process of step S2204 is executed does not extend the variable continuation period of the number of times played.

If the current result is either a 10R low-probability big win result or a 10R high-probability big win result but the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the third reference value, or if the current result is either a 5R high-probability big win result, a 2R high-probability big win result, or a small win result even if the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the winning time period table is read from the main ROM 63 in step S2203. The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

The processing contents of steps S2205 to S2213 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the contents of the reach period table, normal period table, and shortened period table are also the same as in the first embodiment described above.

When the winning period table is read in step S2203, when the reach period table is read in step S2206, when the normal period table is read in step S2209, when the shortened period table is read in step S2210, when the normal period table is read in step S2212, or when the shortened period table is read in step S2213, a period acquisition process is executed (step S2214). In the period acquisition process, the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is compared with the period table read as described above to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round.

When the processing of step S2204 is executed, or when the processing of step S2214 is executed, a variation command including information on the variation duration period of the currently acquired game round, and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2215). The data configuration of these variation commands and type commands is the same as in the first embodiment described above. After that, a period adjustment process is executed (step S2216).

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration period for the current game round (step S2301: YES), the process shown in step S2302 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round is not executed. When a game round resulting in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the variable duration period for the current game round in step S2204 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 37). In this case, by not executing the process shown in step S2302 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round when the longest period has already been selected, it is possible to prevent the variable duration period for the game round from being extended cumulatively for the variable duration period for one game round.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S2301: NO) and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2302: YES), a first extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2303). In the first extension process, as in step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, one second is added as the first extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2214 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 37). In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2304). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period, and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the first reference value is "134%" as already explained, and the second reference value is "200%" as already explained.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S2301: NO) and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2305: YES), a second extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2306). In the second extension process, similar to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, 2 seconds are added as a second extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2214 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 37). In addition, a second extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2307). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "300%" as already explained.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S2301: NO) and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2308: YES), a third extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2309). In the third extension process, as in step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, 3 seconds are added as a third extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2214 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 37). In addition, a third extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2310). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period, and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment above.

As described above, the larger the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173, the longer the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will be long even in the high-frequency support mode. And, as the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer, the number of play times occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The extension of the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times gradually becomes longer as the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 becomes larger. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the more times this occurs, the longer the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times will be. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of play times per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball payout rate is calculated for when 6000 game balls, which is the previous calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA. Then, the extension mode of the variable duration of the game rounds is changed according to the value of the calculated target ball payout rate. This makes it possible to change the extension mode of the variable duration of the game rounds as appropriate according to the change in the value of the target ball payout rate in a state where game rounds are repeatedly executed in a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode situation, a state where game rounds are repeatedly executed in a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode situation, or a normal game state where low probability mode and low frequency support mode is. In this case, the extension mode of the variable duration of the game rounds can be changed without being triggered by the start or end of the open/close execution mode.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, the final stop period of the game round is selected as the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, and the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. In addition, the opening period of the open/close execution mode is selected as the first opening period (4 seconds) if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, and the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. In addition, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is selected as the first interval period (2 seconds) if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, and the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. In addition, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is selected as the first ending period (6 seconds) if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, and the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value.

As described above, when the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode become longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any game rounds occurring in the low frequency support mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the various periods are changed according to the target ball payout rate, and the various periods may be changed according to any one of the following first to seventh parameters. Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150 are K1 to K5, the first to seventh parameters are as follows.
First parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 (K1) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 (K2) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
-Third parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 (K3) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
- Fourth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K4) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Fifth parameter: (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special winning device 32") / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
- Sixth parameter: (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning through the general winning port 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning through the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34") ratio.
- Seventh parameter: The ratio of K2 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning through the general winning port 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning through the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34").

The target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 may also be announced. Specifically, multiple 7-segment displays may be mounted on the main control board 61, and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 may be displayed on the multiple 7-segment displays. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the target ball payout rate. Note that in a configuration in which any of the first to seventh parameters are used instead of the target ball payout rate, the parameter to be used may also be announced.

The predetermined unit number is not limited to "100" and may be more or less than "100". For example, the predetermined unit number may be "1000". In this case, each of the first to sixtieth memory areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 stores information on the unit payout rate when 1000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA.

In addition, the timing at which the various periods are changed according to the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is not limited to an arbitrary timing, and may be a predetermined timing. For example, the various subsequent periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate when a new opening/closing execution mode is started, the various subsequent periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate when the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the various subsequent periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate when a game round is started, or the various subsequent periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate when a game round is ended.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the parameter for triggering the restriction of the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 39 (a) is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for this game has elapsed (step S2401). If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game round has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and the result of the hit/miss judgment that triggered the current game round was a big hit or a small hit (step S2402: YES), a process is executed to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, an opening period selection process is executed first (step S2403). As in the first embodiment, two types of periods are set as the target opening period: 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and the opening period selection process selects one of these two periods to be the opening period for the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, the information on the opening period selected in step S2403 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S2404). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command including information about the currently selected opening period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2405). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period is performed in the pattern display device 41.

Then, it is determined whether the hit/miss judgment result that triggered this game round was a 5R high probability big hit result, a 10R low probability big hit result, or a 10R high probability big hit result (step S2406). In other words, it is determined whether this game round triggers the occurrence of the open/close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. If a positive judgment is made in step S2406, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1 (step S2407), as shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 64 in FIG. 39 (b). In other words, in this embodiment, the main RAM 64 does not have a total round number counter 64c, and instead has a consecutive wins counter 181 for measuring the number of times the open/close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode has been executed without the occurrence of a game round in the low frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2406 or if the processing of step S2407 is executed, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S2408). As a result, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special drawing confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the hit/miss judgment result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (step S2402: NO), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1" to determine whether the game round that has ended this time was executed in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result (step S2409).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S2409: YES), the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S2410). Then, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times have been performed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S2411). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S2411: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2412). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

Then, the consecutive win counter 181 in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2413). In other words, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is not cleared to "0" even if the mode is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, but is cleared to "0" when the mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2409, if a negative judgment is made in step S2411, or if the processing of step S2413 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2414). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

The addition process (step S2407) to the consecutive win counter 181 is executed only when any of the following occurs, as described above: a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result. The support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode in which any of the following occurs: a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result, becomes the high frequency support mode. Also, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S2412 of the special pattern determination process (Figure 39), the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is cleared to "0", and the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in a situation other than the opening and closing execution mode is executed only in step S2412 of the special pattern determination process (Figure 39). Therefore, the consecutive win counter 181 is incremented by one when an open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs, which is a trigger for transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and is also incremented by one when an open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs in a low probability mode before a game in the low frequency support mode is started. In other words, the consecutive win counter 181 measures the number of times that the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs without a game in the low frequency support mode in between.

Here, even if a 2R high probability big win result occurs in the high frequency support mode and an open/close execution mode based on that is executed in the low frequency winning mode, no increment occurs in the consecutive win counter 181. Also, even if a small win result occurs in the high frequency support mode and an open/close execution mode similar to that of the low frequency winning mode is executed based on that, no increment occurs in the consecutive win counter 181. As a result, the payout of game balls is essentially executed, in other words, the number of occurrences of the open/close execution mode that essentially awards a profit to the player is measured by the consecutive win counter 181.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the period setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2501). The first reference value is set to "2". In other words, even if the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode occurs in the low frequency support mode as a trigger of any of the 5R high probability big win result, 10R low probability big win result, and 10R high probability big win result, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 will not reach the first reference value, and furthermore, in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode occurs again as a trigger of any of the 5R high probability big win result, 10R low probability big win result, and 10R high probability big win result, causing the value of the consecutive win counter 181 to reach the first reference value.

If the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is less than the first reference value (step S2501: YES), information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2501, it is judged whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503). The second reference value is set to "4". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs in response to any one of a 5R high-probability big win result, a 10R low-probability big win result, and a 10R high-probability big win result, and then in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs three times in response to any one of a 5R high-probability big win result, a 10R low-probability big win result, and a 10R high-probability big win result, causing the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 to reach the second reference value.

If the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503: YES), information corresponding to a second period that allows 90 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2504). The second period is the second shortest launch period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the second period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2503, it is judged whether the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505). The third reference value is set to "6". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs in response to any one of a 5R high-probability big win result, a 10R low-probability big win result, and a 10R high-probability big win result in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, and the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs five times in response to any one of a 5R high-probability big win result, a 10R low-probability big win result, and a 10R high-probability big win result, causing the value of the consecutive win counter 181 to reach the third reference value.

If the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505: YES), information corresponding to the third period that allows 80 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2506). The third period is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the third period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the third period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the third period elapses.

If the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2505: NO), information corresponding to the fourth period that allows 70 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2507). The fourth period is the longest launch period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting information corresponding to the fourth period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the fourth period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth period elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive win counter 181, the longer the firing cycle of the game balls. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer. And, as the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls that enter the play area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The ball launch cycle becomes gradually longer as the value of the consecutive win counter 181 increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly while the high frequency support mode continues without any play in the low frequency support mode, the ball launch cycle becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. This makes it possible to impose restrictions on the number of balls supplied to the play area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

If the high frequency winning mode open/close execution mode occurs only once, the game ball launch period is maintained at the shortest launch period of 0.6 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the low-frequency winning mode open/close execution mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, no increment is made to the consecutive win counter 181. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

The consecutive win counter 181 is incremented before the opening and closing execution mode is started, and does not occur during the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball launch cycle from suddenly slowing down during the opening and closing execution mode. Also, by incrementing the consecutive win counter 181 before the opening and closing execution mode is started, the game ball launch cycle is changed to the game ball launch cycle corresponding to the reference value from the start of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the trigger for reaching each reference value. Therefore, it becomes possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from the start of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the trigger for reaching each reference value.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current win/loss determination result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether the current win/loss determination result and allocation determination result are either a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result that triggers the execution of the open/close execution mode with the greatest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, and whether the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2602). The third reference value is the largest of the multiple reference values set, which is "6" as already explained.

If the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2602: YES), the longest period among the multiple types of game play durations set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable duration period for the current game play (step S2604). The longest period is longer than the longest variable duration period among the variable durations set in the first win time period table, as in the first embodiment. In other words, the longest period obtained in step S2604 is longer than any of the variable duration periods for game play selected in other situations. Therefore, the variable duration period for game play in which the result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value is the longest period. Similarly to the first embodiment, when the longest period is selected, the variable duration of the number of play attempts is not extended, and when the longest period is selected as the variable duration of the number of play attempts, a movie image dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3 is displayed.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game result that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. In a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without a game result in the low-frequency support mode, if an open-close execution mode that results in a high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly, the duration of the fluctuation in the game result that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. And, as the duration of the fluctuation in the game result becomes longer, it takes a long time for the open-close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds that results in the high-frequency winning mode to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, a variable command including the information on the above-mentioned maximum period and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2615), and then a period adjustment process is executed (step S2616). However, the period adjustment process after the process of step S2604 is executed does not extend the variable continuation period of the number of times played.

If the current result is either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result but the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is less than the third reference value, or if the current result is either a 5R high probability big win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a small win result even if the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the winning time period table is read from the main ROM 63 in step S2603. The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the contents of the reach period table, normal period table, and shortened period table are also the same as in the first embodiment described above.

If the winning period table is read in step S2603, if the reach period table is read in step S2606, if the normal period table is read in step S2609, if the shortened period table is read in step S2610, if the normal period table is read in step S2612, or if the shortened period table is read in step S2613, a period acquisition process is executed (step S2614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is compared with the period table read as described above to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round.

When the processing of step S2604 is executed, or when the processing of step S2614 is executed, a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the currently acquired game round and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2615). The data configuration of these variation commands and type commands is the same as in the first embodiment described above. After that, a period adjustment process is executed (step S2616).

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration period for the current game round (step S2701: YES), the process shown in step S2702 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round is not executed. As already explained, if a game round resulting in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the variable duration period for the current game round in step S2604 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 41). In this case, by not executing the process shown in step S2702 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round when the longest period has been selected, it is possible to prevent the variable duration period for the game round from being extended cumulatively for the variable duration period for a single game round.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2702: YES), a first extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2703). In the first extension process, as in step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, one second is added as the first extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2614 of the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 41). In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2704). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the first extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the first reference value is "2" as already explained, and the second reference value is "4" as already explained.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest duration (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2705: YES), a second extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2706). In the second extension process, similar to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, 2 seconds are added as a second extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2614 of the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 41). In addition, a second extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2707). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the second extension period and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "6" as already explained.

In a situation where the variable duration of the game is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2708: YES), a third extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S2709). In the second extension process, as in step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, 3 seconds is added as a third extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S2614 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 41). In addition, a third extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2710). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the variable duration of the current game has been extended by the third extension period, and modifies the contents of the data table for game performance in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment above.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive win counter 181, the longer the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will be long even in the high-frequency support mode. And as the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer, the number of play times occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played becomes gradually longer as the value of the consecutive win counter 181 increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which becomes the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring in the low frequency support mode, the more times this occurs, the longer the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played becomes. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of times played per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

The duration of fluctuation in the number of play times will not be extended if the high frequency winning mode open/close execution mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of play times per unit time.

Even if the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, no increment is made to the consecutive win counter 181. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, as for the final stop period of the game round, if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected, and if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Also, as for the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected, and if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Also, as for the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected, and if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. In addition, the ending period of the open/close execution mode is the first ending period (6 seconds) if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive win counter 181 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode become longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without any game rounds occurring in the low frequency support mode, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

In addition, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the main RAM 64 is incremented when the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is started, but this is not limited to this, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 may be incremented when the game round that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode ends.

The value of the consecutive win counter 181 may also be incremented during a game round that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and before the final stop period of that game round begins. This makes it possible to start early on the firing cycle of game balls according to the value of the consecutive win counter 181, the final stop period of the game round, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode.

The value of the consecutive win counter 181 may also be incremented when a game round that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is started. This makes it possible to start early the firing cycle of game balls, the duration of fluctuation of game rounds, the final stop period of game rounds, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode according to the value of the consecutive win counter 181.

The value of the consecutive win counter 181 may also be incremented after the opening period starts during the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, or when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the opening and closing execution modes that are added to the consecutive win counter 181 are not limited to the opening and closing execution modes based on the high frequency winning mode, and the opening and closing execution modes based on either the low frequency winning mode or the high frequency winning mode may be configured to be added to the consecutive win counter 181.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to one in which all opening and closing execution modes due to the high frequency winning mode are added to the consecutive win counter 181, and the opening and closing execution mode due to the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode may be added to the consecutive win counter 181, while the other opening and closing execution modes may not be added to the consecutive win counter 181. Furthermore, the configuration may be one in which the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result is added to the consecutive win counter 181, while the other opening and closing execution modes are not added to the consecutive win counter 181.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the variable duration of the number of games played according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 43 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base arrangement table 182.

The base arrangement table 182 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The base arrangement table 182 is set with index information, which is sequentially numbered from the minimum value "0" to the maximum value "n", and the variable duration of the number of times played is set corresponding to each index information. In the base arrangement table 182, all the variable durations of the number of times played that can be acquired in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in a situation where the period adjustment process (step S616) is not executed are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the variable duration of the number of times played is associated with it. In FIG. 43(a), the variable duration of 2 seconds is associated with the index information of "0", the variable duration of 3 seconds is associated with the index information of "1", the variable duration of 15 seconds is associated with the index information of "k", the variable duration of 9 minutes is associated with the index information of "n-1", and the variable duration of 10 minutes is associated with the index information of "n".

When the longest period is selected as the variable duration period of the number of times of play in step S604 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information of "n" in the base arrangement table 182 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. Also, when the period acquisition process is executed in step S614 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information corresponding to the read various period tables and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. The main MPU 62 ascertains the variable duration period of the number of times of play by collating the index information stored in the register with the base arrangement table 182. Also, this stored index information is set as data corresponding to the variable duration period in the variable command. The sound/light side ROM 83 prestores a table identical to the base arrangement table 182 prestored in the main ROM 63, and the sound/light side MPU 82 ascertains the variable duration period of the number of times of play corresponding to the index information set in the variable command by referring to the table.

Figure 43 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional array table 183.

The additional array table 183 is pre-stored in the main ROM 63. The additional array table 183 is set with index information that is sequentially numbered from the minimum value "0" to the maximum value "n". The number of index information items and the values that can be taken as index information items are the same as those of the base array table 182.

In the additional array table 183, additional periods for extending the variable duration of game plays are set in correspondence with each piece of index information. When the variable duration of game plays is extended in the period adjustment process (step S616) in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the additional period set in the additional array table 183 in correspondence with the index information corresponding to the variable duration of the game plays is added to the variable duration of game plays acquired at the stage before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the additional period set in the additional array table 183 is not constant, but differs depending on the index information. Specifically, a longer additional period is set for index information included in a predetermined numerical range larger than the small numerical range than for index information included in a small numerical range continuing from the minimum value. In other words, a longer additional period is set for a variable duration of play times included in a predetermined period range longer than a variable duration of play times included in a short period range continuing from the shortest period. However, 0 seconds is set as the additional period for index information that is equal to or greater than the predetermined numerical value, and no additional period is actually set. As a result, no extension of the period occurs for a variable duration of play times that is longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, the additional period set in the additional array table 183 is associated with index information of "0" and index information of "1", with an additional period of 1 second associated with index information of "k", with an additional period of 4 seconds associated with index information of "n-1" and index information of "n".

When the extension condition of the variable duration of the number of times of play is satisfied in the period adjustment process (step S616) of the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information corresponding to the variable duration of the number of times of play acquired before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed is collated with the additional array table 183, and the additional period corresponding to the index information is grasped. Then, the grasped additional period is added to the variable duration of the number of times of play in a manner according to the extension condition, and the variable duration of the current number of times of play is grasped by the main side MPU 62. In addition, when the additional period is acquired by the main side MPU 62, an extension command in which the additional period is set is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variable duration of the number of times of play grasped based on the variable command, thereby grasping the actual variable duration of the current number of times of play. In addition, when an additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for the number of times of play performance are corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable duration of the number of times of play. The content of the data table for this game play presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment above.

Figure 44 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment, which is executed by the master MPU 62. Note that the period adjustment process is executed in step S616 in the process of acquiring the variable duration period (Figure 14).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2801: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2802). Then, the additional array table 183 is checked against the index information corresponding to the variable duration of the number of times played that was stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) to determine the current additional period (step S2803). Then, the variable duration of the number of times played that corresponds to the index information is read based on the base array table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the variable duration of the number of times played that has been read is added to the variable duration of the number of times played that has been read, thereby determining the variable duration of the number of times played (step S2804). In this case, if the additional period is greater than 0 seconds, the variable duration of the number of times played is extended, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the variable duration of the number of times played is not extended.

Then, an extension command in which the additional period grasped in step S2803 is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2805). The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and by adding the grasped additional period to the variable duration of the game round grasped based on the variable command, grasps the actual variable duration of the current game round. Furthermore, if an additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are modified to correspond to the extension of the variable duration of the game round. This modification of the contents of the data table for game round presentation is performed for the high-speed variable display period of all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2806: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2807). Then, the additional array table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2808) by comparing the index information corresponding to the variable duration of the number of times of play stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) with the additional array table 183 to grasp the current additional period (step S2808), and further double the grasped additional period (step S2809). Then, the variable duration of the number of times of play corresponding to the index information is read based on the base array table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the variable duration of the number of times of play calculated in step S2809 is added to the read variable duration of the number of times of play to grasp the variable duration of the current number of times of play (step S2810). In this case, if the additional period determined in step S2808 is greater than 0 seconds, the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times is extended by twice the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times is not extended.

Then, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2809 is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2811). The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the determined additional period to the variable duration of the game round determined based on the variable command, thereby determining the actual variable duration of the current game round. Furthermore, if an additional period other than 0 seconds is determined based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are modified to correspond to the extension of the variable duration of the game round. This modification of the contents of the data table for game round presentation is performed for the high-speed variable display period of all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the master RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2812: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the master ROM 63 (step S2813). Then, the index information corresponding to the variable duration of the number of times of play stored in the register of the master MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is compared with the additional array table 183 to grasp the current additional period (step S2814), and the grasped additional period is further multiplied by three (step S2815). Then, the variable duration of the number of times of play corresponding to the above index information is read based on the base array table 182 of the master ROM 63, and the variable duration of the number of times of play calculated in step S2815 is added to the read variable duration of the number of times of play to grasp the variable duration of the current number of times of play (step S2816). In this case, if the additional period determined in step S2814 is greater than 0 seconds, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is extended by three times the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is not extended.

Then, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2815 is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2817). The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the determined additional period to the variable duration of the game round determined based on the variable command, thereby determining the actual variable duration of the current game round. Furthermore, if an additional period other than 0 seconds is determined based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are modified to correspond to the extension of the variable duration of the game round. This modification of the contents of the data table for game round presentation is performed for the high-speed variable display period of all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if the extension condition for the variable duration of the number of play times is met based on the value of the total rounds counter 64c, an additional period corresponding to the variable duration of the number of play times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is acquired, and the acquired additional period is added to the variable duration of the number of play times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), thereby determining the variable duration of the current number of play times. This makes it possible to extend the period by a length corresponding to the variable duration of the number of play times to be extended, and makes it possible to appropriately extend the variable duration of the number of play times.

When the degree of extension of the variable duration of the number of times played in the high frequency support mode is increased in response to an increase in the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the additional period obtained from one additional array table 183 is multiplied by a multiplier of 2 or more according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c to multiply the additional period multiple times, and the multiple additional period is added to the variable duration of the number of times played obtained before the period adjustment process (Figure 44) is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the variable duration of the number of times played by using one additional array table 183.

The configuration of extending the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times the game is played as in this embodiment may also be applied to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time is the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time is the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed due to the high frequency winning mode as in the third embodiment.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2801 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value ("134%) and less than the second reference value ("200%), in step S2806 it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("200%) and less than the third reference value ("300%), and in step S2812 it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value ("300%).

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2801 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value ("2") and less than the second reference value ("4"); in step S2806 it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("4") and less than the third reference value ("6"); and in step S2812 it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value ("6").

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the variable duration of the number of games played according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations different from the first embodiment are described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figures 45(a) to 45(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188.

The first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 are all set with index information that is sequentially numbered from a minimum value of "0" to a maximum value of "n", and a variable duration of play times is set in correspondence with each index information.

The first base arrangement table 185 shown in FIG. 45(a) is referenced when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value. The first base arrangement table 185 has all the variable durations of the number of play times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value set, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variable duration of the number of play times is associated with it. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. When the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the first reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the first base arrangement table 185 to grasp the variable duration of the number of play times. Then, a variable command in which the information of the variable duration of the number of play times that has been grasped is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

The second base arrangement table 186 shown in FIG. 45(b) is referenced when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. The second base arrangement table 186 is set with all of the variable durations of the number of play times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variable duration of the number of play times is associated with it. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base arrangement table 186 to grasp the variable duration of the number of play times. Then, a variation command in which information about the duration of the variation of the current game is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the variation of the current game based on the variation command.

The third base arrangement table 187 shown in FIG. 45(c) is referenced when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. The third base arrangement table 187 has all the game number fluctuation continuation periods that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, and the larger the index information, the longer the game number fluctuation continuation period is associated with. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the various period tables read out according to the game content and the index information corresponding to the acquired fluctuation type counter CS are stored in the register of the main MPU 62. When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base arrangement table 187 to grasp the game number fluctuation continuation period. Then, a variation command in which information about the duration of the variation of the current game is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the variation of the current game based on the variation command.

The fourth base arrangement table 188 shown in FIG. 45(d) is referenced when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In the fourth base arrangement table 188, all of the variable durations of the number of play rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value are set, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variable duration of the number of play rounds is associated with the variable duration. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the fourth base arrangement table 188 to grasp the variable duration of the number of play rounds. Then, a variable command in which the information of the variable duration of the number of play rounds grasped is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

When comparing the variable duration of game times set in each base arrangement table 185 to 188 using the same index information, the first base arrangement table 185 is the shortest, the second base arrangement table 186 is the second shortest, the third base arrangement table 187 is the second longest, and the fourth base arrangement table 188 is the longest. As a result, the larger the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the main RAM 64, the longer the average variable duration of the selected game times.

In addition, when comparing with the same index information, the increase in the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played in each of the base arrangement tables 185 to 188 increases as the value of the index information increases. This makes it possible to increase the increase in the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played when changed to the second base arrangement table 186, the third base arrangement table 187, and the fourth base arrangement table 188 by using a longer period of the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2901: YES), the first base arrangement table 185 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2902). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2903: YES), the second base arrangement table 186 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2904). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2905: YES), the third base arrangement table 187 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2906). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2905: NO), the fourth base arrangement table 188 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2907).

When the process of step S2902, step S2904, step S2906, or step S2907 is executed, a process is executed to read a period table according to the game content (step S2908). In this process, if the current game round is a big win or a small win, a winning period table is read. If the current game round is neither a big win nor a small win, the process of steps S605 to S613 in the variable continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big win or a small win, the winning period table is read out, if the current game round is a miss and corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, the reach period table is read out, if the current game round is in high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two, the normal period table is read out, if the current game round is in high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more, the shortened period table is read out, if the current game round is in low frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the first special chart side is less than three, the normal period table is read out, and if the current game round is in low frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the first special chart side is three or more, the shortened period table is read out.

In these period tables, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and index information is set for each of these groups instead of information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play based on each period table in the first embodiment. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play that results in either a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play that results in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play that does not result in a reach display. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play that results in either a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is longer than the number of times of play that results in a reach display that does not result in a miss. In addition, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation of game times in which a reach display does not occur. In addition, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in a miss reach display is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result and the average duration of the fluctuation of game times in which a reach display does not occur. In addition, in game times in which a reach display does not occur, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S2908, an index information acquisition process is executed (step S2909). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS with the period table read in step S2908.

Then, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2910). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S2909 is compared with the base arrangement tables 185-188 read in any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, and S2907 to acquire the variable duration of the current game. This acquired information on the variable duration of the game is set in the special chart special power timer counter in step S513 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13). This starts the measurement of the variable duration of the game. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable duration of the game is acquired using the base arrangement tables 185-188 according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, so the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the variable duration of the game is not executed.

Then, a variation command including information on the duration of variation of the number of times played acquired in step S2910 and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2911). The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of variation of the number of times played based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the presentation according to the determined duration of variation of the number of times played. In other words, in this embodiment, the sound/light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the duration of variation (step S1706), and further does not execute the process of modifying the data table for the number of times played presentation (step S1707).

According to the above configuration, the variable duration of the number of play times is obtained using the base arrangement tables 185-188 according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c, so the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the variable duration of the number of play times is not executed. And because the extension of the variable duration of the number of play times is not executed, the variable duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound/light side MPU 82, and further the correction process (step S1707) of the data table for the number of play times presentation is not executed. This makes it possible to lengthen the variable duration of the number of play times according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c while reducing the processing load.

In each period table that is read out according to the game content, index information is set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is obtained based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. Then, even if the index information is the same, the variation duration of the number of times of play that is obtained changes depending on which table among the first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 the index information is compared with. This makes it possible to obtain the variation duration of the number of times of play according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while using a common period table. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the variation duration of the number of times of play according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity.

The configuration of changing the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times of play as in this embodiment may be applied to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time is the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment described above, or to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs per unit time is the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed due to the high frequency winning mode as in the third embodiment described above.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2901 in the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than a first reference value ("134%"), in step S2903 it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value ("134%) and less than a second reference value ("200%), and in step S905 it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("200%) and less than a third reference value ("300%).

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2901 of the process of acquiring the variable duration (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is less than the first reference value ("2"), in step S2903 it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value ("2") and less than the second reference value ("4"), and in step S905 it is determined whether the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("4") and less than the third reference value ("6").

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for reducing the number of times the game is played in the high frequency support mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 differs from that of the first embodiment. The configurations different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current win/loss determination result is a big win or small win (step S3001: YES), the win period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3002). The contents of the win period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the current win/loss determination result is neither a big win nor a small win (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not a miss reach display will occur in the current game round (step S3003). If a miss reach display will occur in the current game round (step S3003: YES), a reach time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3004). The contents of the reach time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

If no miss reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003: NO), it is determined whether the high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" to determine whether the current support mode is the high frequency support mode (step S3005). If the high frequency support mode is selected (step S3005: YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved information on the second special symbol side reserved in the second special symbol reserved area 126 is three or more (step S3006). In the high frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high, so that reserved information on the second special symbol side is easily obtained. Furthermore, as already explained, reserved information on the second special symbol side is prioritized as a target for starting a game round over reserved information on the first special symbol side. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the period table referenced to determine the variable continuation period of the game round is changed according to the number of reserved information on the second special symbol side reserved and stored.

If the number of reserved information stored on the second special drawing side is less than two (step S3006: NO), the normal period table 191 (see FIG. 48(a)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). If the number of reserved information stored on the second special drawing side is two or more (step S3006: YES), it is determined whether the value of the total round number counter 64c in the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("30") (step S3008). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3008: YES), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value (step S3008: NO), the shortened period table 192 (see FIG. 48(b)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3009).

Figure 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal period table 191. As shown in Figure 48(a), the normal period table 191 has multiple groups set by dividing the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, the normal period table 191 has multiple types set so that the fluctuation duration of the number of times played during which there is no winning result and no reach display is relatively long and short, and each of the fluctuation type counters CS "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation duration.

Figure 48 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shortened period table 192. As shown in Figure 48 (b), in the shortened period table 192, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the variation type counter CS "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and information on the variation duration of the number of times played is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the shortened period table 192, multiple types are set so that the variation duration of the number of times played during which there is no winning result and no reach display is relatively long and short, and each of the variation type counters CS of "0 to 198" is assigned to one of these multiple types of variation duration.

The shortened period table 192 is set with a variable duration shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table 191. Therefore, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value, when a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where two or more reserved information items on the second special chart side are reserved and stored in the high frequency support mode, the variable duration of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. In addition, the average period of the variable duration of the game round according to the shortened period table 192 is shorter than the average period of the variable duration of the game round according to other period tables including the normal period table 191. Therefore, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value, when a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where two or more reserved information items on the second special chart side are reserved and stored in the high frequency support mode, the average period of the variable duration of the game round is shorter than in other situations.

If it is the low frequency support mode (step S3005: NO), it is determined whether the number of reserved information on the first special chart side reserved in the first special chart reserved area 125 is three or more (step S3010). As already explained, in the low frequency support mode, the frequency with which the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively low, so that reserved information on the second special chart side is difficult to obtain and reserved information on the first special chart side is easier to obtain than reserved information on the second special chart side. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the period table referenced to determine the variable duration of the game play count is changed according to the number of reserved information on the first special chart side stored in reserve.

If the number of reserved information items stored on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S3010: NO), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3011), and if the number of reserved information items stored on the first special drawing side is three or more (step S3010: YES), the shortened period table 192 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3012). The contents of these normal period table and shortened period table have already been explained.

When the winning period table is read in step S3002, when the reach period table is read in step S3004, when the normal period table 191 is read in step S3007, when the shortened period table 192 is read in step S3009, when the normal period table 191 is read in step S3011, or when the shortened period table 192 is read in step S3012, a period acquisition process is executed (step S3013). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is compared with the period tables 191 and 192 read as described above to acquire the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. This acquired information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in step S513 in the special chart fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). This starts the measurement of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable duration of the number of times played obtained using each period table 191, 192 is used as is, and the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the variable duration of the number of times played is not executed.

Then, a variation command including information on the duration of variation for the number of play times acquired this time and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S3014). The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of variation for the number of play times based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the presentation according to the determined duration of variation for the number of play times. In other words, in this embodiment, the sound/light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the duration of variation (step S1706), and further does not execute the process of modifying the data table for the number of play times presentation (step S1707).

According to the above configuration, even if the number of reserved information on the second special symbol side in the high frequency support mode is two or more, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the normal period table 191 is referenced to obtain the variable duration of the number of play times, as in the case where the number of reserved information on the second special symbol side in the high frequency support mode is less than two, instead of the shortened period table 192. Furthermore, the normal period table 191 is a period table referenced when the number of reserved information on the first special symbol side in the low frequency support mode is less than three. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high frequency support mode continues without a play time occurring in the low frequency support mode, the variable duration of the number of play times is not shortened even if the number of reserved information on the second special symbol side in the high frequency support mode is two or more. And, because the variable duration of the number of play times is not shortened, the number of play times per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent players from receiving excessively large benefits in a short period of time.

In addition, as described above, in the high frequency support mode, when the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more, the selected period table is switched between the existing normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192, so it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while reducing the processing load and preventing an increase in memory capacity.

The configuration of changing the duration of the number of times of play as in this embodiment may be applied to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time is the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or to a configuration in which the parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time is the number of times the open/close execution mode is executed by the high frequency winning mode as in the third embodiment. When applied to the second embodiment, in step S3008 in the process of acquiring the duration of the change (FIG. 47), it is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("200%"). When applied to the third embodiment, in step S3008 in the process of acquiring the duration of the change (FIG. 47), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive win counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value ("4") and less than the third reference value ("6").

In addition, in step S3008, instead of determining whether the value of the total round count counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be configured to determine whether it is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or whether it is equal to or greater than the third reference value, or whether it is equal to or greater than a reference value different from the first to third reference values.

Seventh embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figures 49(a) to 49(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to third base array tables 195 to 197.

The first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 are all set with index information that is a consecutive number starting from a minimum value of "0" and a maximum value of "n", and a variable duration of the number of times the game is played is set in correspondence with each index information.

The first base arrangement table 195 shown in FIG. 49(a) is referenced in the case of a non-regulated situation where a high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times occurring thereafter. The first base arrangement table 195 has all the variable durations of play times that can be selected in a non-regulated situation set, and the larger the index information, the longer the variable duration of play times is associated with. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. In the case of a non-regulated situation, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the first base arrangement table 195 to grasp the variable duration of play times. Then, a variable command in which the information of the variable duration of the grasped play times is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

The second base arrangement table 196 shown in FIG. 49(b) is referenced in the first regulated situation in which the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 5R high probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode continues without any play times in the low-frequency support mode thereafter. The second base arrangement table 196 has all the variable durations of play times that can be selected in the first regulated situation set, and the larger the index information, the longer the variable duration of play times is associated with. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game state and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. In the first regulated situation, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base arrangement table 196 to grasp the variable duration of play times. Then, a variable command in which the information of the variable duration of the grasped play times is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

The third base arrangement table 197 shown in FIG. 49(c) is referenced in the case of the second regulation situation in which the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R high probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode continues without any game times occurring thereafter. The third base arrangement table 197 has all the game times fluctuation continuation periods that can be selected in the case of the second regulation situation set, and the larger the index information, the longer the game times fluctuation continuation period is associated with. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game state and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. In the case of the second regulation situation, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base arrangement table 197 to grasp the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. Then, a fluctuation command in which the grasped information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

When comparing the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times set in each of the base arrangement tables 195 to 197 using the same index information, the first base arrangement table 195 is the shortest, the second base arrangement table 196 is the second shortest, and the third base arrangement table 197 is the longest. As a result, the average duration of fluctuation in the number of play times selected is longer in the order of non-restricted status → first restricted status → second restricted status.

In addition, when comparing with the same index information, the increase in the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played in each of the base arrangement tables 195 to 197 increases as the value of the index information increases. This makes it possible to increase the increase in the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played when changed to the second base arrangement table 196 and the third base arrangement table 197 by using a longer period of the duration of fluctuation in the number of times played.

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the ending period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3101). If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the special call termination process is terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3102). The content of the game state transition process is the same as step S1202 of the special call end process (Figure 20) in the first embodiment.

Then, it is determined whether the support mode before the current opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode and whether the support mode after the current opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-frequency support mode (step S3103). A pre-start support flag is provided in the main RAM 64, and if the support mode immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is cleared to "0", and if the support mode immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started is the high-frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is set to "1". In step S3103, if the pre-start support flag is "0" and the high-frequency support flag is "1", a positive determination is made.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3103, it is judged whether the trigger for this open/close execution mode is a 5R high probability big win result (step S3104). If a positive judgment is made in step S3104, information corresponding to a second period that allows 90 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3105). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the second period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is enough to cause the game balls to reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

Then, the second base arrangement table 196 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3106). As a result, when the variable continuation period of the number of times of play is obtained, the second base arrangement table 196 is referenced.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3104, it is judged whether the trigger for this open/close execution mode is a 10R high probability big win result (step S3107). If a positive judgment is made in step S3107, information corresponding to the third period that allows 80 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3108). The third period is 0.75 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the third period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the third period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is enough to cause the game balls to reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

Then, the third base arrangement table 197 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3109). As a result, when the variable continuation period of the number of times of play is obtained, the third base arrangement table 197 is referenced.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3103, if the processing of step S3106 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S3107, or if the processing of step S3109 is executed, the special chart special transmission counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). This updates the value of the special chart special transmission counter from the value corresponding to the special transmission end processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for this game has elapsed (step S3201). If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game round has elapsed (step S3201: YES), and the result of the win/loss determination that triggered the current game round was a big win or a small win (step S3202: YES), a process is executed to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, a process to obtain the opening period is executed (step S3203). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

Then, the information about the opening period acquired in step S3203 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S3204). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S3205). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the opening performance to be executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an opening performance is executed in the pattern display device 41.

Then, the value of the special chart special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S3206). This updates the value of the special chart special transmission counter from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the hit/miss determination result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (step S3202: NO), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1" to determine whether the game round that has ended this time was executed in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result (step S3207).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S3207: YES), the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S3208). Then, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times have been performed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S3209). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S3209: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3210). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

Then, information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3211). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

Then, the first base arrangement table 195 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3212). As a result, when the variable continuation period of the number of times of play is obtained, the first base arrangement table 195 is referenced.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3207, if a negative judgment is made in step S3209, or if the processing of step S3212 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3213). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

When a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode occurs, resulting in the first restriction state. In the first restriction state, as described above, the game ball launch period becomes the second period, which is the second shortest, and the second base arrangement table 196, which has the second longest average period of the game round fluctuation duration, is referenced when determining the game round fluctuation duration. Then, this first restriction state ends when a game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode, resulting in an unrestricted state. In the unrestricted state, as described above, the game ball launch period becomes the first period, which is the shortest, and the first base arrangement table 195, which has the shortest average period of the game round fluctuation duration, is referenced when determining the game round fluctuation duration.

When a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode occurs, resulting in the second regulated state. In the second regulated state, the game ball launch period is the longest, the third period, as described above, and the third base arrangement table 197, which has the longest average period of the variance duration of the game rounds, is referenced when determining the variance duration of the game rounds. Then, this second regulated state ends when a game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode, resulting in an unregulated state. In the unregulated state, the game ball launch period is the shortest, the first period, as described above, and the first base arrangement table 195, which has the shortest average period of the variance duration of the game rounds, is referenced when determining the variance duration of the game rounds.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, a process is executed to read out a period table according to the game content (step S3301). In this process, if the current game round results in a big win or a small win, a winning period table is read out. If the current game round results in neither a big win nor a small win, the process executes steps S605 to S613 in the process of acquiring the variable duration in the first embodiment (FIG. 14). As a result, if the current game round is a big win or a small win, the winning period table is read out, if the current game round is a miss and corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display, the reach period table is read out, if the current game round is in high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two, the normal period table is read out, if the current game round is in high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more, the shortened period table is read out, if the current game round is in low frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the first special chart side is less than three, the normal period table is read out, and if the current game round is in low frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the first special chart side is three or more, the shortened period table is read out.

In these period tables, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS from "0 to 198" so that they do not overlap with each other, and index information is set for each of these groups instead of information on the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play based on each period table in the first embodiment. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play resulting in either a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play resulting in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play without a reach display. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the number of times of play resulting in either a 10R low probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is longer than the number of times of play with a reach display. In addition, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation of game times in which a reach display does not occur. In addition, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in a miss reach display is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation of game times resulting in either a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small jackpot result and the average duration of the fluctuation of game times in which a reach display does not occur. In addition, in game times in which a reach display does not occur, the average duration of the fluctuation of game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S3301, an index information acquisition process is executed (step S3302). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS with the period table read in step S3301.

Then, a period acquisition process is executed (step S3303). In this period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S3302 is compared with the base arrangement tables 195-197 currently read into the master RAM 64 to acquire the variable continuation period of the current game round. Specifically, if the situation is unregulated, the index information acquired in step S3302 is compared with the first base arrangement table 195 read into the master RAM 64. If the situation is the first regulated situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is compared with the second base arrangement table 196 read into the master RAM 64. If the situation is the second regulated situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is compared with the third base arrangement table 197 read into the master RAM 64.

The information on the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played obtained in step S3303 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in step S513 of the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 13). This starts the measurement of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played. In other words, in this embodiment, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is obtained using base arrangement tables 195 to 197, so the period adjustment process (Figure 24) for extending the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is not executed.

Then, a variation command including information on the duration of variation of the number of times played acquired in step S3303 and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S3304). The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of variation of the number of times played based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the presentation according to the determined duration of variation of the number of times played. In other words, in this embodiment, the sound/light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the duration of variation (step S1706), and further does not execute the process of modifying the data table for the number of times played presentation (step S1707).

Next, the manner in which the non-restricted state, the first restricted state, and the second restricted state are set will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 53. FIG. 53(a) shows a period in which the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by a 5R high probability jackpot result, FIG. 53(b) shows a period in which the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result, FIG. 53(c) shows a period in which the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result other than the 5R high probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result, FIG. 53(d) shows a period in which the high frequency support mode is used, FIG. 53(e) shows a period in which the non-restricted state is used, FIG. 53(f) shows a period in which the first restricted state is used, and FIG. 53(g) shows a period in which the second restricted state is used.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), at the timing of t1 in the non-restricted state, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability big win result is started as shown in FIG. 53(c), and the opening and closing execution mode ends at the timing of t2. At the timing of t2, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is in effect immediately before the opening and closing execution mode is started, and the high-frequency support mode is in effect after the opening and closing execution mode ends, but since the big win result that triggered the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode is neither a 5R high-probability big win result nor a 10R high-probability big win result, the non-restricted state is maintained as shown in FIG. 53(e). Note that even if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability big win result or the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability big win result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the first restriction state or the second restriction state does not occur, and the non-restricted state is maintained. After that, at timing t3, the end reference number of play times in the high-frequency support mode is completed, and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 53(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(e), at the timing of t4 in the non-restricted state, the opening and closing execution mode is started triggered by the 5R high probability big win result as shown in FIG. 53(a), and the opening and closing execution mode ends at the timing of t5. At the timing of t5, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the low frequency support mode is in effect immediately before the opening and closing execution mode is started, and the high frequency support mode is in effect after the opening and closing execution mode is ended, and since the big win result that triggered the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode is the 5R high probability big win result, the non-restricted state ends and the first restricted state starts as shown in FIG. 53(e) and FIG. 53(f). As a result of the first restricted state, the game ball launch period becomes the second period, which is the second shortest, as described above, and the second base arrangement table 196, which has the second longest average period of the game number of fluctuations, is referenced when determining the game number of fluctuations.

After that, while the high frequency support mode continues, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 53(b), an opening and closing execution mode is started in response to a 10R high probability big win result, and at timing t7, the opening and closing execution mode ends. Since the 10R high probability big win result occurs in the high frequency support mode, the first regulation status is maintained. Here, in the first regulation status, the second base arrangement table 196 is referenced when determining the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times, even if the play time results in a 10R high probability big win result.

In addition, while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, it will become the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening and closing execution mode ends, it will become the high-frequency support mode again. The first restriction situation ends when the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result of a 10R low-probability jackpot, and then when the ending reference number of plays is played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, it transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain what happens when the second restriction situation occurs.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), at the timing of t8 in the non-restricted state, the opening and closing execution mode is started as a result of a 10R high probability big win as shown in FIG. 53(b), and the opening and closing execution mode ends at the timing of t9. At the timing of t9, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the low frequency support mode is in effect immediately before the opening and closing execution mode is started, and the high frequency support mode is in effect after the opening and closing execution mode is ended, and since the big win result that triggered the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode is a 10R high probability big win result, the non-restricted state ends and the second restricted state starts as shown in FIG. 53(e) and FIG. 53(g). As a result of the second restricted state, the game ball launch period becomes the longest third period as described above, and the third base arrangement table 197, which has the longest average period of the variable duration of the game rounds, is referenced when determining the variable duration of the game rounds.

After that, while the high frequency support mode continues, at time t10, as shown in FIG. 53(a), an opening and closing execution mode is started in response to a 5R high probability big win result, and at time t11, the opening and closing execution mode ends. Since the 5R high probability big win result occurs in the high frequency support mode, the second regulation status is maintained. Here, in the second regulation status, the third base arrangement table 197 is referenced when determining the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times, even if the play time results in a 5R high probability big win.

In addition, while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, it will become the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening and closing execution mode ends, it will become the high-frequency support mode again. The second regulation state ends when the opening and closing execution mode occurs as a result of a 10R low-probability jackpot, and then when the ending reference number of plays is played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, it transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

According to the above configuration, the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, resulting in a first restriction situation, and the first restriction situation continues until a game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. Also, the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, resulting in a second restriction situation, and the second restriction situation continues until a game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which a game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode is a type that is subject to restriction, a restriction situation occurs in which the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer and the average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game round becomes longer. Then, the restriction situation continues while the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period according to the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

When a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode occurs, resulting in a first restriction situation, and when a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode occurs, resulting in a second restriction situation in which the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time is lower than that of the first restriction situation. As a result, the more advantageous the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period, the lower the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The variable duration of play times is obtained using base arrangement tables 195-197 corresponding to the non-regulated situation, the first regulated situation, and the second regulated situation, respectively, so the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the variable duration of play times is not executed. And because the extension of the variable duration of play times is not executed, the variable duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound/light side MPU 82, and further the correction process (step S1707) of the data table for play times presentation is not executed. This makes it possible to lengthen the average period of the variable duration of play times in the first regulated situation and the second regulated situation while reducing the processing load.

In each period table that is read out according to the game content, index information is set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is obtained based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. Then, even if the index information is the same, the variation duration of the number of times of play obtained changes depending on which table among the first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 the index information is compared with. This makes it possible to obtain the variation duration of the number of times of play corresponding to each of the non-restricted situation, the first restricted situation, and the second restricted situation while using a common period table. Therefore, it is possible to extend the variation duration of the number of times of play in the first restricted situation and the second restricted situation while suppressing the increase in the required memory capacity.

In addition, at least one of the final stop period of a game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may be configured to differ depending on the non-restricted situation, the first restricted situation, and the second restricted situation. For example, in the non-restricted situation, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of a game round, in the first restricted situation, the second final stop period (3 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of a game round, and in the second restricted situation, the third final stop period (5 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of a game round. Also, in the non-restricted situation, the first opening period (4 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, in the first restricted situation, the second opening period (10 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the second restricted situation, the third opening period (16 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. Also, in a non-restricted state, the first interval period (2 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, in a first restricted state, the second interval period (6 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and in a second restricted state, the third interval period (10 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode. Also, in a non-restricted state, the first ending period (6 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, in a first restricted state, the second ending period (12 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, and in a second restricted state, the third ending period (18 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode.

As described above, by entering the first or second restriction status, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode are lengthened. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurring per unit time of the advantageous period depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

Eighth embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for this game has elapsed (step S3401). If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game round has elapsed (step S3401: YES), and the result of the win/loss determination that triggered the current game round was a big win or a small win (step S3402: YES), a process is executed to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, a process to obtain the opening period is executed (step S3403). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

Then, the information about the opening period acquired in step S3403 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S3404). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S3405). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the opening performance to be executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an opening performance is executed in the pattern display device 41.

After that, on the condition that the winning result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is either a 5R high probability big winning result or a 10R high probability big winning result (step S3406: YES), information corresponding to the second period that allows 90 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3407). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the launch period area 64b, if the condition establishment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c in the launch control process (FIG. 11), a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the second period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3406, or if the processing of step S3407 is executed, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S3408). As a result, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special drawing confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the win/loss determination result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot (step S3402: NO), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1" to determine whether the game round that has ended this time was executed in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result (step S3409).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S3409: YES), the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S3410). Then, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times have been performed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S3411). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S3411: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3412). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

Then, information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3413). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3409, if a negative judgment is made in step S3411, or if the processing of step S3413 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3414). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

With the above configuration, the game ball launch cycle becomes the longest second cycle based on the occurrence of a 5R high probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. This restricted state ends when a game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode. When the restricted state is lifted, the game ball launch cycle becomes the shortest first cycle. In other words, if the type of jackpot result that triggers the start of the advantageous period in which a game round is executed in the high frequency support mode is a type that is subject to restriction, the game ball launch cycle becomes long. The restricted state continues as long as the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, during the advantageous period triggered by a jackpot result that is a type that is subject to restriction, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period.

When an opening and closing execution mode occurs in the low frequency support mode as a result of a 5R high probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, it will start from the start of that opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to lengthen the game ball launch cycle from the start of the opening and closing execution mode that triggered the setting of the restriction status, and to slow down the progress speed of that opening and closing execution mode.

The above-mentioned restriction state does not occur if the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R low-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. This means that the above-mentioned restriction state occurs on the condition that the high-probability mode is in the high-frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode, making it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode triggered by a small win result is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned restricted state does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is no actual profit in terms of the awarding of game balls.

Ninth embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for this game has elapsed (step S3501). If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game round has elapsed (step S3501: YES), and the result of the win/loss determination that triggered the current game round was a big win or a small win (step S3502: YES), a process is executed to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, a process to obtain the opening period is executed (step S3503). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

Then, the information about the opening period acquired in step S3503 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S3504). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S3505). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the opening performance to be executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an opening performance is executed in the pattern display device 41.

After that, on the condition that the opening and closing execution mode that occurs this time is an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (step S3506: YES), that is, on the condition that an opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds occurs in a high frequency winning mode, information corresponding to a second period that allows the firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3507). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the second period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is enough to cause the game balls to reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3506 or if the processing of step S3507 is executed, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S3508). As a result, the value of the special drawing special transmission counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special drawing confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the win/loss determination result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot (step S3502: NO), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1" to determine whether the game round that has ended this time was executed in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result (step S3509).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S3509: YES), the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S3510). Then, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times have been performed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S3511). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S3511: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3512). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3509, if a negative judgment is made in step S3511, or if the processing of step S3512 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3513). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the ending period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3601). If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the special call termination process is terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3601: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3602). The processing content of the game state transition process is the same as step S1202 of the special call end process (Figure 20) in the first embodiment described above.

Then, information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3603). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

Then, the special chart special transmission counter is cleared to "0" (step S3604). This updates the value of the special chart special transmission counter from the value corresponding to the special transmission end processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

With the above configuration, when the opening and closing execution mode is started in response to a jackpot result, which is the type that is subject to regulation, the game ball firing cycle becomes the longest, the second cycle. This regulated state ends when the opening and closing execution mode ends. When the regulated state is lifted, the game ball firing cycle becomes the shortest, the first cycle. This makes it possible to slow down the progress of the opening and closing execution mode in response to a jackpot result, which is the type that is subject to regulation, and as a result, makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

In the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing execution mode with the most rounds, the firing cycle of the game balls is longer, while in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode with a smaller number of rounds, the firing cycle of the game balls is kept short. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

The opening and closing execution mode in which the game ball launch cycle is set to the second cycle is not limited to the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, and the game ball launch cycle may be set to the second cycle regardless of the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, or the game ball launch cycle may be set to the second cycle in any opening and closing execution mode, or the game ball launch cycle may be set to the second cycle only in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the method of measuring the total number of rounds that have occurred in a predetermined period is different from that of the first embodiment, and the configuration for changing the game situation according to the total number of rounds is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the master RAM 64 that are used to manage the total number of rounds. Note that in this embodiment, the master RAM 64 does not have a total number of rounds counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main RAM 64 is provided with a measurement round number counter 201 and a period measurement counter 202. The measurement round number counter 201 measures the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode within a calculation trigger period (specifically, 10 minutes). The period measurement counter 202 is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine that a calculation trigger period has elapsed since the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 began, and that a new calculation trigger period has elapsed since the timing of the previous calculation trigger period.

In addition to the measurement round number counter 201 and the period measurement counter 202, the main RAM 64 is also provided with a management area 203 and a write pointer 204. Using the management area 203 and the write pointer 204, the target round number, which is the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode due to the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the measurement target period (1 hour), is calculated.

The management area 203 is provided with six memory areas 203a-203f for storing information on the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode due to the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the 10-minute calculation trigger period. In other words, the management area 203 is provided with first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f. The first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f all have the same memory capacity, and each has a memory capacity that is capable of storing information on the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode due to the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the calculation trigger period.

The write pointer 204 is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to grasp the storage area 203a to 203f to which the total number of rounds is to be written when the calculation trigger period has newly elapsed among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. When the calculation trigger period has elapsed and the total number of rounds is newly calculated, the information on the new total number of rounds is overwritten in the storage area 203a to 203f corresponding to the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203, and then the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by 1. In this case, the value of the write pointer 204 can be a value between "0" and "5", and when the value of the write pointer 204 is "n", the information on the new total number of rounds is overwritten in the n+1th storage area in the management area 203. Also, when the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by 1 and exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 203 is provided with six memory areas 203a-203f capable of storing information on the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode with the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the 10 minute calculation trigger period. Therefore, when information on the total number of rounds (including "0") is stored in all of the first through sixth memory areas 203a-203f of the management area 203, information on the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode with the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the measurement period (1 hour) is stored in the management area 203. Each time the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) elapses, the master MPU 62 not only overwrites the information on the total number of rounds stored in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time to the memory area 203a-203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f of the management area 203, but also adds up all the information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f immediately after the overwriting and overwrites the information on the addition result as information on the target number of rounds to the target round number area 205 provided in the master RAM 64. In this embodiment, the information on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 (information on the total number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode due to the high frequency winning mode that occurred during the measurement target period (1 hour)) becomes a parameter for triggering the regulation of the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the special call termination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the ending period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3701). If a negative determination is made in step S3701, the special call termination process is terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3701: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3702). The content of the game state transition process is the same as step S1202 of the special call end process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

Then, by determining whether the winning result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode was a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result, it is determined whether the current opening and closing execution mode was a high frequency winning mode (step S3703). If the current opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode (step S3703: YES), the number of rounds played in the current opening and closing execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201 in the main RAM 64 (step S3704).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3703, or if the processing of step S3704 is executed, the special chart special transmission counter is cleared to "0" (step S3705). As a result, the value of the special chart special transmission counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special transmission end processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the management process is executed by the timer interrupt process (Figure 10).

First, the value of the period measurement counter 202 in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1 (step S3801). Then, if the value of the period measurement counter 202 after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S3802: YES), the processes shown in steps S3803 to S3808 are executed.

Specifically, the information of the measurement round number counter 201 in the main RAM 64 is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 (step S3803). After that, an update process for the write pointer 204 is executed (step S3804). In this update process, the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by 1, and if the value after the increment exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

Then, all the information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 is added together (step S3805), and the result of the addition is overwritten in the target round number area 205 as information on the target round number (step S3806). Then, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S3807), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S3808).

As described above, by executing the management process (FIG. 59), each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a-203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f in the management area 203, and the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f is added up to calculate the target round number. The calculated target round number information is then overwritten in the target round number area 205. As a result, each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the total number of rounds in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement target period (1 hour) is measured, and the information on the target round number, which is the result of the measurement, is stored in the target round number area 205.

Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the final stop period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S3901). As in the first embodiment, the first reference value is a value greater than the number of rounds of play executed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, and is the value of the number of rounds of play executed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the number of target rounds will not reach the first reference value if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result occurs only once during the measurement target period (1 hour). Also, if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs once during the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds will reach the first reference value.

The first reference value is not limited to "10", and may be a value greater than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively small, and may be a value less than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively large. The first reference value may be a value greater than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively large, and may be a value less than the number of times a round game is executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times a round game is executed is relatively small.

If the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S3901: YES), the base final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S3902). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds. Information on the base final stop period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base final stop period in step S3902, the selected base final stop period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in step S705 in the special chart change processing (Figure 15). This starts the measurement of the final stop period in the current game round. In addition, in step S706 in the special chart change processing (Figure 15), a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information indicating that the base final stop period is the final stop period of the current game round is set. By receiving the final stop command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, it starts static display of each pattern that will be the stop result of the current game round on the pattern display device 41. The static display continues for the final stop period of the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3901, it is judged whether the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S3903). As in the first embodiment, the second reference value is a value greater than the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs twice, which is the first multiple, and is the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs three times, which is the second multiple. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, even if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs during the measurement target period (1 hour), and further the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs, the target round number does not reach the second reference value. Furthermore, if an open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs during the measurement period (1 hour), the target round number will reach the second reference value. Note that the second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 or greater than "30" as long as it is greater than the first reference value.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S3903: YES), first, information on the base final stop period and information on the first common extension period are read from the main ROM 63 (step S3904). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as already explained. The first common extension period is set to 1 second. Then, the final stop period of the current game round is calculated by adding the first common extension period to the base final stop period (step S3905). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period, that is, 1.5 seconds, becomes the final stop period of the current game round. In step S705 in the special chart fluctuation process (FIG. 15), the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter. This starts the measurement of the final stop period of the current game round. In step S706 of the special pattern change process (FIG. 15), a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round. By receiving the final stop command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, starts the still display of each pattern that will be the stop result of the current game round on the pattern display device 41. The still display continues for the final stop period of the current game round.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3903: NO), first, information on the base final stop period and information on the first common extension period are read from the main ROM 63 (step S3906). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as already explained, and the first common extension period is set to 1 second as already explained. Then, the first common extension period is doubled (step S3907), and the resulting period is added to the base final stop period to calculate the final stop period of the current game round (step S3908). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period, which is 2.5 seconds, becomes the final stop period of the current game round. In step S705 in the special chart fluctuation process (FIG. 15), the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter. This starts the measurement of the final stop period of the current game round. In step S706 of the special pattern change process (FIG. 15), a final stop command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round. By receiving the final stop command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, starts the still display of each pattern that will be the stop result of the current game round on the pattern display device 41. The still display continues for the final stop period of the current game round.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the final stop period of the game round. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the final stop period of the game round will be longer. And, as the final stop period of the game round becomes longer, the number of game rounds occurring per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of the open/close execution mode occurring per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The final stop period of a game round becomes gradually longer as the value of the target round number increases. As a result, if an open/close execution mode, which is a high frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the final stop period of a game round becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of game rounds that occur per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203, and the total numbers of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f are all added together to calculate the target number of rounds. The final stop period of the game round is then changed according to the calculated target number of rounds. This makes it possible to change the final stop period of the game round as appropriate according to changes in the target number of rounds.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the final stop period of the current game round is measured by adding the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base final stop period, and if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the current game round is measured by adding twice the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base final stop period. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the final stop period of a game round by using information on one first common extension period.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the opening period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4001: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening and closing execution mode (step S4002). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. Information on the base opening period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base opening period in step S4002, the selected base opening period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in step S804 in the special chart confirmation processing (FIG. 16). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening and closing execution mode. In addition, in step S805 in the special chart confirmation processing (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the current opening period is set is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening and closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4003: YES), first read out the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4004). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4005). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the current opening period is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 16), the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set in the special drawing special electric timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current opening period. In addition, in step S805 of the special pattern determination process (FIG. 16), an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period. By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4003: NO), first read out the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4006). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4007), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4008). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current opening period is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 16), the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special drawing special power timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current opening period. In addition, in step S805 of the special pattern determination process (FIG. 16), an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is the current opening period. By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the opening period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, if an open/close execution mode that results in a high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the opening period of the open/close execution mode will be longer. And, by lengthening the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time will decrease. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open/close execution mode becomes gradually longer as the value of the target round number increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the opening period of the open/close execution mode becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203, and the total numbers of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f are all added together to calculate the target number of rounds. The opening period of the open/close execution mode is then changed according to the calculated target number of rounds. This makes it possible to change the opening period of the open/close execution mode as appropriate according to changes in the target number of rounds.

If the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode is measured by adding the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base opening period, and if the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode is measured by adding twice the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base opening period. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode by using information on one second common extension period.

Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the special call start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the system checks whether the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" to determine whether the opening time for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S4101). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the system ends the special call start process.

If the opening period for the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S4101: YES), the setting process for the jackpot result is executed, provided that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is the result of any jackpot (step S4102: YES).

In the setting process when a jackpot result is obtained, the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 is set to the number of rounds of play corresponding to the current jackpot result (step S4103). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "2", if the current jackpot result is a 5R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "10". The round counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine the number of remaining rounds of play in the open/close execution mode.

After that, the process at the start of opening is executed (step S4104). The process at the start of opening is described in detail below, but it executes a process for starting a new round of play or a process for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round of play. When the process at the start of opening is executed, if it is a process for starting a new round of play, the upper limit number of game balls for the special electric winning device 32 in this round of play is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64, and the number of times the special electric winning device 32 has been opened in this round of play is set in the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64, and the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in this opening is selected. Also, if it is a process for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round of play, the values are not set in the winning counter and the opening/closing counter, and the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in this opening is selected.

On the other hand, if the current opening and closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result (step S4102: NO), the setting process for the small win result is executed. In the setting process for the small win result, the opening and closing counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "2" (step S4105), and the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S4106). The opening and closing counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening and closing number specified mode opening and closing execution mode, and is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round of play in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number specified mode. After that, the read process of the open duration corresponding to the small win result is executed (step S4107). The open duration is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and specifically, it is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing period of the game balls (0.6 seconds).

When the processing of step S4104 or step S4107 is executed, the read information on the open duration is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4108). This starts the measurement of the open duration. After that, the open setting process is executed to set the special electricity winning device 32 in the open state (step S4109). In addition, an open command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S4110). By receiving the open command, the sound/light side MPU 82 executes control to switch the performance during the open/close execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display device 41 accordingly. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S4111). This updates the value of the special chart special electricity counter from the one corresponding to the special electricity start process to the one corresponding to the special electricity open process.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the special call release process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the open monitoring process is executed (step S4201). In the open monitoring process, when one game ball wins the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by one.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4202). In addition, it is determined whether the current open duration has elapsed by determining whether the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter is "0", and it is determined whether the upper limit period for the current round of play has elapsed by determining whether the value of the round period counter provided in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4203).

The round period counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to determine whether the upper limit period of the round game has elapsed, and the upper limit period of the round game is set in the round period counter at the start of each round game triggered by a 5R high probability big win result. In a round game triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, even if the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 has not reached the upper limit number and the special electric winning device 32 is in the middle of an open state, the round game ends when the upper limit period of the round game has elapsed. Note that in a round game in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 2R high probability big win result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened only once in the round game, so the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 becomes the upper limit period of the round game. In addition, in round play in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round play will vary according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, as described in detail below. If the special electric winning device 32 is opened only once in one round play, the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 will be the upper limit period for the round play, and if the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round play, the sum of the total open duration period and the total closed duration period of the special electric winning device 32 will be the upper limit period for the round play.

If the open duration has elapsed or the upper limit period for round play has elapsed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, a positive judgment is made in step S4203, and if the open duration has not elapsed and the upper limit period for round play has not elapsed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, a negative judgment is made in step S4203. If a negative judgment is made in both step S4202 and step S4203, the special line open processing is terminated as is. As a result, if the closing condition is not met, the special line winning device 32 will continue to be open.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S4202 or step S4203, a closing setting process is executed to close the special electric winning device 32 (step S4204). After that, the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S4205). After that, it is judged whether the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" or whether the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4206). In the case of the round number specified opening/closing execution mode, if the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" or the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", it means that the end condition of one round of play has been met. In the case of the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number specified mode, if the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" or the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", it means that the end condition of the opening/closing execution mode has been met.

In addition, in the case of a 5R high probability big win result, the condition for closing the special electric winning device 32 is that the value of the round period counter in the main RAM 64 becomes "0". The situation in which the value of the round period counter becomes "0" occurs only in the last opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each round play. Therefore, when the closing condition is met by the value of the round period counter becoming "0", the value of the opening and closing counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in the subsequent step S4205, so that the value of the opening and closing counter becomes "0". Therefore, when the upper limit period of the round play has elapsed in a round play in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, a positive judgment is made in step S4206 due to the value of the opening and closing counter in the main RAM 64 becoming "0".

If the result of the determination in step S4206 is positive, and the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result (step S4207: YES), the value of the round counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S4208). Then, it is determined whether the value of the round counter after the decrement is "0" (step S4209).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4206, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4209, this means that the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 will continue to occur in the current opening/closing execution mode. In this case, a selection process for the closed period is executed (step S4210). The selection process for the closed period, which will be described in detail later, executes a process for selecting a period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 will be maintained in a closed state between one opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the next opening of the special electric prize winning device 32.

Then, the information on the closed period selected in step S4210 is set in the special diagram special line timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S4211). This starts the measurement of the current closed period. Then, the value of the special diagram special line counter is incremented by 1 (step S4212). This updates the value of the special diagram special line counter from the value corresponding to the special line open processing to the value corresponding to the special line closed processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4206 and then a negative judgment is made in step S4207, this means that the conditions for terminating the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of a small win have been met. Also, if positive judgments are made in steps S4206 and S4207 and also in step S4209, this means that the conditions for terminating the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of a big win have been met. In these cases, an ending period selection process is executed (step S4213). The details of the ending period selection process in this embodiment will be explained later.

Then, the information on the ending period selected in step S4213 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S4214). This starts the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an ending command including information on the currently selected ending period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S4215). By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

Then, the value of the special diagram special line counter is incremented by 2 (step S4216). This updates the value of the special diagram special line counter from the value corresponding to the special line open processing to the value corresponding to the special line end processing.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the special line closed processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the current closed period or interval period has elapsed (step S4301). If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the special call closed processing is terminated.

If the current closing period or interval period has elapsed (step S4301: YES), the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any of the jackpot results (step S4302: YES), and the process at the start of opening is executed (step S4303). The process at the start of opening is described in detail below, but it executes a process for starting a new round of play or a process for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round of play. If the process at the start of opening is executed to start a new round of play, the upper limit number of game balls for the special electric winning device 32 in the current round of play is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64, and the number of times the special electric winning device 32 has been opened in the current round of play is set in the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64, and the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in the current round of play is selected. Also, if the processing is for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round of play, the winning counter and the open/close counter are not set to values, and the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 for the current opening is selected.

If the trigger for the current open/close execution mode is a small win result (step S4302: NO), a process for reading the open duration corresponding to the small win result is executed (step S4304). The contents of the process for reading the open duration corresponding to the small win result are the same as step S4107 in the special call start process (Figure 62).

When the processing of step S4303 or step S4304 is executed, the read information on the open duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S4305). This starts the measurement of the open duration. In addition, an open setting process is executed to set the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state (step S4306).

Then, it is determined whether the new opening of the special electric winning device 32 corresponds to the start of a new round of play in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of a jackpot (step S4307). If a positive determination is made in step S4307, an additional opening command including information on the currently selected opening duration is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S4308). By receiving the additional opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the current opening duration and starts measuring the opening duration, and also executes control to switch the presentation in the opening and closing execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41 accordingly. As a result, the content of the presentation in the opening and closing execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41 is switched to correspond to the start of a new round of play.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4307, that is, if a new opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by a small win result, or if a new opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the middle of a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by a big win result, an additional opening command is not sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. Therefore, if a new opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by a small win result, or if a new opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the middle of a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by a big win result, the contents of the performance during the opening and closing execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41 are continued as they are without being switched. This makes it possible to make it unnoticeable to the player that a new opening of the special electric winning device 32 has begun in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by a small win result, and that a new opening of the special electric winning device 32 has begun in the middle of a round of play in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by a big win result.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4307, or if the processing of step S4308 is executed, the special diagram special line counter is decremented by 1 (step S4309). As a result, the value of the special diagram special line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special line closed processing to the value corresponding to the special line open processing.

Figure 65 is a flow chart showing the process at the start of opening, which is executed in step S4104 of the special line start process (Figure 62) or in step S4303 of the special line closed process (Figure 64).

If the value of the open/close counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4401: NO), that is, if a round game is newly started in the open/close execution mode triggered by the big win result, the process for starting the round game shown in steps S4402 to S4416 is executed. Specifically, if the open/close execution mode is triggered by the 2R high probability big win result (step S4402: YES), the setting process for 2R is executed (step S4403). In the setting process for 2R, the open/close counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the open duration corresponding to the small win result, is selected as the open duration of the special electric winning device 32. This selected open duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start process (Fig. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closed process (Fig. 64), and the measurement of the open duration is started. In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high probability jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 will open once for 0.5 seconds, which is a short-term mode, during each of the two rounds of play.

If the mode is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result (step S4404: YES), the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is set to "2" (step S4405), and 5 seconds is selected as the current opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4406). This selected opening duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start process (Fig. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closed process (Fig. 64), and measurement of the opening duration is started. Furthermore, the round period counter of the main RAM 64 is set to 11 seconds, which is the upper limit period of the round play (step S4407). The update of the numerical information set in the round period counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 10), similar to the update of the numerical information set in the special chart special electric timer counter.

If the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (step S4404: NO), the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round of play and the opening duration of each opening varies according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. Specifically, if the target round number is less than the first reference value (step S4408: YES), the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S4409), and 11 seconds are selected as the current opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4410). Also, if the target round number is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4411: YES), the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is set to "3" (step S4412), and 3 seconds are selected as the current opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4413). If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4411: NO), the open/close counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "6" (step S4414), and one second is selected as the current open duration of the special call winning device 32 (step S4415). The selected open duration is set in the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special call start process (FIG. 62) or step S4305 of the special call closed process (FIG. 64), and measurement of the open duration begins.

As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, in each of the 10 rounds of play, the special electric winning device 32 opens a number of times corresponding to the target round number, and the open duration of each opening also corresponds to the target round number. In this case, the larger the value of the target round number, the more times the special electric winning device 32 opens in each round of play and the shorter the open duration of each opening. Furthermore, the larger the value of the target round number, the shorter the total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play.

When step S4403, step S4407, step S4410, step S4413, or step S4415 is executed, the upper limit of 10 is set in the winning counter in the main RAM 64 (step S4416). In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the open/close execution mode and the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, the upper limit of 10 for each round of play is constant.

If the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4401: YES), that is, when the second or subsequent opening of the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is started in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result, the rear opening process shown in steps S4417 to S4421 is executed. Specifically, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 5R high probability jackpot result (step S4417: YES), 5 seconds is selected as the current opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4418). This selected opening duration is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in the main RAM 64 in step S4305 of the special electric closing process (Figure 64), and measurement of the opening duration begins.

Here, when a new round of play is started in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result, as already explained, the opening and closing counter of the main RAM 64 is set to "2", 5 seconds is selected as the open duration, and 11 seconds, which is the upper limit period of the round play, is set in the round period counter. In addition, 5 seconds is selected as the open duration for the second and subsequent times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in each round play. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result, the special electric winning device 32 will open for 5 seconds twice in each of the five round plays, which is longer than the short-term mode and shorter than the long-term mode. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result, the closing period between one opening and the next opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each round play will vary depending on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, but regardless of which period is selected as the closing period, the round play will end when the upper limit period of 11 seconds has elapsed.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (step S4417: NO), as already explained, if the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 opens multiple times in one round of play. If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S4419: YES), 3 seconds is selected as the current open duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4420), and if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4419: NO), 1 second is selected as the current open duration of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4421). These selected open durations are set in the special chart special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 in step S4305 of the special electric closing process (Fig. 64), and measurement of the open duration begins.

Due to the above configuration, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the open duration is 11 seconds. In this case, in this embodiment, the game ball launching period does not change according to the number of target rounds, and the game ball launching period in a situation where game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27 and the game ball launching operation is continued is constant at 0.6 seconds. In addition, the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the end condition of the round game, is 10. Then, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is a value greater than the product of the game ball launching period and the upper limit number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is expected that more than the upper limit number of game balls will enter the special electric winning device 32 during each round of play.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened three times in each round play, and the open duration is three seconds. In this case, the total open duration in one round play is nine seconds, which is a value greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is possible to have more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round play. However, since the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed three times in one round play, depending on the supply mode of game balls to the special electric winning device 32, the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 may not reach the upper limit number. For example, in one out of five rounds of play, the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 may end up being nine.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is opened six times in each round of play, and the open duration is one second. In this case, the total open duration in one round of play is six seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, the special electric winning device 32, which has an open duration of one second, opens and closes six times in one round of play. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play will not reach the upper limit number. For example, the expected number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play is five.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the selection process for the closed period executed in step S4210 of the special line open processing (Figure 63).

If the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4501: YES), that is, if there is a further opening of the special electric winning device 32 in a round play in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big win result, or if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result, the closing period setting process shown in steps S4502 to S4507 is executed. Specifically, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by either a 10R low probability big win result, a 10R high probability big win result, or a small win result (step S4502: NO), one second is selected as the closing period (step S4504). This selected closing period is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in the main RAM 64 in step S4211 of the special electric open processing (Figure 63), and measurement of the closing period is started. Note that in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 2R high probability big win result, the special electric winning device 32 does not open multiple times in one round play.

As already explained, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result and the 10R high probability big win result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round of play can vary depending on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, but when the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round of play, the closed period between the first opening and the next opening is constant at 1 second regardless of the target round number. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is closed from becoming excessively long within the scope of one round of play, even if the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened in one round of play increases in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result and the 10R high probability big win result.

In the process of setting the closure period during a round game, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 5R high probability big win result (step S4502: YES), the closure period between the first opening and the next opening of the special line winning device 32 in one round game varies according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. Specifically, if the target round number is less than the first reference value (step S4503: YES), 1 second is selected as the current closure period of the special line winning device 32 (step S4504); if the target round number is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4505: YES), 4 seconds is selected as the current closure period of the special line winning device 32 (step S4506); if the target round number is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4505: NO), 5 seconds is selected as the current closure period of the special line winning device 32 (step S4507). These selected closed periods are set in the special call timer counter in the main RAM 64 in step S4211 of the special call open processing (Figure 63), and measurement of the closed period begins.

As described above, in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability jackpot result, the special electric winning device 32 opens multiple times in each of the five rounds of play, but the closed period between one opening and the next opening in one round of play becomes longer the larger the target round number value.

If the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4501: NO), that is, if an interval period between multiple rounds of play in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is to begin, the interval period setting process shown in steps S4508 to S4516 is executed. Specifically, if the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4508: YES), the base interval period is selected as the interval period for this opening/closing execution mode (step S4509). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds. The information on the base interval period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base interval period in step S4509, the selected base interval period is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in step S4211 in the special electric open processing (Figure 63). This starts the measurement of the current interval period.

If the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S4510: YES), first, the base interval information and the first common extension period information are read from the main ROM 63 (step S4511). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds as already explained. The first common extension period is set to 1 second as already explained. Then, the current interval period is calculated by adding the first common extension period to the base interval period (step S4512). In other words, if the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the current interval period is the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period, which is 2 seconds. In step S4211 in the special call open processing (Figure 63), the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current interval period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4510: NO), first, the base interval period information and the first common extension period information are read from the main ROM 63 (step S4513). The base interval period is set to 1 second as already explained, and the first common extension period is set to 1 second as already explained. Then, the first common extension period is doubled (step S4514), and the doubled period is added to the base interval period to calculate the current interval period (step S4515). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current interval period is 3 seconds, which is the sum of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period. In step S4211 in the special call opening process (Fig. 63), the sum of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current opening period.

When the processing of step S4509, step S4512, or step S4515 is executed, a close command in which the information of the currently selected interval period is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S4516). By receiving the close command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to perform an interval performance corresponding to the current interval period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs an interval performance corresponding to the current interval period.

Here, if the opening of the special electric winning device 32 ends in the middle of the opening execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by the result of a small win, or if the opening of the special electric winning device 32 ends in the middle of a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by the result of a big win, a close command is not sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. Therefore, if the opening of the special electric winning device 32 ends in the middle of the opening execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by the result of a small win, or if the opening of the special electric winning device 32 ends in the middle of a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by the result of a big win, the contents of the performance during the opening and closing execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41 will continue as is without being switched. This makes it possible to make it unnoticeable to the player that the special electric winning device 32 has finished opening in the middle of a round of play in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number-defined mode triggered by a small win result, and that the special electric winning device 32 has finished opening in the middle of a round of play in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number-defined mode triggered by a big win result.

As described above, the larger the value of the target round number, the longer the interval period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, if an open/close execution mode that results in a high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the interval period of the open/close execution mode will be longer. And, by lengthening the interval period of the open/close execution mode, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time will decrease. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open/close execution mode becomes gradually longer as the value of the target round number increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the interval period of the open/close execution mode becomes longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203, and the total numbers of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f are all added together to calculate the target number of rounds. The interval period of the open/close execution mode is then changed according to the calculated target number of rounds. This makes it possible to change the interval period of the open/close execution mode as appropriate according to changes in the target number of rounds.

If the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 is added to the base interval period to measure the interval period of the current opening/closing execution mode, and if the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second common extension period is added to the base interval period to measure the interval period of the current opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode by using information on one first common extension period.

The information on the first common extension period is also used when lengthening the final stop period of a game round in accordance with an increase in the number of target rounds. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of a game round but also the interval period of the open/close execution mode by using information on one first common extension period.

Next, the manner in which the execution mode of a round game changes depending on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 will be described with reference to the time charts of Figures 67(a) and 67(b). Figure 67(a) shows how the execution mode of a round game in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result (or a 10R low probability jackpot result) changes depending on the target round number, and Figure 67(b) shows how the execution mode of a round game in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability jackpot result changes depending on the target round number. Figures 67(a1) and 67(b1) show the execution period of round play, Figures 67(a2) and 67(b2) show the opening and closing modes of the special electric prize winning device 32 when the target number of rounds is less than a first reference value, Figures 67(a3) and 67(b3) show the opening and closing modes of the special electric prize winning device 32 when the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than a second reference value, and Figures 67(a4) and 67(b4) show the opening and closing modes of the special electric prize winning device 32 when the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value.

First, referring to FIG. 67(a), we will explain the round play in the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of a 10R high probability big win. We will also explain the case where the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number during the round play.

As shown in FIG. 67(a1), a round game is played from timing t1 to timing t2. The duration of the round game is fixed at 11 seconds regardless of the value of the target number of rounds stored in the target number of rounds area 205. If the target number of rounds is less than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state from timing t1 to timing t2 as shown in FIG. 67(a2).

In other words, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the period during which the round game is being played and the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state coincide with each other. In this embodiment, the game ball launching cycle does not change according to the number of target rounds, and the game ball launching cycle is constant at 0.6 seconds when game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27 and the game ball launching operation is continued. In addition, the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the end condition of the round game, is 10. Then, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is a value greater than the product of the game ball launching cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it can be expected that more than the upper limit number of game balls will enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round game.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(a3), the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from time t1 to time t3, the first closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from time t3 to time t4, the second opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from time t4 to time t5, the second closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from time t5 to time t6, and the third opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from time t6 to time t2. The round game ends when the third opening ends.

In other words, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 opens three times in one round of play, and the special electric winning device 32 closes two times. The open duration of each open time is constant at 3 seconds, and each closed period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is 9 seconds, which is a value greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is possible to enter more than the upper limit number of game balls into the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play. However, since the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes three times in one round of play, depending on the mode of supply of game balls to the special electric winning device 32, the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 may not reach the upper limit number. For example, there is a risk that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 will end at nine in one round of play. This results in a smaller expected number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(a4), the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t1 to timing t7, the first closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t7 to timing t8, and then the second opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t8 to timing t9, and then the second closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t9 to timing t10, and then the third opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t10 to timing t11, and then the third closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from timing t11 to timing t12. After the third closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t12, the fourth opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t12 to t13, after the fourth closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t13 to t14, the fifth opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t14 to t15, after the fifth closing period of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t15 to t16, the sixth opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs over the time t16 to t2. The round ends when the sixth opening period ends.

In other words, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the special electric winning device 32 opens six times in one round of play, and the special electric winning device 32 closes five times. The open duration of each open time is constant at 1 second, and each closed period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total open duration in one round of play is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball launch period and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, the special electric winning device 32, which has an open duration of 1 second, opens and closes six times in one round of play. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play will not reach the upper limit number. For example, the expected number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play is 5. This results in a smaller expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

As a result of the above, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement period (1 hour), causing the target round number value to become large, the expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability big win result or a 10R high-probability big win result will decrease. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability big win result or a 10R high-probability big win result gradually decreases as the value of the target round number increases. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions according to the amount of profit granted to the player on the expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability big win result or a 10R high-probability big win result.

Next, referring to FIG. 67(b), we will explain the round play in the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result. We will also explain the case where the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number during the round play.

As shown in FIG. 67(b1), a round game is played from t21 to t22. The duration of the round game is constant at 11 seconds, regardless of the value of the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. If the target round number is less than the first reference value, the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t21 to t23, as shown in FIG. 67(b2), and after a closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t23 to t24, the second opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t24 to t22. The round game ends when the second opening ends.

In this case, the open duration of each open round is 5 seconds, and the closed duration is 1 second. The total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is 10 seconds, which is a value greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is possible for more than the upper limit number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play. However, since the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed twice in one round of play, depending on the supply mode of game balls to the special electric winning device 32, the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in a round of play may not reach the upper limit. For example, there is a risk that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 will end up being 9 in one round of play out of 20 rounds.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(b3), the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t21 to t23, a closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t23 to t25, and then the second opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t25 to t22. The second opening ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at t22, before the open duration period elapses, and the end condition for the round game is met.

In this case, the first open duration is 5 seconds, the closed duration is 4 seconds, and the second actual open duration is 2 seconds. The total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is 7 seconds, which is a value greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is possible to have more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play. However, the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes twice in one round of play, and the second actual open duration is 2 seconds. Therefore, depending on the supply mode of game balls to the special electric winning device 32, the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in a round of play may not reach the upper limit number. For example, there is a risk that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 will end up at 9 in one of three rounds of play. This results in a smaller number of game balls expected to enter the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(b4), the first opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t21 to t23, a closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t23 to t26, and then the second opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from t26 to t22. The second opening ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at t22, before the open duration period elapses, and the end condition for the round game is met.

In this case, the first open duration is 5 seconds, the closed duration is 5 seconds, and the second effective open duration is 1 second. The total open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 in the second open round is 1 second. Therefore, it is highly likely that the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play will not reach the upper limit. For example, the expected number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in each round of play is 8. As a result, the expected number of game balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 in one round of play is smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

As a result of the above, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement period (1 hour), causing the target round number value to become large, the expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result will decrease. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The number of balls expected to enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result gradually decreases as the value of the target round number increases. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions according to the amount of profit given to the player on the number of balls expected to enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. The ending period selection process is executed in step S4213 during the special line release process (Figure 63).

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4601: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S4602). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. Information on the base ending period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base ending period in step S4602, the selected base ending period is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in step S4214 in the special electric open processing (Figure 63). This starts the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (Figure 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S4603: YES), first read out the base ending period information and the second common extension period information from the main ROM 63 (step S4604). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4605). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the current ending period is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special call open processing (Fig. 63), the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current ending period. In addition, in step S4215 of the special line open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, with information set indicating that the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is the current ending period. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4603: NO), first read out the information on the base ending period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4606). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4607), and the resulting period is added to the base ending period to calculate the current ending period (step S4608). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current ending period is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special call open processing (Fig. 63), the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current ending period. In addition, in step S4215 of the special line open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, with information set indicating that the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is the current ending period. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period is performed in the pattern display device 41.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the ending period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, if an open/close execution mode that results in a high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the ending period of the open/close execution mode will be longer. And, by lengthening the ending period of the open/close execution mode, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time will decrease. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open/close execution mode becomes gradually longer as the value of the target round number increases. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the ending period of the open/close execution mode will become longer the more frequently it occurs. Therefore, it is possible to impose restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time according to the amount of profit granted to the player.

Each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203, and the total numbers of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f are all added together to calculate the target number of rounds. The ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is then changed according to the calculated target number of rounds. This makes it possible to change the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode as appropriate according to changes in the target number of rounds.

If the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the ending period of the current opening and closing execution mode is measured by adding the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base ending period, and if the target number of rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the current opening and closing execution mode is measured by adding twice the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 to the base ending period. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode by using information on one second common extension period.

The information on the second common extension period is also used when lengthening the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode in accordance with an increase in the number of target rounds. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode but also the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode by using information on a second common extension period.

The tenth embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The final stop period of a game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, which can affect the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time, are varied according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players. In particular, since the contents of multiple events, namely the final stop period of a game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, vary according to the target round number, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time according to the target round number.

The information on the first common extension period is used when lengthening the final stop period of a game round and the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode in accordance with an increase in the number of target rounds. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of a game round but also the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode by using information on one first common extension period.

The information on the second common extension period is used when lengthening the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode in accordance with an increase in the number of target rounds. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode but also the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode by using information on a second common extension period.

The opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period included in the opening and closing execution mode are changed according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. As a result, the period required to complete the opening and closing execution mode changes according to the target round number. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

The opening period, during which no winning occurs in the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period vary according to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205. And by varying the period during which no winning occurs in the special electric winning device 32, the period required until the start of the period during which a winning may occur in the special electric winning device 32 varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

By varying the closed period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state during a round game according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 without varying the upper limit period during the round game, the period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state during the round game is varied. This makes it possible to set the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 during a round game appropriately according to the target round number.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed multiple times in each round of play, and the closed period of the special electric winning device 32 sandwiched between multiple opening times of the special electric winning device 32 in that round of play is changed according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. And, by changing the closed period of the special electric winning device 32 in this way in a situation where the upper limit period of the round play is not changed, the open period of the special electric winning device 32 that occurs after the closed period will change as a result. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in a round play in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big win result appropriate according to the target round number.

In the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result, the upper limit period for each round play is not changed, and the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state during the round play is changed according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. As a result, the closed period of the special electric winning device 32 during the round play changes according to the target round number. In addition, in this configuration, the length of one open time of the special electric winning device 32 that occurs during the round play also changes. And, by changing the length of one open time of the special electric winning device 32, the ease of entering the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 also changes. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 during the round play according to the target round number.

Every time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203, and the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f is added up to calculate the target round number. Then, the information on the calculated target round number is overwritten in the target round number area 205. As a result, every time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the total number of rounds in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement target period (1 hour) is measured, and the information on the target round number, which is the result of the measurement, is stored in the target round number area 205. In other words, the target round number in the next measurement target period can be set to a target round number in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period compared to the target round number in one measurement target period. Therefore, it is possible to manage the target round number in detail.

When a calculation trigger period shorter than the measurement target period has elapsed, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203. This makes it possible for the target number of rounds in the next measurement target period to be a number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period compared to the target number of rounds in one measurement target period.

Each time the calculation trigger period elapses, not only is the value of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time overwritten in the memory area 203a-203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f in the management area 203, but after the overwriting is completed, the target round number in the measurement target period is calculated based on the information on the number of times round play has been performed stored in the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f. This makes it possible to set the target round number in the next measurement target period to a range shifted by the calculation trigger period compared to the target round number in one measurement target period.

In addition, when the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of rounds of play that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64, but this is not limited to the above, and the number of rounds of play that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode when the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode starts may be added to the measurement round number counter 201. Also, instead of this configuration, when a game round that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of rounds of play that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201. Also, the number of rounds of play that occurred in the opening and closing execution mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201 during a game round that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round starts. Also, when a game that triggers a transition to the high frequency winning mode opening/closing execution mode is started, the number of rounds of play that occur in the opening/closing execution mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201. Also, each time a round of play is started or each time a round of play is completed in the high frequency winning mode opening/closing execution mode, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 may be incremented by one. This makes it possible to immediately reflect when a round of play is played or when a round of play has been played in the value of the measurement round number counter 201.

In addition, the rounds of play that are to be counted in the measurement round number counter 201 are not limited to rounds of play in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and the measurement round number counter 201 may be configured to count any round of play executed in either the open/close execution mode in the low frequency winning mode or the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to one in which all rounds in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode are counted toward the measurement round number counter 201, and a round play in the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode may be counted toward the measurement round number counter 201, while other round plays are not counted toward the measurement round number counter 201. Furthermore, the configuration may be one in which a round play in the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability big win result is counted toward the measurement round number counter 201, while other round plays are not counted toward the measurement round number counter 201.

In addition, the open duration of round play may be configured to include not only a long-term mode and a short-term mode, but also a medium-term mode that is a period between these. In this case, of round play in the short-term mode, round play in the medium-term mode, and round play in the long-term mode, only the number of round plays in the long-term mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201, or the number of round plays in the long-term mode and round play in the medium-term mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201, or all the number of round plays in the long-term mode, round play in the medium-term mode, and round play in the short-term mode may be added to the measurement round number counter 201.

In addition, the parameters that trigger changes in the final stop period of a game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode are not limited to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, but may be the value of the total round number counter 64c as in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive win counter 181 as in the third embodiment.

In addition, the measurement of the calculation trigger period using the period measurement counter 202 is configured to start when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 is started, but this is not limited to this, and may be configured to start when any type of opening and closing execution mode occurs, when an opening and closing execution mode that is a high frequency winning mode occurs, when an opening and closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds that is a high frequency winning mode occurs, or when the high frequency winning mode is started.

In addition, the information on the total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is not limited to being overwritten in the memory area 203a-203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f of the management area 203 each time the calculation trigger period elapses, but may be configured such that the information on the total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is overwritten in the memory area 203a-203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a-203f of the management area 203 each time the opening/closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode occurs or is completed. In this case, the memory area where the overwriting was performed may be cleared to "0" if a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the overwriting.

In addition, the upper limit period of the round game in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode is not limited to 11 seconds, and is arbitrary as long as the expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the round game changes with the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 or the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205. For example, the upper limit period of the round game may be configured to be less than 11 seconds, such as 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, or 10 seconds, or may be longer than 11 seconds, such as 12 seconds, 13 seconds, or 14 seconds. However, when the target round number is less than the first reference value, it is preferable to configure the round game in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode so that more than the upper limit number of game balls in the round game can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, it is preferable that the upper limit period of the round game is a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of round games.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are determined differently from the tenth embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the tenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the tenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the opening period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4701: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening and closing execution mode (step S4702). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. Information on the base opening period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base opening period in step S4002, the selected base opening period is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter in step S804 in the special chart confirmation processing (FIG. 16). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening and closing execution mode. In addition, in step S805 in the special chart confirmation processing (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the current opening period is set is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening and closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4703: YES), first read out the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4704). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4705). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the third reference value, the current opening period is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 16), the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set in the special drawing special electric timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current opening period. In addition, in step S805 of the special pattern determination process (FIG. 16), an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period. By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

Here, the third reference value is a value larger than the total number of rounds of play executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs five times, which is the third multiple, as in the first embodiment, and is the total number of rounds of play executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs six times, which is the fourth multiple. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, even if an opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs during the measurement target period (1 hour), and an opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs four times, the number of target rounds will not reach the third reference value. Also, if an opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result occurs further during the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds will reach the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60" and may be any value greater than the second reference value, that is, less than 60, or greater than 60.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4703: NO), first read out the information on the base opening period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4706). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4707), and the resulting period is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4708). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the current opening period is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period. In step S804 in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 16), the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special drawing special power timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current opening period. In addition, in step S805 of the special pattern determination process (FIG. 16), an opening command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, in which information is set indicating that the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extension period is the current opening period. By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 performs the opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the second reference value (step S4801: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S4802). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. Information on the base ending period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base ending period in step S4602, the selected base ending period is set in the special chart special electric timer counter in step S4214 in the special electric open processing (Figure 63). This starts the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (Figure 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. In addition, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes the ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4803: YES), first read out the information on the base ending period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4804). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4805). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the current ending period is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special call open processing (Fig. 63), the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current ending period. In addition, in step S4215 of the special line open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, with information set indicating that the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is the current ending period. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 executes an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4803: NO), first read out the information on the base ending period and the information on the second common extension period from the main ROM 63 (step S4806). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained, and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4807), and the resulting period is added to the base ending period to calculate the current ending period (step S4808). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current ending period is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special call open processing (Fig. 63), the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special call timer counter. This starts the measurement of the current ending period. In addition, in step S4215 of the special line open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82, with information set indicating that the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is the current ending period. By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the ending period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an ending performance corresponding to the current ending period is performed in the pattern display device 41.

According to the above configuration, when the number of target rounds becomes equal to or greater than the first reference value, the opening period and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode become longer while the ending period is maintained, when the number of target rounds becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period and the ending period become longer while the opening period is maintained, and when the number of target rounds becomes equal to or greater than the third reference value, both the opening period and the ending period become longer. This makes it possible to smoothly increase the function of preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time until the number of target rounds becomes equal to or greater than the third reference value, and when the number of target rounds becomes equal to or greater than the third reference value, it becomes possible to suddenly increase the function of preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

In addition, the configuration may be such that when the number of target rounds reaches or exceeds a first reference value, the ending period becomes longer while the opening period is maintained, when the number of target rounds reaches or exceeds a second reference value, the opening period becomes longer while the ending period is maintained, and when the number of target rounds reaches or exceeds a third reference value, both the opening and ending periods become longer.

In addition, the parameter that triggers the change in the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, but may be the value of the total round number counter 64c as in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive win counter 181 as in the third embodiment.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the modification of the game number presentation when the variable duration of the game number is extended according to the value of the total round number counter 64c is different from the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are set on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, resulting in a total of nine symbols (3 x 3) being displayed simultaneously. Incidentally, each waiting area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbols are finally displayed, the symbols waiting in each waiting area SA1 to SA9 are displayed stopped at the respective stop positions.

Five effective lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5, are set on the display surface 41a so as to connect one waiting area SA1 to SA9 (a total of three waiting areas SA1 to SA9) in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, the scrolling display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and switched to a waiting display. After the variable continuation period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent from the main MPU 62, and all the symbols in the waiting display are switched to a static display. This static display continues for the final stop period of the game round. In this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64.

In a game in which the game-round performance is executed with the pattern rows Z1-Z3 maintained, the scrolling display of the patterns of all pattern rows Z1-Z3 begins in a high-speed changing display, which is a low discrimination mode, and then each pattern row Z1-Z3 switches to a low-speed changing display, which is a high discrimination mode, in a predetermined order, and waiting display of the patterns begins in the waiting areas SA1-SA9 on each pattern row Z1-Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after a swinging display of the patterns is performed in the waiting display of the patterns in each waiting area ST1-ST9 of all pattern rows Z1-Z3, the patterns are displayed as still images (i.e., confirmed images) as the final stop display, and the still display state continues for the final stop period of the game round.

By the way, a swaying display, which is one type of waiting display, means that the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 sway within the same waiting area SA1 to SA9, and each symbol sway within the range that includes the stopping position within the corresponding waiting area SA1 to SA9, and each symbol sway within the range that includes the corresponding stopping position.

On the other hand, in a game in which the reach display is executed in a situation where the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not maintained, the scrolling display of the patterns begins, and the patterns of some of the pattern rows, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, are displayed in the waiting areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9 to form a reach line, and then an image for a super reach is displayed. After that, when a combination of big win patterns or a combination of reach patterns that is a miss is formed, the patterns displayed in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 on all pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a swaying display period. Then, these patterns are displayed statically, and this static display state continues for the final stop period.

In addition, a first pending display area Ga for notifying the number of pending information items stored on the first special chart side and a second pending display area Gb for notifying the number of pending information items stored on the second special chart side are set at the bottom of the display surface 41a. The first pending display area Ga and the second pending display area Gb are set so as not to overlap with the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a, but are not limited to this and may be set to overlap with part of the waiting areas SA1 to SA9.

Figure 72 is a time chart showing how the display mode of the patterns changes when a game-round performance is executed while the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained. Figure 72(a) shows the execution period of a game round, Figure 72(b) shows the variable display of the patterns in the upper pattern row Z1, Figure 72(c) shows the variable display of the patterns in the middle pattern row Z2, Figure 72(d) shows the variable display of the patterns in the lower pattern row Z3, Figure 72(e) shows the oscillating display period for all pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and Figure 72(f) shows the static display period.

When a game round starts at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 72(a), the scroll display of the patterns starts in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 72(b) to FIG. 72(d). In this case, the patterns are displayed in a high-speed changing manner in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, at the timing of t2, the scroll display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display as shown in FIG. 72(b), and at the timing of t3, the standby display of the symbols is started in each waiting area SA1-SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1. In this case, the oscillating display is started for the symbols that are being displayed in the standby display in each waiting area SA1-SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1. Also, at the timing of t3, the scroll display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display as shown in FIG. 72(d), and at the timing of t4, the standby display of the symbols is started in each waiting area SA7-SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, the oscillating display is started for the symbols that are being displayed in the standby display in each waiting area SA7-SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. Also, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the scrolling display of the symbols in the middle symbol column Z2 is switched from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and at the timing of t5, the waiting display of the symbols begins in each waiting area SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol column Z2. In this case, the oscillating display begins for the symbols that are being displayed in the waiting area SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol column Z2.

Here, at the time t5, the oscillating display has already started for the symbols displayed in standby in each standby area SA1-SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols displayed in standby in each standby area SA7-SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. In other words, the time t5 corresponds to the standby timing when the oscillating display of the symbols has started in each standby area SA1-SA9 of all symbol rows Z1-Z3, as shown in FIG. 72(e).

After that, at the timing of t6, the main side MPU 62 sends a final stop command to the sound/light side MPU 82, and based on that, the sound/light side MPU 82 sends a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, and the display mode of the patterns that were oscillatingly displayed in each waiting area SA1 to SA9 is switched to a static display, as shown in FIG. 72(f). After that, at the timing of t7, the final display period (e.g., 0.5 sec) for the game round has elapsed, and the performance for this game round ends.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment, which is executed by the master MPU 62. Note that the period adjustment process is executed in step S616 of the process of acquiring the variable duration period (Figure 14).

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration period for the current game round (step S4901: YES), the process shown in step S4902 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round is not executed. As in the first embodiment, when a game round resulting in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the variable duration period for the current game round in step S604 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). In this case, by not executing the process shown in step S4902 onwards for extending the variable duration period for the current game round when the longest period has already been selected, it is possible to prevent the variable duration period for the game round from being extended cumulatively for the variable duration period for one game round.

In a situation where the variable duration of game times is not the longest duration (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4902: YES), a first extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S4903). Specifically, one second is added as the first extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the acquisition process of the variable duration (FIG. 14). Note that in this embodiment, even if the first extension process of the variable duration is executed, a corresponding command is not sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. Also, the first reference value is "10" as in the first embodiment, and the second reference value is "30" as in the first embodiment.

If the variable duration of the number of games played is not the longest period (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4904: YES), a second extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S4905). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the process of acquiring the variable duration (FIG. 14). Note that in this embodiment, even if the second extension process of the variable duration is executed, no corresponding command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82. Also, the third reference value is "60", the same as in the first embodiment.

If the variable duration of game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total round count counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4906: YES), a third extension process of the variable duration is executed (step S4907). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the process of acquiring the variable duration (FIG. 14). Note that in this embodiment, even if the third extension process of the variable duration is executed, no corresponding command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the effect pattern in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side MPU 82. Note that the process of determining the effect pattern is executed in step S1403 of the main side command response process (Figure 22).

First, information on the duration of the variation of the number of times played is obtained from the currently received variation command (step S5001). In this case, the obtained information on the duration of the variation of the number of times played is set in a period measurement counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 84. The value set in the period measurement counter is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) in the sound and light side MPU 82 is started. This makes it possible for the sound and light side MPU 82 to obtain the remaining period of the variation of the number of times played. Note that, as in the first embodiment, the variation command is set with information on the duration of the variation of the number of times played acquired in step S614 in the process of acquiring the variation duration (FIG. 14), and even if any of the extension processes (steps S4903, S4905, S4907) have been executed in the period adjustment process (FIG. 73), the information on the period extended by the extension process is not reflected.

After that, a lottery process for the preview performance is executed (step S5002). The contents of the lottery process for the preview performance are the same as those of step S1702 of the performance pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment described above. After that, a stopping symbol determination process is executed (step S5003). The contents of the stopping symbol determination process are the same as those of step S1703 of the performance pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment described above.

Then, a presentation pattern is selected that corresponds to the information on the duration of the game round fluctuation set in the currently received fluctuation command, the results of the win/lose judgment and the allocation judgment for the current game round, and the presence or absence of a preview presentation, and the data table for the game round presentation that corresponds to that presentation pattern is read from the sound/light side ROM 83 to the sound/light side RAM 84 (step S5004). Note that the information on the stopping pattern determined in the stopping pattern determination process (step S5003) is not reflected in that presentation pattern.

In addition, in step S1404 of the main command response process (FIG. 22), as in the first embodiment, a pattern command corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read into the sound/light RAM 84 in step S5004 and a stop result command corresponding to the information on the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process (step S5003) are sent to the display MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display MPU 92 reads out the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display ROM 93 to the display RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a video display of the current game round corresponding to the presentation pattern and the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process is executed on the pattern display device 41.

Here, in the process of determining the presentation pattern in this embodiment, the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 executed in the process of determining the presentation pattern in the first embodiment (FIG. 25) are not executed. In other words, even if the variable duration of the number of times of play is extended in the master MPU 62 according to the value of the total rounds counter 64c, the master MPU 62 does not transmit an extension command corresponding to the extension, and therefore the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 executed in the process of determining the presentation pattern in the first embodiment (FIG. 25) are not executed. Instead, in this embodiment, the execution period of the standby display of the pattern is extended in the pattern display device 41 until the final stop command is transmitted from the master MPU 62, thereby dealing with the extension of the variable duration of the number of times of play in the master MPU 62. This configuration will be described below.

Figure 75 is an explanatory diagram to explain an example of a data table for game play presentation.

In the data table for game play presentation, pointer information is set for the number of frames corresponding to the variable duration of the target game play, and task content information is set corresponding to each pointer information. The task content information is information set to perform presentation corresponding to the current game play, and light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed so that presentation corresponding to the task content information is performed in each frame.

In the data table for game play performance shown in FIG. 75, the pointer information "0" is set to data at the start of the fluctuation, the pointer information "160" is set to data at the start of the slow fluctuation display in the fluctuation display of the patterns in the upper pattern column Z1, the pointer information "200" is set to data at the stop of the fluctuation display of the patterns in the upper pattern column Z1, the pointer information "300" is set to data at the stop of the fluctuation display of the patterns in the lower pattern column Z3, the pointer information "400" is set to data at the start of the advance notice performance, the pointer information "700" is set to data at the start of the super reach, the pointer information "1400" is set to data at the start of all oscillations, which is data on the timing when the oscillation display starts as a standby display in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the pointer information "1450" is set to data at the end of the fluctuation, which is data on the timing when the oscillation display ends in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In such a data table for game play presentation, the pointer information "1400" to "1450" are the periods during which the pointer information is displayed oscillatingly as a standby display in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, if any of the first to third extension processes for the variable duration (steps S4903, S4905, and S4907) is executed in the main MPU 62, the timing at which the final stop command is sent will be later than the timing at which the variable duration of the game play acquired in step S614 of the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the sound/light side MPU 82 has not received a final stop command from the main side MPU 62 despite the fact that the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times grasped based on the fluctuation command, i.e., the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times acquired by the main side MPU 62 in step S614 in the process of acquiring the duration of fluctuation (FIG. 14) has elapsed, it extends the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times by a predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second) and repeatedly refers to the data of the execution period of the rocking display in the data table for the number of play times presentation (data in the range of pointer information "1400" to "1450" in FIG. 75) until the predetermined extension period has elapsed. Then, if the final stop command has not yet been received from the main side MPU 62 despite the predetermined extension period having elapsed, it again extends the duration of fluctuation of the number of play times by the predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second) and repeatedly refers to the data of the execution period of the rocking display in the data table for the number of play times presentation (data in the range of pointer information "1400" to "1450" in FIG. 75) until the predetermined extension period has elapsed. This state in which the data for the execution period of the rocking display is repeatedly referenced ends when a final stop command is received from the main MPU 62. When a final stop command is received, a data table corresponding to the final stop period of a game round is read out, and light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, thereby executing an effect corresponding to the final stop period in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Furthermore, when the sound/light-emitting MPU 82 receives a final stop command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display MPU 92.

As already explained, after the presentation pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main command response process (Figure 22) of the sound/light side MPU 82, a pattern command corresponding to the data table for game round presentation read in the presentation pattern determination process (step S1403) and a stop result command corresponding to the information on the stop pattern determined in the stop pattern determination process (step S5003) are sent to the display side MPU 92.

When the display MPU 92 receives a pattern command and a stop result command, it first reads out a display data table corresponding to a combination of information corresponding to the data table for game round presentation set in the pattern command and information corresponding to the stop result command from the display ROM 93 to the display RAM 94. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as the data table for game round presentation, and specifically, pointer information is set for the number of frames corresponding to the variable duration of the target game round, and task content information is set corresponding to each pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set to perform a video display corresponding to the current game round, and is information for controlling the display of the pattern display device 41 so that an image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in each frame.

In this case, the sound/light side MPU 82 sends an extension command to the display side MPU 92 each time the variable duration of a game round is extended by a predetermined extension period (specifically, one second). When the display side MPU 92 receives an extension command, it repeatedly refers to the data for the execution period of the swaying display in the current display data table until the predetermined extension period has elapsed. This state in which the data for the execution period of the swaying display is repeatedly referred to ends when a command corresponding to a final stop command is received from the sound/light side MPU 82. When this command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read out, and the display control of the pattern display device 41 is executed according to the display data table, thereby statically displaying the patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the extension setting process executed by the audio/optical side MPU 82 to extend the execution period of the standby display as described above. Note that the extension setting process is executed in other processes (step S1415) in the main side command response process (Figure 22).

First, by determining whether the value of the period measurement counter in the sound and light side RAM 84 is "0", the variable duration of the game round set in the variable command sent from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game round, or if the variable duration of the game round has been extended by a predetermined extension period in the sound and light side MPU 82 after that, whether the predetermined extension period has elapsed or not is determined (step S5101). If a positive determination is made in step S5101, the variable duration extension process is executed (step S5102). In the extension process, information corresponding to the predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the period duration counter in the sound and light side RAM 84 (step S5102). In addition, a correction process for the data table is executed (step S5103). In the correction process, the data of the execution period of the rocking display in the data table for the game round performance read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 (data in the range of pointer information "1400" to "1450" in FIG. 75) is repeatedly referenced. This state in which the data for the execution period of the rocking display is repeatedly referenced ends when a command corresponding to a final stop command is received from the main MPU 62. When a final stop command is received, a data table corresponding to the final stop period of a game round is read out, and the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the performance corresponding to the final stop period is executed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

Then, an extension command is sent to the display side MPU 92 (step S5104). When the display side MPU 92 receives the extension command, it repeatedly refers to the data of the execution period of the swaying display in the current display data table until the specified extension period has elapsed. This state in which the data of the execution period of the swaying display is repeatedly referred to ends when a command corresponding to a final stop command is received from the sound/light side MPU 82. When this command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game round is read out, and the display control of the pattern display device 41 is executed according to the display data table, thereby statically displaying the patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41.

Next, the manner in which the execution period of the waiting display of the pattern is extended when the variable duration of the game number is extended will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 77. FIG. 77(a) shows a case in which the extension of the variable duration of the game number does not occur, and FIG. 77(b) shows a case in which the variable duration of the game number is extended, FIG. 77(a1) and FIG. 77(b1) show the execution period of the game number, FIG. 77(a2) and FIG. 77(b2) show a period in which the scrolling display of the pattern is executed in at least one of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 77(a3) and FIG. 77(b3) show a period in which the waiting display is executed for all the patterns, and FIG. 77(a4) and FIG. 77(b4) show a period in which the static display is executed for all the patterns.

First, referring to Figure 77(a), we will explain the case where the variable duration of game play is not extended.

At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 77(a1). At the timing of t1, the scroll display of the patterns in all the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 is started as shown in FIG. 77(a2). After that, the scroll display of the patterns is ended in the order of the upper pattern column Z1 → the lower pattern column Z3 → the middle pattern column Z2, and the standby display is started, and at the timing of t2, the standby display is executed on all the patterns as shown in FIG. 77(a3). After that, at the timing of t3, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round set in the fluctuation command transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round elapses, and the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the state where the standby display is executed on all the patterns is changed to the state where the static display is executed on all the patterns as shown in FIG. 77(a3) and FIG. 77(a4). The period during which the still display of all the symbols is performed is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game round, regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at timing t4, the still display of all the symbols ends as shown in FIG. 77(a4), and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 77(a1).

Next, we will explain the cases in which the variable duration of game plays is extended, with reference to Figure 77 (b).

At timing t1, a game round begins as shown in FIG. 77(b1). At timing t1, scrolling display of the patterns in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 begins as shown in FIG. 77(b2). After that, scrolling display of the patterns ends in the order of upper pattern column Z1 → lower pattern column Z3 → middle pattern column Z2, and the standby display begins, and at timing t2, the standby display is being executed for all patterns as shown in FIG. 77(b3).

After that, at the timing of t3, the duration of the game round that was set in the command for the variation sent from the master MPU 62 at the start of the current game round passes, but because the duration of the game round variation has been extended in the master MPU 62, the master MPU 62 does not send a final stop command. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the duration of the game round variation is extended by a predetermined extension period in the sound/light side MPU 82. In addition, settings are made so that the data for the execution period of the rocking display in the data table for game round performance read into the sound/light side RAM 84 (data in the range of pointer information "1400" to "1450" in FIG. 75) can be repeatedly referenced, and settings are made so that the data for the execution period of the rocking display in the display data table read into the display side RAM 94 can be repeatedly referenced.

After that, at the timing of t13, the master MPU 62 sends a final stop command. Therefore, at the timing of t13, the state where all symbols are displaying a standby state changes to a state where all symbols are displaying a still state, as shown in Figs. 77(b3) and 77(b4). The period during which the still display is being displayed for all symbols is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game round, regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c in the master RAM 64. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at the timing of t14, the still display for all symbols ends, as shown in Fig. 77(b4), and the current game round ends, as shown in Fig. 77(b1).

As described above, when the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is extended, the period during which the oscillating display is executed for all the symbols that are displayed in the standby state in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of the symbol display device 41 is extended. This eliminates the need to store in advance in ROM 83, 93 the data table for the play times presentation and the display data table that correspond to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times. Therefore, it is possible to execute the presentation that corresponds to the extension of the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required in ROM 83, 93.

When the variable duration of game plays is extended, the execution period of the standby display, which is the stage before the still display of all symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed, is extended. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the execution period during the scrolling display of symbols or the execution period during the reach display is extended, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound/light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 for performing this extension.

The standby display after the patterns are displayed in each standby area SA1 to SA9 in the game play performance in the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a rocking display, and may be, for example, a configuration in which the patterns are displayed in a vibrating manner, a configuration in which the patterns are displayed in a flashing manner, or a configuration in which the patterns are displayed in a zoomed-in manner. When the patterns are displayed in 3D or the like, the patterns may be displayed back and forth. The standby display may also be a configuration in which only a part of the pattern moves. For example, if the pattern is composed of characters and letters, the standby display may be a state in which one of them is stationary while the other is moving. The standby display may also be a state in which the pattern is stationary but the color of the pattern is changing.

Also, the standby display may be a state in which all the symbols waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are still, but a blinking display or a changing display of symbols is performed in a standby area set separately from the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, etc. In this case, a still display refers to a state in which not only the symbols but also the other areas are still displayed.

In addition, the parameter that triggers the change in the duration of the game play is not limited to the value of the total round count counter 64c, but may be the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 as in the third embodiment, or the target number of rounds stored in the target round count area 205 as in the tenth embodiment.

Thirteenth embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring reserved information in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the process of acquiring reserved information is executed in step S401 in the special call special call control process (Figure 12).

If a game ball has entered the first operating port 33 (step S5201: YES), the number of reserved information on the first special chart side reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 has not reached the upper limit number (specifically, 4) (step S5202: NO), and the acquisition process of the reserved information on the first special chart side is executed (step S5203). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d in the first special chart reserve area 125 where the reserved information on the first special chart side is not stored. Then, the first reserved command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5204). The sound/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the first reserved command to the display side MPU 92. When the display side MPU 92 receives this command, it changes the display of the number of reserved information on the first special pattern side on the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved items.

When a negative judgment is made in step S5201, when a positive judgment is made in step S5202, or when the process of step S5204 is executed, it is judged whether or not a game ball has entered the second actuation port 34 (step S5205). When a game ball has entered the second actuation port 34 (step S5205: YES), on the condition that the number of reserved information on the second special chart side reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 has not reached the upper limit number (specifically, 4) (step S5206: NO), an acquisition process of reserved information on the second special chart side is executed (step S5207). In this acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d in the second special chart reserve area 126 where reserved information on the second special chart side is not stored.

Then, a destination identification process is executed (step S5208). The details of the destination identification process will be explained later. Then, a second hold command is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5209). The sound/light side MPU 82 sends a command corresponding to the second hold command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the second special pattern side on the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the destination identification process executed in step S5208 in the pending information acquisition process (Figure 78).

First, it is determined whether the jackpot identification flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5301). The jackpot identification flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to determine whether the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result has already been reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126. If a positive determination is made in step S5301, the destination identification process is terminated as is. Therefore, if the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result has already been reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the destination identification process shown in steps S5302 and onwards is not executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5301, it is judged whether or not the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode (step S5302). If the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode (step S5302: NO), the destination identification process is terminated. Therefore, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the destination identification process shown in steps S5303 and after is not executed.

If the support mode is the high frequency support mode (step S5302: YES), a win/lose determination process is executed (step S5303). In the win/lose determination process, first, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the information for win/lose determination among the reserved information on the second special chart side acquired this time, that is, the numerical information acquired from the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability, by referring to the win/lose table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. Also, if it is the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information for win/lose determination among the reserved information on the second special chart side acquired this time, that is, the numerical information acquired from the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability, by referring to the win/lose table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is a jackpot result (step S5304: YES), an allocation determination process is executed (step S5305). In the allocation determination process, the allocation table for the second special symbol provided in the main ROM 63 (see FIG. 8(b)) is referenced to determine which type of jackpot result the information for allocation determination among the reserved information on the second special symbol side acquired this time, i.e., the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, corresponds to. Specifically, it is determined which of the 10R low probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, and 10R high probability jackpot result it corresponds to.

If the result of the allocation determination process is a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result (step S5306: YES), that is, if it is a jackpot result that triggers the execution of the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5307). In addition, information corresponding to the number of reserved information on the second special chart side reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 is set to the second special chart measurement counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5308). The second special chart measurement counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to identify the number of game rounds triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is required until the reserved information on the second special chart side that triggered the setting of the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 to "1" becomes the target for starting a game round.

After that, on the condition that the reserved information of the first special chart side is reserved and stored in the first special chart reserved area 125 (step S5309: YES), the first special chart side restriction flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5310). Also, information corresponding to the number of reserved information of the first special chart side reserved and stored in the first special chart reserved area 125 is set in the first special chart measurement counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5311). The first special chart side restriction flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not reserved information of the first special chart side was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserved area 125 at the timing when the big win specification flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1". The first special chart measurement counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to determine whether or not all of the reserved information on the first special chart side that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reservation area 125 at the time the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" has become the target for starting a game round.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the duration of fluctuation in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the process of acquiring the duration of fluctuation is executed in step S512 in the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 13).

If the game round to be started this time is triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side (step S5401: YES), it is determined whether the jackpot specific flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5402). If the jackpot specific flag is not set to "1" (step S5402: NO), other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processing, if the game round this time corresponds to a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of step S603 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed, and if the game round this time does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, a variable command including information on the variable duration of the game number selected in the other process and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5415), and then the process of obtaining the variable duration is terminated.

If the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5402: YES), it is determined whether the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5403). If the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is not 2 or less (step S5403: NO), the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5404), and other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processing, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the variable continuation period in the first embodiment (FIG. 14) is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the acquisition processing of the variable continuation period in the first embodiment (FIG. 14) is executed. After that, a variation command including information on the duration of variation for the number of game plays selected in the other process and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5415), and then the process of obtaining the duration of variation is terminated.

If the value of the second special symbol measurement counter in the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5403: YES), the longest period among the multiple types of game turn fluctuation durations set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation duration for the current game turn (step S5405). In other words, in the high frequency support mode, when the second special symbol reserve area 126 reserves and stores reserve information on the second special symbol side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the longest period is not only the game turn triggered by the reserve information on the second special symbol side, but also the game turn triggered by the reserve information on the second special symbol side that is one turn before the reserve information on the second special symbol side.

This maximum period is longer than the longest duration of fluctuations set in the first winning period table. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of fluctuations in the game turn triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side and the game turn triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is one play before the reserved information on the second special chart side will be the longest period.

Then, the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5406). If the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5407: YES), this means that the reserved information on the second special symbol that triggered the setting of the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 to "1" has become the target for starting a game round, so the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5408). If a negative judgment is made in step S5407, or if the processing of step S5408 is executed, a fluctuation command including the information on the longest period and a type command including the current hit/miss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5415), and the acquisition processing of this fluctuation duration is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5401, it means that the game round to be started this time is triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart side. In this case, it is judged whether or not "1" is set in the first special chart side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5409). If a negative judgment is made in step S5409, other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processing, if the current game round corresponds to a big win result or a small win result, the processing of step S603 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either a big win result or a small win result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, a variable command including information on the variable continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5415), and then the variable continuation period acquisition processing is terminated.

If the first special chart side limit flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5409: YES), the longest period among the multiple types of game turn fluctuation continuation periods set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the game turn fluctuation continuation period (step S5410). In other words, for the reserved information on the first special chart side that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 at the time when the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result was reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the game turn fluctuation continuation period becomes the longest period for all game turns triggered by that reserved information.

This maximum period is longer than the longest period of fluctuation that is set in the first winning period table. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, for the reserved information on the first special chart that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 at the time that the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result was reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the period of fluctuation that is the longest for all of the playing times triggered by that reserved information.

In this embodiment, in the data setting process (step S502) of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13) as in the first embodiment, the reserved information on the second special chart side is prioritized as a shift target to the special chart execution area 127 over the reserved information on the first special chart side. Therefore, when reserved information on the special chart side is stored in both the first special chart reserve area 125 and the second special chart reserve area 126, the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the second operating port 34 is prioritized as a target for starting a game round. In this case, as described above, the reserved information on the first special chart side that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 at the timing when the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result was reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 will have the longest period of change in the game round in all game rounds triggered by the reserved information. This game round triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart side is started after the game round triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result has been executed, and when the reserved information on the second special chart side reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 becomes zero.

After that, the value of the measurement counter for the first special symbol in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5411). If the value of the measurement counter for the first special symbol after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5412: YES), this means that all of the reserved information on the first special symbol side that was reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserve area 125 at the time when the reserved information on the second special symbol side corresponding to the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result was reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserve area 126 became the target for starting the game round, so the first special symbol side restriction flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5413). If a negative judgment is made in step S5412, or if the processing of step S5413 is executed, a variable command including the information on the longest period and a type command including the current hit/miss judgment result and allocation judgment result are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5415), and then the acquisition processing of this variable duration is terminated.

With the above configuration, when the reserved information of the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 in the high frequency support mode, not only the play number triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side, but also the play number triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side that is the previous consumption order relative to the reserved information of the second special chart side will have the longest period of change in the play number. As a result, when it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds will occur due to the high frequency winning mode in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to extend the period required for the opening and closing execution mode to occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

At the timing when the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the reserved information on the first special chart side reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 has the longest duration of the change in the number of play times in all play times triggered by the reserved information. The play times triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart side are started after the play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result are executed, and when the reserved information on the second special chart side reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 becomes 0. Therefore, by setting the duration of the change in the number of play times to the longest period in response to the acquisition of reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to generate the effect of reducing the consumption efficiency of the play times for a long period of time.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the duration of fluctuation in the number of play turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is one turn before the reserved information on the second special chart side (hereinafter referred to as the reserved information on the specified second special chart side), is the longest, the configuration may be such that the duration of fluctuation in the number of play turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is two turns before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side, is the longest, or the configuration may be such that the duration of fluctuation in the number of play turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is three turns before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side, is the longest. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times may be the longest period in all play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is executed.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of the change in the number of play turns triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is consumed first in the order of the reserved information on the second special chart side (hereinafter referred to as reserved information on the specified second special chart side) will be the longest, but the configuration may be such that the duration of the change in the number of play turns triggered by the reserved information on the specified second special chart side is determined by lottery with reference to the period table for the first win.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the longest period of time for the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart, which is consumed before the reserved information on the second special chart, when the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored. It may be configured such that the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended only when the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended when the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended when the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended when the reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to either jackpot result is reserved and stored.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of fluctuation in the number of game rounds triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side that is earlier in the order of consumption than the reserved information on the second special chart side is the longest, a configuration may be used in which, when reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of fluctuation in the number of game rounds triggered by reserved information on the first special chart side that is earlier in the order of consumption than the reserved information on the first special chart side is the longest, or, when reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of fluctuation in the number of game rounds triggered by reserved information on the first special chart side or reserved information on the second special chart side that is earlier in the order of consumption than the reserved information on the first special chart side is the longest. In addition, the reserved information on the first special chart side that triggers the lengthening of the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play rounds as described above is not limited to reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, but may be reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to any jackpot result.

The maximum period may be the same as the longest duration of fluctuation for a game number set in the first winning period table. In this case, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126 in the high frequency support mode, in a game number triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side that is consumed first in the order of consumption relative to the reserved information on the second special chart side, the longest duration of fluctuation for a game number that can be selected in other circumstances will be selected.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when the reserved information of the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, in a game round triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side that is consumed first in the order of consumption relative to the reserved information of the second special chart side, the variable duration of the game round to be executed may be selected by lottery from a group of multiple types of variable durations of game rounds that are longer than the variable duration of the predetermined game round set in the first winning time period table. Even in this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the reserved information of the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, in a game round triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side that is consumed first in the order of consumption relative to the reserved information of the second special chart side, a period longer than the variable duration of the predetermined game round set in the first winning time period table will be selected as the variable duration of the game round. In addition, the group of the above-mentioned multiple types of variable durations of game play may or may not include the longest variable duration of game play.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when multiple reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (hereinafter referred to as reserved information on the specified second special chart side) is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the configuration may be such that the duration of the change in the number of play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is one before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side in the consumption order is the longest period.

In addition, in the game round with the longest duration, a movie image G2 and remaining time image G3 dedicated to the longest duration may be displayed, as in the first embodiment described above.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the selection mode of the variable duration of the game number in the situation where the big win specific flag or the first special chart side limit flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" is different from the thirteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the duration of fluctuation in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the process of acquiring the duration of fluctuation is executed in step S512 in the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 13).

If the game round to be started this time is triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side (step S5501: YES), it is determined whether the jackpot specific flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5502). If the jackpot specific flag is not set to "1" (step S5502: NO), other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processing, if the game round this time corresponds to a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of step S603 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed, and if the game round this time does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, a variable command including information on the variable duration of the game number selected in the other process and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5519), and then the process of obtaining the variable duration is terminated.

If the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5502: YES), it is determined whether the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5503). If the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is not 2 or less (step S5503: NO), the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5504), and other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processing, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the variable continuation period in the first embodiment (FIG. 14) is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a small jackpot result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the acquisition processing of the variable continuation period in the first embodiment (FIG. 14) is executed. After that, a variable command including information on the variable duration of the game number selected in the other process and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5519), and then the process of obtaining the variable duration is terminated.

If the value of the second special chart measurement counter in the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5503: YES), it is determined whether the value of the total round number counter 64c in the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than a third reference value (step S5505). The contents of the total round number counter 64c are the same as in the first embodiment. Also, the third reference value is "60", the same as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5505: NO), the quasi-longest period, which is the second longest period of change among the multiple types of game times set in this pachinko machine 10, is selected as the change duration period of the current game time (step S5506). On the other hand, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S5505: YES), the longest period of change among the multiple types of game times set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the change duration period of the current game time (step S5507). In other words, in the high frequency support mode, when the reserved information of the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, not only the game time triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side, but also the change duration of the game time triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side that is one before the reserved information of the second special chart side becomes the quasi-longest period or the longest period.

The maximum period is longer than the longest period of fluctuations set in the first hit period table, specifically 10 minutes. The semi-maximum period is longer than the longest period of fluctuations set in the first hit period table but shorter than the maximum period, specifically 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the process of step S5506 or the process of step S5507 is executed, the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5508). Then, when the value of the measurement counter for the second special symbol after the decrement is "0" (step S5509: YES), this means that the reserved information on the second special symbol side that triggered the setting of the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 to "1" has become the target for starting a game round, so the jackpot identification flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5510). When a negative judgment is made in step S5509, or when the process of step S5510 is executed, a variable command including the information on the longest period or the information on the quasi-longest period and a type command including the current hit/miss judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5519), and then the acquisition process of this variable duration is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5501, it means that the game round to be started this time is triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart side. In this case, it is judged whether or not "1" is set in the first special chart side restriction flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5511). If a negative judgment is made in step S5511, other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processing, if the current game round corresponds to a big win result or a small win result, the processing of step S603 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either a big win result or a small win result, the processing of steps S605 to S614 of the variable continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, a variable command including information on the variable continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing and a type command including the current win/loss judgment result and allocation judgment result are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5519), and the variable continuation period acquisition processing is terminated.

If the first special chart side limit flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5511: YES), it is determined whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S5512). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5512: NO), the quasi-longest period, which is the second longest period of change among the multiple types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10, is selected as the change duration period of the current game time (step S5513). On the other hand, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S5512: YES), the longest period of change among the multiple types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the change duration period of the current game time (step S5514). In other words, at the time when the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the reserved information on the first special chart side that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 will have the second longest or longest duration of fluctuation in play times for all play times triggered by that reserved information.

The maximum period is longer than the longest period of fluctuations set in the first hit period table, specifically 10 minutes. The semi-maximum period is longer than the longest period of fluctuations set in the first hit period table but shorter than the maximum period, specifically 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the process of step S5513 or the process of step S5514 is executed, the value of the measurement counter for the first special symbol in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5515). Then, if the value of the measurement counter for the first special symbol after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5516: YES), this means that all of the reserved information on the first special symbol side that was reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserve area 125 at the time when the reserved information on the second special symbol side corresponding to the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result was reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserve area 126 became the target for starting a game round, so the first special symbol side restriction flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5517). If a negative judgment is made in step S5516, or if the processing of step S5517 is executed, a variation command including the above-mentioned longest period information or the above-mentioned quasi-longest period information and a type command including the current pass/fail judgment result and allocation judgment result are sent to the audio-visual side MPU 82 (step S5519), and then the process of acquiring this variation duration is terminated.

With the above configuration, in the high-frequency support mode, when the reserved information of the second special chart side corresponding to the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reservation area 126, the duration of the change in the number of play times triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side and the number of play times triggered by the reserved information of the second special chart side that is the consumption order one before the reserved information of the second special chart side is the quasi-longest period if the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the third reference value, and is the longest period if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value. As a result, when it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds occurs due to the high-frequency winning mode in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time by lengthening the period required for the opening and closing execution mode to occur, while making it possible to gradually lengthen the period according to the number of rounds of play due to the high-frequency winning mode that occurs in the high-frequency support mode.

For the reserved information on the first special chart side that was reserved and stored in the first special chart reserve area 125 at the timing when the reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result was reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times in all play times triggered by the reserved information is the quasi-longest period if the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the third reference value, and is the longest period if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value. This makes it possible to generate the effect of reducing the consumption efficiency of play times over a long period by setting the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times to the quasi-longest period or the longest period in response to the acquisition of reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result in the high frequency support mode, while making it possible to gradually increase the length of time according to the number of rounds of play in the high frequency winning mode that occurred in the high frequency support mode.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the duration of fluctuation in game turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is one turn before the reserved information on the second special chart side (hereinafter referred to as the reserved information on the specified second special chart side), is the longest period or the quasi-longest period, it may be configured such that the duration of fluctuation in game turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is two turns before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side, is the longest period or the quasi-longest period, or it may be configured such that the duration of fluctuation in game turns in a game turn triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side, which is three turns before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side, is the longest period or the quasi-longest period. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times may be the longest period or the quasi-longest period in all play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is executed.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the variable duration of the game turn triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart side that is consumed first in the order of the reserved information on the second special chart side (hereinafter referred to as the reserved information on the specified second special chart side) will be the longest or quasi-longest period, but the variable duration of the game turn triggered by the reserved information on the specified second special chart side may be determined by lottery with reference to the winning period table.

In addition, when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart, which is consumed before the reserved information on the second special chart, is not limited to the longest or quasi-longest period. It may be configured such that the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended only when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, or when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to any jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times as described above is extended.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which, when reserved information on the second special chart corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of change in the number of game rounds triggered by the reserved information on the second special chart, which is consumed earlier than the reserved information on the second special chart, is the longest period or the sub-longest period, a configuration may be adopted in which, when reserved information on the first special chart corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of change in the number of game rounds triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart, which is consumed earlier than the reserved information on the first special chart, is the longest period or the sub-longest period, or, when reserved information on the first special chart corresponding to a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the duration of change in the number of game rounds triggered by the reserved information on the first special chart or the reserved information on the second special chart, which is consumed earlier than the reserved information on the first special chart, is the longest period or the sub-longest period. In addition, the reserved information on the first special chart side that triggers the lengthening of the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play rounds as described above is not limited to reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, but may be reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to a 5R high probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, or reserved information on the first special chart side corresponding to any jackpot result.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, when multiple reserved information on the second special chart side corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (hereinafter referred to as reserved information on the specified second special chart side) is reserved and stored in the second special chart reserve area 126, the duration of the change in the number of play times triggered by reserved information on the second special chart side that is one before the reserved information on the specified second special chart side in the consumption order may be configured to be the longest period or the quasi-longest period.

In addition, in a game round that is the longest or second-longest period, a movie image G2 and remaining time image G3 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed, as in the first embodiment described above.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the special chart special electricity timer counter in the main RAM 64 is checked to see if it is "0" to determine whether the final stop period for this game has elapsed (step S5601). If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the special chart determination process is terminated.

If the final stop period for the current game round has elapsed (step S5601: YES), and the result of the win/loss determination that triggered the current game round was a big win or a small win (step S5602: YES), a process is executed to transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result (step S5603).

If the positive judgment is made in step S5603, it is judged whether the value of the consumption counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S5604). The consumption counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to determine whether the number of times of play executed without executing the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability big win result or the 10R high probability big win result, that is, the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode, is within the range of 30 times, which is the consecutive winning standard number. In other words, in step S5604, it is judged whether the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode has occurred again between the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode and the consumption of 30 times, which is the consecutive winning standard number.

After the opening and closing execution mode is ended due to a 10R high probability jackpot result, the mode changes to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, but this high frequency support mode continues until the next opening and closing execution mode occurs. Also, after the opening and closing execution mode is ended due to a 10R low probability jackpot result, the mode changes to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, but this high frequency support mode ends when 80 game rounds, which is the ending reference number, have been played, and the mode changes to a low frequency support mode. In contrast, the consecutive win reference number of times is set to 30 times as described above. Therefore, the high frequency support mode will not end before the consecutive win reference number of game rounds have been played after the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode has ended.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5604, the consecutive win occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5605). The consecutive win occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to identify whether or not the consecutive win reference number of 30 play times has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode for the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode has been ended and the opening and closing execution mode for the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode has occurred again after the opening and closing execution mode for the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode has ended and the consecutive win reference number of 30 play times has not yet been consumed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5604 or the processing of step S5605 is executed, the consumption count counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "30", which is a value corresponding to the consecutive win reference number (step S5605).

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to a winning result different from the 10R low probability big win result and the 10R high probability big win result, i.e., a small win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a 5R high probability big win result (step S5603: NO), the process proceeds to step S5607 without executing the processes of steps S5604 to S5606. In step S5607, the value of the consumption count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1. If the value of the consumption count counter is already "0", it is maintained as "0" without decrementing by 1. After that, if the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5608: YES) and the value of the consumption count counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5609: YES), the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5610). In other words, the state in which the consecutive win occurrence flag is set to "1" is released when the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends and the consecutive win standard number of 30 play times is consumed without the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurring.

When the processing of step S5606 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S5608, when a negative judgment is made in step S5609, or when the processing of step S5610 is executed, an opening period selection process is executed (step S5611). As in the first embodiment, two types of periods are set as the target opening period: 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and the opening period selection process selects one of these two periods to be the opening period for the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, the information on the opening period selected in step S5611 is set in the special chart special power timer counter in the main RAM 64 (step S5612). This starts the measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, an opening command including information about the currently selected opening period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5613). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode and starts measuring the opening period, and causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Also, by sending a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period is performed in the pattern display device 41.

Then, the value of the special chart special transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S5614). This updates the value of the special chart special transmission counter from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special transmission start processing.

On the other hand, if the win/loss determination result that triggered the current game round is neither a big win nor a small win (step S5602: NO), the value of the consumption count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5615). Note that if the value of the consumption count counter is already "0", it is not decremented by 1 and remains at "0".

After that, if the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5616: YES) and the value of the number of times played in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5617: YES), the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5618). In other words, the state in which the consecutive win occurrence flag is set to "1" is released when the consecutive win reference number of 30 times is played after the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends without the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurring.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5616, if a negative judgment is made in step S5617, or if the processing of step S5618 is executed, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1" to determine whether the currently completed game round was executed in a situation in which the game round was executed in low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability jackpot result (step S5619).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S5619: YES), the value of the play count counter in the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 (step S5620). Then, by determining whether the value of the play count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", it is determined whether the end reference number of play times have been performed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode situation (step S5621). If the value of the play count counter is "0" (step S5621: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5622). This results in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode situation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5619, if a negative judgment is made in step S5621, or if the processing of step S5622 is executed, the special chart special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S5623). As a result, the value of the special chart special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing to the value corresponding to the special chart change start processing.

Figure 83 (a) is a flowchart showing the period setting process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5701: NO), information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S5702). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5701: YES), information corresponding to the second period that allows 90 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S5703). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the second period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the second period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the second period elapses.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again after the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode has ended and before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 play times has been consumed, and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 play times has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ended, the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, which reduces the number of game balls in the game area PA per unit time, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

If the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode occurs only once, the firing cycle of the game balls is maintained at the shortest firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Figure 83 (b) is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5711: NO), the period adjustment process is terminated. If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5711: YES), the variable duration extension process is executed (step S5712). In this extension process, as in step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, one second is added as an extension period to the variable duration acquired in step S614 in the variable duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, an extension command indicating that the variable duration of the current game round has been extended by the extension period is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S5713). When the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the extension command, it understands that the variable duration of the current game round has been extended by the extension period, and modifies the contents of the data table for game round presentation in accordance with the extension. The content of the data table for this game round presentation is modified for the high-speed variable display period of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and the extension of the variable duration period of the game round may be performed by extending the period during which the standby display is performed for all symbols, as in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play is consumed after the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends, and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ends, the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the duration of the fluctuation in the number of play times becomes longer, which reduces the number of play times per unit time, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The occurrence of the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode only once will not result in an extension of the duration of fluctuation in the number of play times. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of play times per unit time.

Figure 84 (a) is a flowchart showing the final stop period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period for the current game round (step S5802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period for the current game round (step S5803). The second final stop period is 3 seconds.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 play times is consumed after the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends, and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 play times has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ends, the final stop period of the play times becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the final stop period of the play times becomes longer, which reduces the number of play times per unit time, and as a result, the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game rounds will not be extended even if the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds occurs only once due to the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game rounds that occur per unit time.

Figure 84 (b) is a flowchart showing the opening period selection process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S5812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S5813). The second opening period is 10 seconds.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has been consumed after the opening and closing execution mode has ended and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ended, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer, and the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended if the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds occurs only once due to the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Figure 84 (c) is a flowchart showing the interval period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5823). The second interval period is 6 seconds.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again after the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode has ended and before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has been consumed, and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ended, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer, thereby decreasing the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The interval period between open/close execution modes will not be long even if the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds occurs only once due to the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Figure 84 (d) is a flowchart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" (step S5831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S5832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. If the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S5831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period for the current opening and closing execution mode (step S5833). The second ending period is 12 seconds.

As described above, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs again before the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has been consumed after the opening and closing execution mode has ended and the consecutive winning standard number of 30 times of play has not yet been consumed since the opening and closing execution mode ended, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode becomes longer, and the occurrence frequency of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The ending period of the open/close execution mode will not be extended if the open/close execution mode with the most rounds occurs only once due to the high frequency winning mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 85, we will explain how restrictions are imposed on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit time depending on the frequency of the open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode. FIG. 85(a) shows a period of play times corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, FIG. 85(b) shows a period of the open/close execution mode, FIG. 85(c) shows a period of the high frequency support mode, FIG. 85(d) shows a consecutive win monitoring period during which the value of the number of times the game is played counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more, and FIG. 85(e) shows a period during which the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1".

In a situation where the mode is low frequency as shown in FIG. 85(c) and the consecutive win monitoring period is not in progress as shown in FIG. 85(d), a game round corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result is executed from timing t1 to timing t2 as shown in FIG. 85(a). Then, from timing t2 to timing t3, an opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is executed. At timing t3 when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85(c) and the consecutive win monitoring period begins as shown in FIG. 85(d).

After that, in a situation where the game is in the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85(c) and in the consecutive win monitoring period as shown in FIG. 85(d), a game corresponding to a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result occurs again from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 85(a). Then, at the timing of t5, the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is started as shown in FIG. 85(b). In this case, the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is started during the consecutive win monitoring period. Therefore, at the timing of t5 when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(e). As a result, the firing cycle is lengthened from the opening and closing execution mode started this time, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening and closing execution mode are lengthened. In addition, after the timing of t6 when the opening and closing execution mode started this time ends, the duration of the fluctuation of the game number and the final stop period of the game number are lengthened. Furthermore, when the consecutive win occurrence flag is set to "1", if an opening and closing execution mode occurs due to a small win result, a 2R high probability big win result, a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result, the opening period, interval period, and ending period will be lengthened in that opening and closing execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t7, the consecutive winning standard number of times is played without the opening and closing execution mode of the highest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode occurring, and the consecutive winning monitoring period ends as shown in FIG. 85(d), and the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 85(e). By clearing the consecutive winning occurrence flag to "0", the game ball launch cycle returns to the first cycle, the period of fluctuation of the number of game rounds is no longer extended, and the final stop period of the game round returns to the first final stop period, which is a relatively short period. Note that even if the consecutive winning occurrence flag is cleared to "0", the high frequency support mode continues as shown in FIG. 85(c).

After that, in the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85(c), not in the consecutive win monitoring period as shown in FIG. 85(d), and further in a situation where the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(e), a game round corresponding to a 10R low probability jackpot result is executed from timing t8 to timing t9 as shown in FIG. 85(a). Then, from timing t9 to timing t10, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is executed. In this case, since the consecutive win occurrence flag is not set to "1", the opening period is the relatively short first opening period, the interval period is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period is the relatively short first ending period.

Since the current opening and closing execution mode is the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, the consecutive win monitoring period begins at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 85(d). After that, at timing t11, the consecutive win standard number of play times is consumed without the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurring, and the consecutive win monitoring period ends as shown in FIG. 85(d). Also, at timing t12, the previous opening and closing execution mode ends and the ending standard number of play times is consumed, and the high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode begins as shown in FIG. 85(c).

According to the above configuration, if the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is executed between the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode and the consumption of the consecutive winning standard number of times, the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and various periods are lengthened. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, which will award a large profit, occurs repeatedly in a short period of time, the number of times play occurs per unit time decreases and the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurrence per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The occurrence of the open/close execution mode with the most number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode only once will not result in the various periods being extended, but the occurrence of the open/close execution mode with the most number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode repeatedly in a short period of time will result in the various periods being extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times play occurs per unit time and the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time.

Even if the high frequency support mode continues, the above-mentioned various periods will not be extended unless the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to the high frequency winning mode occurs within the range of the consecutive win monitoring period. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of times play occurs per unit time and the frequency of the opening and closing execution mode occurrence per unit time.

The state in which the consecutive winning streak occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" is not limited to being released when the consecutive winning streak monitoring period has elapsed, and the state in which the consecutive winning streak occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" may be released either when the opening and closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs after the consecutive winning streak monitoring period has elapsed, or when the high frequency support mode has ended.

Also, when the next opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs, the state in which the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 has been set to "1" may be released. In this case, if the next opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs within the consecutive winning monitoring period, a new consecutive winning monitoring period is set and the consecutive winning occurrence flag remains set to "1", and if the next opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurs after the consecutive winning monitoring period has elapsed, a new consecutive winning monitoring period is set but the state in which the consecutive winning occurrence flag has been set to "1" is released.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 being set to "1" when an open/close execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to a high frequency winning mode occurs during the consecutive winning period, but may be such that the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" when an open/close execution mode due to a high frequency winning mode occurs during the consecutive winning period, or may be such that the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" when an open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result occurs during the consecutive winning period, or may be such that the consecutive winning occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" when an open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result or a small jackpot result occurs during the consecutive winning period.

In addition, if an event occurs consecutively during the consecutive win monitoring period in which the opening and closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds occurs due to the high frequency winning mode, the various periods may be configured to be further extended.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the configuration for preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time. The configuration that differs from the tenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the tenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, the value of the period measurement counter 202 in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1 (step S5901). Then, if the value of the period measurement counter 202 after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S5902: YES), the processes shown in steps S5903 to S5909 are executed.

Specifically, the information of the measurement round number counter 201 in the main RAM 64 is overwritten in the memory area 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 (step S5903). After that, an update process for the write pointer 204 is executed (step S5904). In this update process, the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by 1, and if the value after the increment exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

Then, all the information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 is added together (step S5905), and the result of the addition is overwritten in the target round number area 205 as information on the target round number (step S5906). In addition, a target round number command in which the information on the target round number overwritten in the target round number area 205 is set is sent to the payout control device 77 (step S5907). Then, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S5908), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S5909).

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the command reception process executed by the MPU provided in the dispensing control device 77. The command reception process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 milliseconds). The MPU of the dispensing control device 77 contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and various counter circuits as data input/output circuits.

First, the main MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S6001). As in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 77 instructing the payout of 10 game balls when one game ball enters the general winning port 31, transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 77 instructing the payout of 15 game balls when one game ball enters the special winning device 32, transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 77 instructing the payout of one game ball when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, and transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 77 instructing the payout of one game ball when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. However, without being limited to this, the number of game balls to be paid out may be stored in the main RAM 64, and when the stored number reaches a predetermined number, such as 15, the main MPU 62 may send a prize ball command to the payout control device 77 to instruct the payout control device 77 to pay out 10 game balls.

When a prize ball command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S6001: YES), information corresponding to the number of game balls to be paid out set in the prize ball command is added to a prize ball number memory counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 (step S6002). The prize ball number memory counter is a counter that allows the MPU of the payout control device 77 to identify the number of game balls to be paid out.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6001, or if the processing of step S6002 is executed, it is judged whether a target round number command has been received from the master MPU 62 (step S6003). As already explained, the target round number command contains the target round number information stored in the target round number area 205 of the master RAM 64. If a target round number command has been received from the master MPU 62 (step S6003: YES), the payout side round number area provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is overwritten with the target round number information set in the currently received target round number command (step S6004). The payout side round number area is an area for the MPU of the payout control device 77 to identify the target round number information stored in the target round number area 205 of the master RAM 64.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6003, or if the processing of step S6004 is executed, other processing is executed (step S6005). In other processing, if a command other than the prize ball command and the target round number command is received from the main MPU 62, the corresponding processing is executed.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the dispensing control process executed by the MPU of the dispensing control device 77. The dispensing control process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 2 milliseconds).

If the value of the prize ball number storage counter in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is 1 or more (step S6101: YES), if the value of the target round number stored in the payout side round number area in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is less than the first reference value (step S6102: YES), the payout speed of the game balls by the payout device 76 is set to the first speed (step S6103); if the value of the target round number is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S6104: YES), the payout speed of the game balls by the payout device 76 is set to the second speed (step S6105); if the value of the target round number is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S6104: NO), the payout speed of the game balls by the payout device 76 is set to the third speed (step S6106). As in the tenth embodiment, the first reference value is "10" and the second reference value is "30".

The first speed is the fastest of the game ball payout speeds set in this pachinko machine 10, and when payout of game balls is executed by the payout device 76 at the first speed, game balls are paid out from the payout device 76 at a payout cycle of one every 60 milliseconds and supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a. The second speed is the second fastest of the game ball payout speeds set in this pachinko machine 10, and when payout of game balls is executed by the payout device 76 at the second speed, game balls are paid out from the payout device 76 at a payout cycle of one every 120 milliseconds and supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a. The third speed is the slowest of the game ball payout speeds set in this pachinko machine 10, and when the payout device 76 pays out game balls at the third speed, the game balls are paid out from the payout device 76 at a payout cycle of one ball every 180 milliseconds and supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a.

Here, the game ball launching period when game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27 and the game ball launching operation is continuing is 0.6 seconds (600 milliseconds). Therefore, even if the game ball payout speed is the slowest third speed, the period in which game balls are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a when the game balls are being continuously paid out is shorter than the game ball launching period. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the payout of game balls cannot keep up with the launch of game balls when the payout of game balls is continuing, regardless of whether the game ball payout speed is set to any of the first to third speeds.

When the process of step S6103, the process of step S6105, or the process of step S6106 is executed, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the payout of game balls is executed at the set payout speed (step S6107). After that, when the payout detection sensor that detects the payout of the game ball from the payout device 76 detects the payout of one game ball (step S6108: YES), the value of the prize ball number storage counter in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is subtracted by 1 (step S6109). In addition, the value of the prize ball counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is added by 1 (step S6110). The prize ball counter is a counter for identifying the number of game balls that have been paid out by the MPU of the payout control device 77. Then, the external output process is executed (step S6111). In the external output process, a prize ball completion signal is output to the gaming hall's management computer via an external terminal board provided on the pachinko machine 10 each time the value of the prize ball counter reaches the output reference number of "10". In other words, a prize ball completion signal is output to the gaming hall's management computer each time the payout of the output reference number of gaming balls is completed. When the prize ball completion signal is output to the outside, the output reference number of "10" is subtracted from the prize ball completion counter.

After that, if the value of the prize ball count storage counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S6112: YES), a payout stop process is executed (step S6113). This stops the payout of game balls by the payout device 76.

According to the above configuration, the larger the value of the target round number, the slower the payout speed of game balls by the payout device 76. As a result, if the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the payout speed of game balls by the payout device 76 slows down. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Even if the payout speed of the game balls is the slowest third speed, the cycle in which the game balls are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a when the payout of the game balls continues will be shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the payout of the game balls cannot keep up with the firing of the game balls when the payout of the game balls continues, regardless of whether the payout speed of the game balls is set to any of the first to third speeds.

The configuration of slowing down the payout speed of game balls when the player's advantage becomes high may be applied to the above fifteenth embodiment. In this case, the configuration may be such that when the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", the payout of game balls is stopped until a predetermined stop period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 was set to "1". Also, when the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", the payout of game balls at a predetermined payout speed and the stop of the payout of game balls for a predetermined stop period (e.g., 10 seconds) may be alternately repeated.

In addition, the parameter that triggers the change in the payout speed of the game balls as in the above embodiment is not limited to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, but may be the value of the total round number counter 64c as in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive win counter 181 as in the third embodiment.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first to sixth embodiments, the trigger for changing the ball launch period according to the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is the same as the trigger for changing the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds of fluctuation according to the player's advantage, but at least a part of the trigger may be different. For example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, one of the ball launch period and the average duration of the game rounds of fluctuation becomes longer while the other is maintained, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second reference value, the other of the ball launch period and the average duration of the game rounds of fluctuation becomes longer while the other is maintained. This makes it possible to smoothly increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to a player in a short period of time.

Also, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, one of the game ball launch period and the average duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is lengthened while the other is maintained, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second reference value, the other of the game ball launch period and the average duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played is lengthened while one is maintained, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a third reference value, both the game ball launch period and the average duration of the fluctuation of the number of times played are lengthened. This makes it possible to smoothly increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time until the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third reference value, and to suddenly increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third reference value.

(2) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of a game round is switched between the first and second final stop periods depending on whether the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than a second reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop period of a game round may be switched between the first and second final stop periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a first reference value, or may be switched between the first and second final stop periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which a reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the final stop period of a game round may be switched between the first final stop period and the second final stop period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the reference value. In this case, the final stop period of a game round is changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the game ball launch cycle and the average duration of the fluctuation duration of a game round.

(3) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of a game round is switched between the first and second final stop periods depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target payout rate in the target payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop period may be switched in three or four or more stages. In the case of a three-stage switching configuration, the shortest final stop period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the second shortest final stop period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, and the longest final stop period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value. This increases the number of stages by which the final stop period of a game round is changed depending on the player's advantage, making it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to a player in a short period of time.

(4) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first and second opening periods depending on whether the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than a second reference value. However, this is not limited to this, and the opening period may be switched between the first and second opening periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a first reference value, or the opening period may be switched between the first and second opening periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which a reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the opening period may be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the reference value. In this case, the opening period is changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the average duration of the fluctuation of the game ball launch period and the number of game plays.

(5) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening period may be switched in three or four or more stages. In the case of a three-stage switching configuration, the shortest opening period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the second shortest opening period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, and the longest opening period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value. This increases the number of stages by which the opening period is changed depending on the player's advantage, making it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time.

(6) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. However, this is not limited to this, and the interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or the interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which a reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the reference value. In this case, the interval period is changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the average duration of the fluctuation of the game ball launch period and the number of game plays.

(7) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three or four or more stages. In the case of a three-stage switching configuration, the shortest interval period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the second shortest interval period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, and the longest interval period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value. This increases the number of stages by which the interval period is changed depending on the player's advantage, making it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

(8) In the first to sixth, tenth and fifteenth embodiments, when the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode is changed according to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment), all of the interval periods included in one opening and closing execution mode are changed, but it is also possible to change only a portion of the interval periods included in one opening and closing execution mode, and leave the rest unchanged.

(9) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first and second ending periods depending on whether the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. However, this is not limited to this, and the ending period may be switched between the first and second ending periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or the ending period may be switched between the first and second ending periods depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which a reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the ending period may be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the reference value. In this case, the ending period is changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the average period of the game ball launch cycle and the variable duration of the game rounds.

(10) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the open/close execution mode is switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three or four or more stages. In the case of a three-stage switching configuration, the shortest ending period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the second shortest ending period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, and the longest ending period is selected if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value. This increases the number of stages in which the ending period is changed depending on the player's advantage, making it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time.

(11) In the first to sixth, tenth and fifteenth embodiments, the opening period, interval period and ending period of the open/close execution mode are all configured to change according to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment), but this is not limited to this, and some of the opening period, interval period and ending period of the open/close execution mode may be changed according to the player's advantage, while the rest may not be changed according to the player's advantage.

(12) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the trigger for changing the final stop period of a game round, the trigger for changing the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the trigger for changing the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the trigger for changing the ending period of the open/close execution mode are all the same depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment). However, at least some of these triggers may be different. For example, when the player's advantage degree becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, the final stop period of a game round may be changed to be longer, when the player's advantage degree becomes equal to or greater than a second reference value, both the opening period and the ending period of the open/close execution mode may be changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage degree becomes equal to or greater than a third reference value, the interval period of the open/close execution mode may be changed to be longer. This makes it possible to smoothly increase the prevention function for preventing players from being awarded excessively large profits in a short period of time.

Also, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, the final stop period of the game round is changed to be longer, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second reference value, both the opening period and the ending period of the open/close execution mode are changed to be longer, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a third reference value, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a fourth reference value, the final stop period of the game round, as well as the opening period, the ending period, and the interval period of the open/close execution mode may all be changed to be even longer. This makes it possible to smoothly increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time until the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the fourth reference value, and to suddenly increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the fourth reference value.

(13) In the first to fourth embodiments, the longest period may be the same as the longest duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play set in the first winning period table. In this case, if the result is either a 10R low probability big win or a 10R high probability big win and the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play that can be selected in other situations is selected.

Also, if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability big win result or the 10R high-probability big win result (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment), the variable duration of the game number to be executed may be selected by lottery from a group of multiple types of variable durations of game numbers that are longer than the variable duration of the predetermined game number set in the first winning time period table. Even in this case, if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability big win result or the 10R high-probability big win result, the variable duration of the game number that is longer than the variable duration of the predetermined game number set in the first winning time period table will be selected as the variable duration of the game number. Note that the longest variable duration of the game number may or may not be included in the group of multiple types of variable durations of game numbers.

(14) In the first to fourth embodiments, the longest period is not limited to the configuration in which the player's advantage degree (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the third reference value when the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is selected as the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times of play, and the longest period may be selected as the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times of play when the player's advantage degree is equal to or greater than the third reference value when the player's advantage degree is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and the longest period may be selected as the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times of play for any jackpot result when the player's advantage degree is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In addition, the player's advantage degree that is the trigger for selecting the longest period as the duration of the fluctuation of the number of times of play is not limited to the configuration in which it is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and may be equal to or greater than the second reference value, the first reference value, or another reference value.

(15) In the above first to fourth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in a game in which either a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result is obtained when the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and the longest period may be selected and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed only in a game in which a 10R high probability big win result is obtained when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In this case, when the opening and closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs in a situation in which the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and then when the high probability mode is entered, the fluctuation continuation period of the game will be the longest period, so it will take a long time for the most advantageous situation to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being given to the player in a short period of time. In addition, by displaying the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, it is possible to make the player aware that the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, will occur and that the high probability mode will follow.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments, a quasi-longest period is set in addition to the longest period, and when a game round resulting in a 10R low-probability jackpot occurs in a situation where the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than a third reference value, the quasi-longest period is selected as the duration of fluctuation of the game rounds and a movie image dedicated to the quasi-longest period is displayed; and when a game round resulting in a 10R high-probability jackpot occurs in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected as the duration of fluctuation of the game rounds and a movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed. In this case, by setting the quasi-longest period to 9 minutes 30 seconds, which is longer than the variable duration of the number of play times selected in other situations except for the longest period, it is possible to make it take a long time for the opening and closing execution mode with the most number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, to occur, and to make it possible to execute different effects when a 10R low probability big win result occurs and when a 10R high probability big win result occurs.

(17) In the above first to fourth and twelfth embodiments, the variable duration of the number of times of play is not limited to being longer depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment), and the average period of the variable duration of the number of times of play may be longer. For example, the various period tables that determine the variable duration of the number of times of play by lottery may be changed depending on the player's advantage. In this case, a first table group of various period tables and a second table group of various period tables are provided, and the average period of the variable duration of the number of times of play is longer when the second table group is referenced than the first table group. Then, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the table group referenced when determining the variable duration of the number of times of play is changed from the first table group to the second table group. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the average period of the variable duration of the number of times of play is longer.

In addition, a third table group may be provided as the table group, in which the average duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times when referenced is longer than that of the second table group, and the table group referenced when determining the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is changed from the first table group to the second table group when the player's degree of advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, and the table group referenced when determining the duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times is changed from the second table group to the third table group when the player's degree of advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second reference value. This makes it possible to gradually lengthen the average duration of the fluctuation of the number of play times according to the player's degree of advantage.

(18) In the first to seventh and twelfth embodiments, if the duration of fluctuation of game times or the average duration of fluctuation of game times is lengthened according to the player's advantage (the value of the total rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment), the probability of occurrence of a game time in which a miss reach is displayed may be increased accordingly. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the increase in the duration of fluctuation of game times or the average duration of fluctuation of game times.

(19) In the first to seventh and fifteenth embodiments, when the firing period of the game balls is changed to a period longer than the first period according to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment), the changed long firing period may be applied only in the opening and closing execution mode during the advantageous period, and the firing period of the game balls may be changed to the first period during the period that is not the opening and closing execution mode during the advantageous period. Conversely, the changed long firing period may be applied only in the period that is not the opening and closing execution mode during the advantageous period, and may not be applied during the opening and closing execution mode during the advantageous period.

(20) In the first to fourth embodiments, the timing at which the remaining time image G3 starts to be displayed may be any timing after the timing at which the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest time starts. For example, the remaining time image G3 may be configured to start to be displayed after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest time starts.

(21) As a configuration for changing the game situation according to the player's degree of advantage, the following configuration may be applied in addition to or instead of the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(21-1) In a configuration in which the firing cycle of game balls at least during the opening and closing execution mode is changed in accordance with the player's degree of advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment), in a configuration in which one round of play in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends when either of the following conditions is met: the open duration period of T seconds has elapsed or Q game balls have entered the special electric winning device 32, the firing cycle of game balls is t1 seconds if the player's degree of advantage is less than a predetermined reference value, and t2 seconds (t2>t1) if the player's degree of advantage is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value,
t1×Q<T≦t2×Q
As a result, before the game ball firing cycle is changed to a long cycle according to the player's advantage, it is possible for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the upper limit number Q or more, in each round of the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, whereas after the game ball firing cycle is changed to a long cycle according to the player's advantage, it becomes impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the upper limit number Q or more, in each round of the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode. By changing the game ball firing cycle according to the player's advantage in this way, it is possible to change the expected number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode.

In addition, in a configuration in which one round of play in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode ends when either of the following conditions is met: the open duration period of T seconds has elapsed, or Q game balls have entered the special electric winning device 32, and the game ball launch period is t1 seconds if the player's advantage is less than a first reference value, t2 seconds (t2>t1) if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than a second reference value, and t3 seconds (t3>t2) if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value.
t1×Q<t2×Q≦T<t3×Q,
Or t1×Q<t2×Q<T≦t3×Q,
Or t1×Q<t2×Q<T<t3×Q,
In this configuration, up until the stage where the game ball firing cycle is lengthened by one stage according to the player's advantage, it is possible for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the upper limit number Q or more, in each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, whereas when the game ball firing cycle is lengthened by two stages according to the player's advantage, it becomes impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32, which is the upper limit number Q or more, in each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. In this way, by gradually varying the game ball firing cycle according to the player's advantage, it becomes possible to gradually vary the expected number of game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode.

(21-2) In a configuration in which one round of play in the open/close execution mode ends when the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32, the upper limit number may be configured to vary depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment). For example, if the player's advantage is less than a first reference value, the upper limit number may be 10 balls, if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than a second reference value, the upper limit number may be 8 balls, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than a third reference value, the upper limit number may be 5 balls. In this way, by varying the upper limit number of balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 during a round of play depending on the player's level of advantage, it is possible to vary the expected number of game balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode using the high frequency winning mode.

(21-3) In a configuration in which one round of play in the open/close execution mode ends when the upper limit period of the round play has elapsed, the upper limit period may be configured to vary depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment). For example, if the player's advantage is less than a first reference value, the upper limit period may be 11 seconds, if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than a second reference value, the upper limit period may be 6 seconds, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than a third reference value, the upper limit period may be 4 seconds. In this way, by varying the upper limit period for a round of play according to the player's degree of advantage, it is possible to vary the expected number of game balls that will enter the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency winning mode.

(21-4) Two gates through which the game ball can pass are provided in the game area PA, and when the game ball passes through one of the two gates after the end of the game round resulting in a jackpot, the game moves to an open/close execution mode for five rounds of game, and when the game ball passes through the other gate, a lottery is used to determine which of the open/close execution mode for two rounds of game or the open/close execution mode for ten rounds of game will be executed, and the game moves to the determined open/close execution mode. In this case, the two gates are arranged in parallel, and the game ball that reaches the area in which the two gates are provided is guided to one of the gates with a predetermined probability by a distribution member or the like, and is guided to the other gate with a specific probability. In this configuration, when the open/close execution mode for ten rounds of game occurs, at least one of the periods of the game ball launch cycle, the duration of the fluctuation of the game rounds, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode becomes longer than before, and when other open/close execution modes occur, the long period does not occur. In addition, when a 5-round open/close execution mode or a 10-round open/close execution mode occurs, at least one of the game ball launch period, the duration of fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode may be longer than before, but when other open/close execution modes occur, the longer period may not occur.

(21-5) When the player's degree of advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference value, the progress of the game may be stopped, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 may be stopped, the number of game balls paid out in response to a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry section (for example, the general winning port 31) during the opening and closing execution mode may be reduced, the progress of the game may be stopped after the opening and closing execution mode ends, a transition to a normal game state may occur after the opening and closing execution mode ends, a transition to the lowest setting value in the case where there are multiple setting values that determine the degree of advantage of the player is made, a waiting period for the opening and closing execution mode to begin, and the main RAM 64 may be initialized. For example, if the total number of game balls paid out to a player during an advantageous period reaches 12,000, the game progress may be forcibly stopped at that point.

(21-6) When the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) exceeds a predetermined reference value, the big win result may not be selected in the win/loss determination process. In this case, during the period when the big win result is not selected in the win/loss determination process, the high frequency support mode may be set to increase the frequency of balls entering the second operating port 34, so that the number of game balls owned by the player does not decrease significantly, and a small win result may occur with a high probability based on the entry of game balls into the second operating port 34, and one or two game balls may enter the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win result, so that the number of game balls owned by the player may be slightly increased.

(21-7) The interval period in the open/close execution mode may be set to a relatively long period, such as 5 seconds. In this case, by setting the support mode to a high-frequency support mode rather than a low-frequency support mode during the interval period, even if the interval period is set to a relatively long period, game balls may enter the second operating port 34 at a high frequency during the interval period, and the game balls owned by the player may not be significantly reduced.

(21-8) A first high probability mode and a second high probability mode may be set as high probability modes in the win/lose lottery mode so that the probability of winning the jackpot result is relatively high and low, and the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode may be alternately switched to each time the opening/closing execution mode occurs during the advantageous period. Also, in a configuration in which there is one type of high probability mode in the win/lose lottery mode and a continuation state in which the game state continues until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs as a low probability mode and high frequency support mode, the high probability mode and the continuation state may be alternately switched to each time the opening/closing execution mode occurs during the advantageous period.

(21-9) The probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode may be configured to decrease as the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) increases. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of times a game in which the high probability mode continues is executed is limited, the limited number of times may be configured to decrease as the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) increases. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of times the high frequency support mode continues to be played is limited, the limited number may be configured to decrease as the player's advantage level (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) increases.

(21-10) The period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state in the open/close execution mode may be configured to become shorter as the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) increases.

(21-11) The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round of play in the opening and closing execution mode may be varied depending on the player's degree of advantage. For example, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round of play may be one time until the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period reaches 2000, and when the total number of game balls acquired by the player reaches 2000 or more, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round of play may be two, and when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 3000 or more, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round of play may be three.

(21-12) The frequency with which the second operating port 34 opens per unit time in the high-frequency support mode may be gradually decreased as the number of times that a jackpot result occurs during a favorable period increases. For example, the period during which the image variation display is performed in the normal image display section 38a may be extended as the number of times that a jackpot result occurs during a favorable period increases. Also, for example, the period during which the second operating port 34 opens in the high-frequency support mode may be shortened as the number of times that a jackpot result occurs during a favorable period increases.

(21-13) Instead of changing the game situation according to the player's degree of advantage, the payout capacity of the payout device 76 may be slowed down so that the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the total number of consumption balls per hour is less than 2.2 times.

(22) The types of player advantage that trigger a change in the game situation are not limited to those in the above embodiments, and the following may also be applied.

(22-1) The game situation may be changed according to the number of game times consumed from the start of a predetermined advantageous period in which the game state is a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or a game state in which the game state is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode until a predetermined jackpot result occurs. For example, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 30 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the target period, which is at least one of the following periods: the firing cycle of the game balls, the variable duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, may be longer than before. This makes it possible to lengthen the target period in the case where a predetermined jackpot result occurs early after the start of the predetermined advantageous period.

In addition, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 50 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the target period may become a first target period that is longer than the previous period, and if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 25 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the target period may become a second target period that is longer than the first target period. This makes it possible to make the target period longer the fewer the number of times played between the start of the predetermined advantageous period and the occurrence of the predetermined jackpot result.

The above-mentioned specified jackpot result may be all jackpot results, may be a jackpot result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, may be a jackpot result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, may be a jackpot result in which the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, may be a jackpot result in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high frequency support mode, or may be a jackpot result in which the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

(22-2) The advantageous period is not limited to the period in which the high-frequency support mode is active regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode, and may be a period in which the high-frequency support mode is active in a high probability mode. In this case, in the first embodiment, the number of rounds that occurred during the advantageous period is measured using the total rounds counter 64c, and in the third embodiment, the number of times that the open/close execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode, occurred during the advantageous period is measured using the consecutive wins counter 181.

(22-3) The opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may be configured to vary depending on the total number of game balls dispensed. For example, the first stage of the lengthening of the opening period and the ending period may occur when the total number of game balls dispensed reaches 5,000, and the second stage of the lengthening of the opening period and the ending period may occur when the total number of game balls dispensed reaches 10,000. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are each longer when the second stage of the lengthening is performed than when the first stage of the lengthening is performed. Also, the lengthening of the first stage may be performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial periods of the opening period and the ending period, and the lengthening of the second stage may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial periods of the opening period and the ending period.

(22-4) The opening and ending periods of the open/close execution mode may be configured to vary depending on the total number of game balls acquired (total number of game balls paid out - total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA). For example, the first stage of the opening and ending periods may be lengthened when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 2000, and the second stage of the opening and ending periods may be lengthened when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 3000. In this case, the opening and ending periods are longer when the second stage of the lengthening is performed than when the first stage of the lengthening is performed. Also, the first stage of the lengthening may be performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial periods of the opening period and the ending period, and the second stage of the lengthening may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial periods of the opening period and the ending period.

(23) The configuration is not limited to one in which the state in which various periods have been changed is released when the high-frequency support mode ends, and the state in which various periods have been changed may be released under the following conditions.

(23-1) The state in which the various periods have been changed may be cancelled when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the various periods have been changed reaches the end reference number.

(23-2) In the second embodiment described above, the state in which the various periods have been changed may be released when the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 reaches the termination reference value. In this case, by setting the termination reference value to a value smaller than the first reference value, it is possible to prevent the various periods from being repeatedly changed and released in a short period of time.

(23-3) The state in which the various periods have been changed may be released when the number of times that have been played without the occurrence of a specified opening and closing execution mode since the various periods have been changed reaches the end reference number. In this case, the specified opening and closing execution mode may be an all opening and closing execution mode, an opening and closing execution mode based on a high frequency winning mode, or an opening and closing execution mode based on the most number of rounds in a high frequency winning mode.

(23-4) The configuration may be such that the state in which the various periods have been changed is cancelled when the end reference period has elapsed since the various periods were changed.

(23-5) The configuration may be such that when a game round can be played in low probability mode, the state in which the various periods have been changed is cancelled.

(24) In addition to or instead of a configuration for changing the game situation to one that allows the player's advantage to be decreased when the player's advantage becomes high, a configuration may be adopted in which the game situation is changed to one that allows the player's advantage to be increased when the player's advantage becomes low. For example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or below a predetermined reference value, at least one of the following may be shortened: the ball launch cycle, the average duration of the fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, and the shortening of the periods may be performed in stages according to the player's advantage.

(25) At least one of the final stop period of a game round, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode is varied depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment), but the duration of the variation of the game round may not be varied depending on the player's advantage.

(26) The programs in the main ROM 63 may be divided into an in-area program group and an out-area program group, and the memory areas in the main RAM 64 may be divided into an in-area memory area group and an out-area memory area group. In this case, a program for executing a process to progress the game is set in the in-area program group, and when the process to progress the game is executed, the in-area memory area group of the main RAM 64 is used. In addition, in the first embodiment, a process for updating the total round number counter 64c, in the second embodiment, a process for updating the number of balls entered area 150, the management area 160, the calculation area 171, the write pointer 172, and the target ball payout rate area 173, in the third embodiment, a process for updating the consecutive win counter 181 in the main RAM 64, in the tenth embodiment, a process for updating the measurement round number counter 201, the period measurement counter 202, the management area 203, the write pointer 204, and the target round number area 205, and in the fifteenth embodiment, a program corresponding to a process for updating the consecutive win occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is set in the out-of-area program group, and further, when these processes are executed, the out-of-area memory area group in the main RAM 64 is used. This makes it possible to execute the above-mentioned update process clearly distinguished from the process for progressing the game. It is preferable that even when processing is being executed using a program included in the in-area program group, the memory areas of the out-area memory area group can be referenced but cannot be rewritten, and that even when processing is being executed using a program included in the out-area program group, the memory areas of the in-area memory area group can be referenced but cannot be rewritten.

(27) A configuration may be adopted in which the reserved information acquired as a result of a winning entry at the first actuation port 33 and the reserved information acquired as a result of a winning entry at the second actuation port 34 are not stored separately. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the reserved information on the second actuation port 34 being consumed first, but conversely, a configuration in which the reserved information on the first actuation port 33 is consumed first may be applied, or a configuration in which the reserved information is consumed in the order of acquisition regardless of whether it is the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 may be applied.

(28) The distribution pattern of the jackpot result may be the same when the reserved information acquired due to a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 is the subject of the winning/losing determination and when the reserved information acquired due to a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is the subject of the winning/losing determination.

(29) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio and light emission control device 80 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control device 90 may be configured to control the audio and light emission control device 80 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio and light emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio and light emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio and light emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 may be arbitrary.

(30) The device on which the game operation is performed is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured to perform the game operation by operating a movably installed decorative member, or to perform the game operation by turning on a specific light-emitting unit, or to perform the game operation by a combination of all or part of the above aspects.

(31) In the above embodiment, the special chart display units 37a, 37b are configured to display stop results corresponding to each game result, but instead, the special chart display units 37a, 37b may be absent, and a common stop result may be displayed in the special chart display units 37a, 37b regardless of the game result, or the stop results may be displayed randomly in the special chart display units 37a, 37b, so that it is not possible to identify which game result is involved from the display in the special chart display units 37a, 37b. In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the special chart display units 37a and 37b are configured to repeatedly display a predetermined pattern regardless of the results of the hit/miss judgment and the allocation judgment, and to notify the results of the hit/miss judgment and the allocation judgment based on the final stopping result, and the special chart display units 37a and 37b may also be configured to display and perform a reach effect, and a stopping result different from a game round in which a reach effect occurs and a game round in which a reach effect does not occur may be displayed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b.

(32) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like that differ from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, the present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which game balls are supplied to the game area by dropping game balls from the top of the game area instead of being supplied to the game area by shooting the game balls, pachinko machines in which rights are generated and a jackpot is awarded when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other game machines.

The present invention can also be applied to a ball circulation type pachinko machine in which game balls discharged from the game area are circulated in the pachinko machine without being discharged from the pachinko machine, and are then supplied to the game area again. In such a ball circulation type pachinko machine, the player is not allowed to touch the game balls circulating in the pachinko machine, and further, the number of available game balls is given to the player based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, and the number of available game balls is reduced by one when one game ball is launched into the game area.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines that have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and that start the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and that, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, give the player a special privilege, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.The present invention can also be applied to medal-less slot machines in which medals are not used as the game value, but information on the number of virtual medals available to the player is used as the game value.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

(33) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, the tenth embodiment, and the sixteenth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic configurations of the second embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the ninth embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, and the fifteenth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic configurations of the third embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment may be combined; and the characteristic configurations of the tenth embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, the configurations of the other forms may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. Profit providing means (functions of executing steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62 and a payout control device 77 if the profit providing event is a game ball entering any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, and a game round corresponding to the big win result, and a function of executing steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62 if the profit providing event is a game ball entering any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, and a game round corresponding to the big win result) that provides a profit to the player based on the occurrence of a profit providing event (entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, a game ball, and an opening/closing execution mode if the game round corresponding to the big win result is a profit providing event) by playing a game,
A situation determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the main MPU 62, a function for executing a period adjustment ... a function for executing a final stop period selection process in the second embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing an interval period selection process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62, in the second embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62, in the third embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2604 in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62, in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62, in the fifth embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62; in the eighth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3406, S3407 and S3413 in the main MPU 62; in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3506, S3507 and S3603 in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the selection process of the final stop period, the process at the start of opening, the selection process of the closing period and the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62; in the 12th embodiment, a function to execute a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62; in the 13th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the master MPU 62; in the 14th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the master MPU 62; in the 15th embodiment, a function to execute a period setting process, a period adjustment process, a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process and an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62; in the 16th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the dispensing control device 77);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, a benefit is awarded to a player based on the occurrence of a benefit-granting event as a result of playing a game, so the player plays the game in the hope that a benefit-granting event will occur. In this case, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's degree of advantage, so it is possible to appropriately award a benefit to the player.

Feature A2. The target period (in the first to third and fifteenth embodiments, the firing cycle, the duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play, the final stop period of the number of times of play, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode in the fourth embodiment, the average duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the firing cycle and the average duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play in the seventh embodiment, the firing cycle in the eighth and ninth embodiments, the final stop period of the number of times of play, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the opening period of the special telephone winning device 32, the closing period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode in the eleventh embodiment, the opening period and the ending period in the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, and the payout speed of the game ball in the sixteenth embodiment) varies, so that the period required from the predetermined timing until the occurrence of the predetermined profit-granting event can vary;
The gaming machine described in feature A1, wherein the situation determination means varies the target period according to the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature A2, in a configuration in which the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs can vary by varying the target period, the subsequent target period varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. And by varying the target period, the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs varies, and as a result, the period required from the specified timing until a benefit is awarded varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature A3. The gaming machine described in Feature A2, wherein the situation determination means makes the target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value).

According to feature A3, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the target period becomes longer than before, and as the target period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until a predetermined benefit-granting event occurs becomes longer, and as this period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until a benefit is granted becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being granted to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) that is higher in advantage for the player than the first predetermined advantage are set;
The situation determination means is
A means for making the target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1504, S1603, and S1604 in the master MPU 62; in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2104, S2303, and S2304 in the master MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2504, S2703, and S2704 in the master MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2504, S2703, and S2704 in the master MPU 62). a function for executing the processing of steps S3904, S3905, S4004, S4005, S4412, S4413, S4506, S4511, S4512, S4604 and S4605; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4704, S4705, S4804 and S4805 in the main MPU 62; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4903 in the main MPU 62; and in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S6105 in the MPU of the dispensing control device 77).
A means for making the target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1506, S1606, and S1607 in the master MPU 62; in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2106, S2306, and S2307 in the master MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2706, and S2707 in the master MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2706, and S2707 in the master MPU 62). a function for executing the processing of steps S3907, S3908, S4007, S4008, S4414, S4415, S4507, S4513 to S4515, S4607 and S4608; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4707, S4708, S4807 and S4808 in the main MPU 62; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4905 in the main MPU 62; and in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S6106 in the MPU of the dispensing control device 77).
The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A4, the target period is gradually lengthened depending on the player's degree of advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's degree of advantage, the longer the period required from the specified timing until the occurrence of a specified benefit-granting event becomes, and as this period becomes gradually longer, the period required from the specified timing until the benefit is granted becomes gradually longer. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large benefit from being granted to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A5. The device is provided with a supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (the game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a player is performing a supplying operation in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit-granting event is generated based on a game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning hole 31, special winning device 32, first operating hole 33, second operating hole 34) provided in the game area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that the target period is the specified cycle.

According to feature A5, the predetermined period during which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the predetermined period varies the time required from when one game ball enters the ball entry means until the next game ball enters, and the variation in this period varies the time required until a profit is awarded. This makes it possible to appropriately award profits to players.

Feature A6. The game control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game, with one game being one in which the game operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and the game operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger,
The game control means includes an operation period determination means for determining an operation execution period (a variable duration of game times or an execution period of game times) during which the game times operation is executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the master MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the master MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the master MPU 62 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2910 in the master MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3013 in the master MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment),
The profit-granting event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the grant of the profit is completed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A5, characterized in that the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution period.

According to feature A6, the action execution period or the average action execution period varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the action execution period or the average action execution period varies the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed, and the variation in the period varies the period required for the benefit to be awarded. This makes it possible to appropriately award the benefit to the player.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the situation determination means varies the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determination means depending on the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature A7, when the operation execution period of the game-use operation is changed according to the player's advantage, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determination means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Feature A8: The information storage means (main ROM 63) stores a plurality of types of period information groups in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, and first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 in the seventh embodiment),
The action period determination means determines the action execution period by referring to the period information group of a type corresponding to a game status,
the plurality of types of period information groups are set so that average periods of the operation execution periods determined by the operation period determination means are different from each other;
The gaming machine described in feature A7, wherein the situation determination means varies the type of period information group referenced by the operation period determination means depending on the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature A8, the type of period information group referenced by the action period determination means is configured to vary depending on the player's degree of advantage, making it possible to vary the average duration of the action execution period with a simple configuration of varying the type of period information group to be referenced.

Feature A9: The information storage means stores, as the period information group, at least a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and a second period information group (reduced period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group;
The operation period determination means
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the first period information group in a first game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two) (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the second period information group in a second game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more) (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A8 is characterized in that the situation determination means causes the first period information group to be referenced in the operation period determination means even in the second gaming situation when the player's advantage is a predetermined advantage or higher (a function of executing a positive judgment in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature A9, when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the action execution determination means references the first period information group, instead of the second period information group, which has a shorter average action execution period than the first period information group, as would normally be referenced. This makes it possible to lengthen the average action execution period when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, which in turn lengthens the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed, and the period fluctuates, lengthening the period required for the benefit to be awarded. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The first period information group that is to be referenced by the operation period determination means even in the second game situation when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage is the period information group that is referenced by the operation period determination means in the first game situation. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated period information group for the case when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the required memory capacity.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the situation determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means according to the player's degree of advantage (function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments).

According to feature A10, when the action execution period of a game action is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage, the determination manner of the action execution period by the action period determination means is not varied, but the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's degree of advantage while maintaining the determination manner of the action execution period by the action period determination means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the action period determination means.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10, characterized in that when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's advantage, the situation determination means varies the action execution period in a manner corresponding to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determination means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature A11, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player, the variation is performed in a manner according to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determination means. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period so as to effectively optimize the awarding of benefits to the player.

Feature A12. The situation determination means is
A means for lengthening the action execution period determined by the action period determination means by an additional period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first predetermined advantage (a function for executing the processing of steps S2802 to S2804 of the master MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second predetermined advantage that is higher than the first predetermined advantage, a means for lengthening the action execution period determined by the action period determination means by a natural number multiple of 2 or more of the additional period (a function for executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11,

According to feature A12, when the player's advantage becomes high, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and as the action execution period becomes longer, the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed becomes longer than before, and as this period fluctuates, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

In addition, the action execution period is gradually lengthened depending on the player's degree of advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's degree of advantage, the longer the action execution period becomes, and as the action execution period becomes longer, the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit is completed becomes longer, and as this period becomes longer, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

In addition, when the operation period determination means is lengthened in stages, the natural number is increased when adding a natural number multiple of the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which multiple types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A10 to A12, characterized in that when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's advantage, the situation determination means varies the same period from the action execution period determined by the action period determination means, regardless of whether the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is a first action execution period or a second action execution period (function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments).

According to feature A13, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage, the same period is varied from the action execution period determined by the action period determination means regardless of whether the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is the first action execution period or the second action execution period, so that it is possible to simplify the configuration for varying the action execution period.

Feature A14. The game control means controls the game execution means in accordance with a group of operation mode information (a data table for game performance) stored in advance in a specific storage means (sound/light side ROM 83) to execute the game performance operation;
The gaming machine described in any one of features A6 to A13, characterized in that the situation determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means in accordance with the player's degree of advantage by processing the group of action state information corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to feature A14, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is changed according to the player's advantage by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period, so that it is possible to change the action execution period according to the player's advantage without increasing the number of action mode information groups pre-stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A15. A configuration in which a picture is displayed in a variable manner during the game operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high discrimination display mode (slow variation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high variation display) are set in which the discrimination of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low,
As a mode of the variable display of the patterns, a mode is provided in which a state in which all patterns are displayed in the low discrimination display mode continues for a predetermined period of time, and then a predetermined pattern is switched to a state in which it is displayed in the high discrimination display mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A6 to A14, characterized in that the situation determination means varies the period during which all pictures are displayed in the low discrimination display mode, thereby varying the action execution period determined by the action period determination means in accordance with the player's degree of advantage (a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to feature A15, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage by varying the period during which it is displayed in a low discrimination display mode, and therefore there is no need to store information for determining the mode of the variable display of the patterns in correspondence with each pattern in which the action execution period can vary. Furthermore, since the period during which all pictures are displayed in a low discrimination display mode is varied when the action execution period is varied, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if the mode of the variable display of the patterns is processed to correspond to the variation in the action execution period.

Feature A16. Equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result) advantageous to the player,
The game control means is provided with a means for causing the game operation to end in a case where a transition to the special game state occurs after the game operation ends, to result in a corresponding operation result (a function for executing the processes of steps S506 and S703 in the main MPU 62, and a function for executing the process of step S1703 in the sound/light MPU 82);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A6 to A15, characterized in that the situation determination means is equipped with a long-term selection means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S604 of the main MPU 62, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2204 of the main MPU 62, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2604 of the main MPU 62) that sets the operation execution period of the game-play operation that will transition to the special game state to a period longer than a predetermined length when the player's advantage becomes a predetermined advantage (third reference value) or more.

According to feature A16, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game operation that transitions to a special game state becomes longer than a predetermined period. This makes it possible to prevent the period required for the special game state to occur from becoming shorter than the predetermined period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, and makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A16, wherein the long-term selection means sets the action execution period in which the special game state is transitioned to the longest period of the action execution period when the player's advantage level is equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage level.

According to feature A17, when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage level, the operation execution period of the game operation that transitions to a special game state becomes the longest period of the operation execution period. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special game state to occur when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage level, and prevents the player from being awarded an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A18. The gaming machine described in Feature A17, wherein the maximum period is longer than the longest period of the action execution period that can be determined by the action period determination means when the player's advantage is less than the predetermined advantage.

According to feature A18, the operation execution period of the game-use operation that transitions to a special game state when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage is longer than the longest operation execution period that can be selected when the player's advantage is less than the predetermined advantage. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special game state to occur when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, and also makes it possible to set an operation execution period that is different from the operation execution period when the player's advantage is less than the predetermined advantage.

Feature A19. A gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, characterized in that it is provided with a means (sound/light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92) for executing a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining time until the game operation is completed when the game operation is performed for the longest period of time.

According to feature A19, when a game-use action with the longest duration is performed, a notification is executed to allow the player to recognize the remaining period until the game-use action is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game-use action not completing when a game-use action with the longest duration is being performed.

Feature A20. Equipped with a predetermined transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a small win result) which is a game state advantageous to the player and less advantageous than the special game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A16 to A19, characterized in that the situation determination means makes it possible for the operation execution period of the game-play operation that will transition to the specified game state to be a period of the specified length even when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the specified advantage.

According to feature A20, when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of a game-use operation that results in a transition to a special game state is set to a period longer than a predetermined length, whereas the operation execution period of a game-use operation that results in a transition to a predetermined game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player but less advantageous than the special game state, can be a period of a predetermined length. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time while preventing the operation execution period from becoming excessively long.

Feature A21. The game control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game round, with the game operation being started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger being counted as one game round,
The profit-granting event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the grant of the profit is completed,
A configuration in which a variable display of a pattern is performed in the game-use operation, and a stop display is performed for a stop display period (final stop period of a game) in a state in which a predetermined stop pattern is displayed after the variable display of the pattern is performed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A20, characterized in that the target period is the stopped display period.

According to feature A21, the stop display period varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the stop display period varies the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the profit to be completed, and the variation in the period varies the period required for the profit to be awarded. This makes it possible to appropriately award the profit to the player.

Feature A22. Equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The special game state includes a first period during which the predetermined profit-granting event may occur (a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state), and a second period during which the predetermined profit-granting event does not occur (an opening period, an interval period, an ending period),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A21, characterized in that the target period is the second period (a function of executing a selection process for a final stop period of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, a function of executing a selection process for an opening period, a function of executing a selection process for an interval period, and a function of executing a selection process for an ending period).

According to feature A22, the second period in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the second period varies the period required until the first period occurs, during which a specified benefit-granting event can occur. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player. In addition, because the first period itself is configured not to vary, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while preventing variation in the expected number of times the specified benefit-granting event will occur in the special gaming state.

Feature A23. The second period occurs multiple times in the special gaming state,
The gaming machine described in feature A22, wherein the situation determination means varies each of the multiple second periods according to the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature A23, each of the multiple second periods in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the player's degree of advantage, making it possible to increase the number of periods that are subject to fluctuation, and thus making it possible to increase the total amount of fluctuation of the second periods in the special gaming state without excessively increasing the amount of fluctuation of any one second period.

Feature A24. A gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A23, characterized in that the situation determination means makes the target period longer than the normal gaming state during an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is greater than in the normal gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3407 of the master MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3507 of the master MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment).

According to feature A24, during advantageous periods in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state, the target period is longer than in the normal gaming state. And because the target period is longer than in the normal gaming state, the period required from the specified timing until the occurrence of a specified benefit-granting event is longer than in the normal gaming state, and because this period is longer, the period required from the specified timing until a benefit is granted is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being granted to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A25. At least a first transition opportunity (a 5R high probability big win result) and a second transition opportunity (a 10R high probability big win result) exist as transition opportunities of the advantageous period,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs;
The situation determination means is
A means for making the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity longer than the normal gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 of the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment);
A means for making the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function for executing the processes of steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature A24, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A25, in a configuration in which the target period is longer during an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state, the target period is longer for advantageous periods that arise due to transition triggers with a higher advantage. Thus, the period required from a specified timing until the benefit is awarded is longer for advantageous periods that arise due to transition triggers with a higher advantage. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A26. At least a first transition opportunity (a 5R high probability big win result) and a second transition opportunity (a 10R high probability big win result) exist as transition opportunities to an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in a normal gaming state;
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A25, characterized in that the situation determination means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function of executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment).

According to feature A26, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for a player if the second transition trigger occurs than the first transition trigger, the target period in an advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than in the normal gaming state is longer for the advantageous period based on the second transition trigger occurring than for the advantageous period based on the first transition trigger occurring. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the specified timing until the specified benefit-granting event occurs becomes longer, and as this period becomes longer, the period required from the specified timing until the benefit is awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A27. The first transition trigger is a transition to a first special game state;
The gaming machine described in feature A25 or A26, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to feature A27, the higher the degree of advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period can be made. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A24 to A27, wherein the situation determination means cancels the situation that has prolonged the target period when the advantageous period ends.

Feature A28 makes it possible to limit the situation in which the target period is extended to within the range of a single favorable period. This makes it possible to prevent the target period from being extended excessively.

Feature A29. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A24 to A28, characterized in that the situation determination means does not change the target period that is set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to feature A29, the target period does not change during the favorable period, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A30. A lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S503 in the master MPU 62) for determining by lottery whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery trigger;
A special transition means (a function of executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a transition result corresponding to transitioning the game state to the special game state;
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery trigger may occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A24 to A29, characterized in that the advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state in between.

According to feature A30, if a situation favorable to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period is extended.

Feature A31. The situation determination means is
an information grasping means (the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth and fourteenth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number in the tenth, eleventh and sixteenth embodiments, and the value of the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment) for grasping predetermined history information (the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth and fourteenth embodiments, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number area 205 in the tenth, eleventh and sixteenth embodiments, and the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment) based on a predetermined game history resulting from the play;
An information correspondence determination means for determining a subsequent game status based on the predetermined history information (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period setting process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a selection process for a final stop period in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a selection process for an opening period in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a selection process for an interval period in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a selection process for an ending period in the master MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, In the first embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the main MPU 62, a function for executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62, and a function for executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the main MPU 62, a function for executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, and a function for executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing steps S2901 to S in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the final stop period selection process, the process at the start of opening, the closing period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the opening period selection process and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62; a function for executing the processing of steps S5407 and S5408 to S5412 in the 14th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main MPU 62 in the 15th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of period setting, period adjustment, final stop period selection, opening period selection, interval period selection and ending period selection in the main MPU 62 in the 16th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the dispensing control device 77 in the 16th embodiment.
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, comprising:

According to feature A31, predetermined history information is obtained based on a predetermined gaming history obtained by playing a game, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the obtained predetermined history information. This allows the subsequent gaming situation to change according to the predetermined gaming history, making it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature A32. The gaming machine described in Feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information varies depending on the profit granted to the player.

According to feature A32, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the profit given to the player, so it becomes possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A33. The benefit awarding means awards a game value that enables a player to play a game as the benefit;
The gaming machine according to feature A31 or A32, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the gaming value granted to the player.

According to feature A33, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information varies according to the game value granted to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the game value granted to the player, so it becomes possible to appropriately grant benefits to the player.

Feature A34. The gaming machine described in Feature A33, characterized in that the predetermined history information is information corresponding to the ratio of the number of game values granted to a player to the number of game values used by the player (target payout rate in the second embodiment).

According to feature A34, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the ratio of the number of game values granted to the player to the number of game values used by the player. This allows the subsequent game situation to change according to the increase in the game value owned by the player, making it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature A35. The device is provided with a period generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S912 and S1107 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the special call start process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for generating a second predetermined period (a round game in the first, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, and sixteenth embodiments, and an opening and closing execution mode in the third embodiment) in which the expected value of the profit to be awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined period (a period other than the round game in the first, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, and sixteenth embodiments, and a period other than the opening and closing execution mode in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature A31, characterized in that the specified history information varies depending on the number of occurrences of the second specified period.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which the specified history information varies depending on the number of occurrences of a second predetermined period in which the expected value of the benefit being awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined period, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the specified history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that it becomes possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature A36. The gaming machine described in Feature A35, wherein the information grasping means updates the predetermined history information before the end of the second predetermined period when it is determined that the second predetermined period will occur.

According to feature A36, when it is determined that a second predetermined period will occur, the predetermined history information is updated before the end of the second predetermined period, making it possible to quickly change the subsequent gaming situation in response to fluctuations in the player's profits.

Feature A37. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (a special ball entry device 32) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A35 or A36, wherein the second specified period is a specified period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state.

According to feature A37, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the predetermined period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in a special game state, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the predetermined period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in a special game state, so that it becomes possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature A38. The gaming machine described in Feature A37, characterized in that the special gaming states include at least a first special gaming state (an open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result) and a second special gaming state (an open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result) in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state occurs is different from that of the first special gaming state.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is in an open state differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, the predetermined history information varies according to the predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in the special game state. This makes it possible to change the game situation in a manner that corresponds to the profit actually given to the player, compared to a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the number of times the special game state occurs.

Feature A39. As the predetermined period, there is at least a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small,
A gaming machine described in feature A37 or A38, characterized in that the second specified period includes the first specified period but does not include the second specified period.

According to feature A39, the predetermined history information varies depending on the number of occurrences of a predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, while the predetermined history information does not vary depending on the number of occurrences of a predetermined second period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the game situation in a manner that corresponds to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature A40. A predetermined decision means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for deciding whether or not to transition to a special game state (high frequency winning mode opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a decision opportunity;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result);
A number of times storage means (a consecutive win counter 181) for storing information corresponding to a specific occurrence number of times;
An update means (a function for executing the process of step S2407 of the master MPU 62 in the third embodiment) for updating information of the frequency storage means so that the specific occurrence frequency is increased when the special game state occurs or occurs based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A39, characterized in that the situation determination means determines the subsequent game situation based on information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count memory means.

According to feature A40, the number of specific occurrences, which is the number of times that a special game state occurs based on a predetermined transition result being achieved during an advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the number of specific occurrences. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes depending on the number of times that a special game state occurs based on a predetermined transition result being achieved during an advantageous period, so that it is possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature A41. The special transition means transitions the game state to the special game state based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being a specific transition result (2R high probability big win result or small win result);
The gaming machine described in feature A40 is characterized in that the update means does not update the information of the count memory means to increase the number of times the specific occurrence occurs, even if the special game state occurs based on the determination result by the specified determination means being the specific transition result during the advantageous period.

According to feature A41, depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition to the special game state, the occurrence of the special game state may or may not be reflected in the specific occurrence count. This makes it possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to predetermined transition results, making it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature A42. The gaming machine described in Feature A41, characterized in that the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being the specific transition result has a lower advantage for the player than the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result.

According to feature A42, even if a special game state with a low degree of advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special game state is not reflected in the specific occurrence count. This makes it possible to determine the subsequent game situation according to the number of occurrences of a special game state with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature A43. The configuration in which no determination is made by the predetermined determination means in the special game state,
As game states in which the determination trigger may occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state being interposed therebetween,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A40 to A42, characterized in that the update means is provided with a means for updating the number of times storage means so that the specific occurrence number becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (a function for executing the processing of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment).

According to feature A43, the number of specific occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the game situation according to the number of times a special game state occurs within one advantageous period.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features A1 to A43. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to a game area (a game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supplying operation is performed by a player in a situation where game balls can be supplied;
a profit providing means for providing a profit (a game ball if the game ball enters any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34 is a profit providing event, and an opening/closing execution mode is generated if the game round corresponding to the big win result is a profit providing event) to a player based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) provided in the game area (a function for executing the processing of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62 if the game ball enters any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34 is a profit providing event, and a payout control device 77, and a function for executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62 if the game round corresponding to the big win result is a profit providing event);
a period change means for changing the predetermined period (a function for executing a period setting process in the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S3105, S3108, and S3211 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3407 and S3413 in the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3507 and S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment, and a function for executing a period setting process in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, a player is awarded a benefit based on a game ball flowing down the game area landing in a predetermined ball entry means, so the player plays the game in the hope that the game ball will land in the predetermined ball entry means. In this case, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is changed as appropriate, and by changing the predetermined cycle, the frequency at which game balls land in the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed. This makes it possible to appropriately award game value to players.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, characterized in that the period change means changes the predetermined period according to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence or absence of an open/close execution mode in the ninth embodiment).

According to feature B2, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the player's degree of advantage. By varying this predetermined cycle, the frequency at which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also changes, and by varying this ball entry frequency, the period required for a profit to be awarded varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award profits to players.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, wherein the period change means makes the predetermined period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value).

According to feature B3, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the predetermined period becomes longer than before, and as the predetermined period becomes longer, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also decreases, and as the frequency of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means decreases, the period required for a profit to be awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) that is higher in advantage for the player than the first predetermined advantage are set;
The period changing means is
means for making the predetermined period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1504, S1603, and S1604 in the master MPU 62; in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2104, S2303, and S2304 in the master MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2504, S2703, and S2704 in the master MPU 62);
means for making the predetermined period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1506, S1606 and S1607 in the master MPU 62; in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2106, S2306 and S2307 in the master MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2706 and S2707 in the master MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature B4, the predetermined period is lengthened in stages according to the player's degree of advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's degree of advantage, the lower the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time, and the lower the ball entry frequency, the longer the period required for the profit to be awarded. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the period change means makes the predetermined period longer than the normal gaming state during an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is greater than in the normal gaming state (a function for executing the processes of steps S3105 and S3108 of the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S3407 of the master MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3507 of the master MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment).

According to feature B5, during an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state, the predetermined period is longer than in the normal gaming state. And because the predetermined period is longer than in the normal gaming state, the frequency with which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is lower than in the normal gaming state, and because the ball entry frequency is lower, the period required for a profit to be awarded is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B6. At least the first transition opportunity (5R high probability big win result) and the second transition opportunity (10R high probability big win result) exist as the transition opportunity of the advantageous period,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs;
The period changing means is
A means for making the predetermined period longer than the normal gaming state during the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function for executing the process of step S3105 of the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment);
A means for making the predetermined period longer in the favorable period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger than in the favorable period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function for executing the process of step S3108 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which the predetermined period is longer than in the normal gaming state during an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state, the predetermined period is longer for advantageous periods generated by transition triggers with a higher advantage. Thus, the period required until a profit is awarded is longer for advantageous periods generated by transition triggers with a higher advantage. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B7. At least a first transition opportunity (a 5R high probability big win result) and a second transition opportunity (a 10R high probability big win result) exist as transition opportunities to an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state;
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the period change means makes the specified period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger longer than the specified period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function of executing the processing of steps S3105 and S3108 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment).

According to feature B7, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for a player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs, the predetermined period during the advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than in the normal gaming state is longer for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger than for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger. And, as the predetermined period becomes longer, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also decreases, and the lower ball entry frequency increases the period required for a profit to be awarded. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B8. The first transition trigger is a transition to a first special game state;
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to feature B8, the higher the degree of advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the predetermined period in that advantageous period can be made. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B5 to B8, wherein the period change means cancels the state in which the predetermined period is long when the advantageous period ends.

Feature B9 makes it possible to limit the situation in which the specified period is lengthened to within the range of a single favorable period. This makes it possible to prevent the specified period from being lengthened excessively.

Feature B10: A lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S503 in the master MPU 62) for determining by lottery whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery trigger;
A special transition means (a function of executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a transition result corresponding to transitioning the game state to the special game state;
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery trigger may occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B5 to B9, characterized in that the advantageous period is a state in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state in between.

Feature B10 makes it possible to continue a situation in which the predetermined period is extended if the situation remains favorable to the player.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features B1 to B10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (a special ball entry device 32) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
Equipped with
In the special game state, a first predetermined period (other than round play in the open/close execution mode) occurs during which the variable ball entry means is maintained in the closed state, and a second predetermined period (round play in the open/close execution mode) occurs during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state and the game ends with the variable ball entry means in the closed state based on the establishment of a termination condition when the variable ball entry means is in the open state.
This gaming machine is
An information grasping means for grasping a predetermined occurrence number which is the number of times the predetermined second predetermined period has occurred (a total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, and a target round number area 205 in the tenth, eleventh and sixteenth embodiments);
A number of times correspondence determination means for determining a subsequent game status based on the predetermined number of occurrences (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period setting process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing a final stop period selection process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing an opening period selection process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing an interval period selection process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62) in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62; in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the final stop period selection processing, the processing at the start of opening, the closing period selection processing and the ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the opening period selection processing and the ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the dispensing control device 77).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of times that the second predetermined period occurs during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in the special game state. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players, since the subsequent game situation changes depending on the number of times that the second predetermined period occurs during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in the special game state.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the special gaming states include at least a first special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability jackpot result) and a second special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result) in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs differs from that of the first special gaming state.

According to feature C2, in a configuration in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of times the second predetermined period occurs in the special game state in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state. This makes it possible to change the game situation in a manner that corresponds to the profit actually granted to the player, compared to a configuration in which the subsequent game situation is determined according to the number of times the special game state occurs.

Feature C3. As the second predetermined period, there is at least a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small;
A gaming machine described in feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the second predetermined period includes the first predetermined period but does not include the second predetermined period.

According to feature C3, the predetermined number of occurrences varies depending on the number of occurrences in a predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, while the predetermined number of occurrences does not vary depending on the number of occurrences in a predetermined second period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the game situation in a manner that corresponds to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature C4. The target period (in the first embodiment, the firing cycle, the duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play, the final stop period of the number of times of play, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, in the fourth embodiment, the duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play, and in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the average duration of fluctuation of the number of times of play) varies, thereby allowing the period required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined profit-granting event occurs to vary;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number-of-occurrences correspondence determination means varies the target period according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C4, in a configuration in which the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs can vary by varying the target period, the subsequent target period varies depending on the number of times a second specified period occurs. And, by varying the target period, the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, wherein the number-of-occurrences correspondence determining means makes the target period longer than before when the predetermined number of occurrences becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value).

According to feature C5, when the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before, and by making the target period longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing until the occurrence of the predetermined benefit-granting event becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature C6. At least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is greater than the first reference value are set as the predetermined reference value;
The number of times correspondence determination means
A means for making the target period longer than before when the predetermined number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the first reference value (a function for executing the processes of steps S1504, S1603, and S1604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment);
A means for making the target period longer than before when the predetermined number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value (a function for executing the processes of steps S1506, S1606, and S1607 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature C5 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature C6, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of times the second predetermined period occurs. Therefore, the more times the second predetermined period occurs, the longer the period required from the specified timing until the occurrence of the specified benefit-granting event becomes. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature C7. The supply means supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined period when a supply operation is performed by a player in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the target period is the specified cycle.

According to feature C7, the predetermined period during which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. The variation in the predetermined period varies the period required from the predetermined timing until the occurrence of a predetermined benefit-granting event. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature C8. The game control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game round, with the game operation being started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger being counted as one game round,
The game control means includes an operation period determination means for determining an operation execution period (a variable duration of game times or an execution period of game times) during which the game times operation is executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the master MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the master MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the master MPU 62 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2910 in the master MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3013 in the master MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment),
The profit-granting event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the grant of the profit is completed,
A gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C7, characterized in that the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution periods.

According to feature C8, the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution periods varies depending on the number of times the second predetermined period occurs. Then, as the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution periods varies, the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed varies, and as this period varies, the period required for the benefit to be awarded varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award the benefit to the player.

Feature C9. The gaming machine described in Feature C8, characterized in that the number-of-times correspondence determination means varies the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determination means in accordance with the predetermined number of occurrences (in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62, and in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62).

According to feature C9, when the operation execution period of the game-use operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determination means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Feature C10: The information storage means (main ROM 63) stores a plurality of types of period information groups in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, and first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 in the seventh embodiment);
The action period determination means determines the action execution period by referring to the period information group of a type corresponding to a game status,
the plurality of types of period information groups are set so that average periods of the operation execution periods determined by the operation period determination means are different from each other;
The gaming machine described in feature C9, wherein the number of times correspondence determination means varies the type of the period information group referenced by the operation period determination means depending on the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C10, the type of period information group referenced by the operation period determination means is configured to vary depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that the average period of the operation execution period can be varied by a simple configuration in which the type of period information group to be referenced is changed.

Feature C11: The information storage means stores, as the period information group, at least a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and a second period information group (reduced period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group;
The operation period determination means
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the first period information group in a first game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two) (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the second period information group in a second game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more) (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature C10 is characterized in that, when the specified number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a specified reference value, the number of times corresponding determination means causes the first period information group to be referenced in the operation period determination means even in the second game status (a function of executing a positive judgment in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature C11, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the action execution determination means references the first period information group, instead of the second period information group, which would normally reference a second period information group having a shorter average action execution period than the first period information group. This makes it possible to lengthen the average action execution period when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, which lengthens the period required for the game action corresponding to the award of the benefit, and as this period fluctuates, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The first period information group that is referenced by the operation period determination means even in the second game status when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value is the period information group that is referenced by the operation period determination means in the first game status. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated period information group for the case when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity.

Feature C12. The gaming machine described in Feature C8, characterized in that the number-of-times correspondence determination means varies the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means in accordance with the predetermined number of occurrences (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments).

According to feature C12, when the operation execution period of the game-use operation is varied in accordance with the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the determination manner of the operation execution period by the operation period determination means is not varied, but the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the operation execution period in accordance with the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period while maintaining the determination manner of the operation execution period in the operation period determination means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features C1 to C12. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A predetermined determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S505 in the master MPU 62) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode) advantageous to the player;
a game control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, a display MPU 92) for controlling a game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game-round operation is executed in each game round, with one game round being defined as a game round in which a game-round operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger;
When the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result) and the game operation is terminated, a special transition means (a function of executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state;
Equipped with
The game control means includes an operation period determination means for determining an operation execution period (variable duration of game times) during which the game operation is executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the master MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the master MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the master MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of the variable duration in the master MPU 62 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation period determination means is equipped with a long-term selection means for, when a specific situation occurs, making the operation execution period of the game operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result longer than a predetermined period (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S604 of the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2204 of the main MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2604 of the main MPU 62; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the main MPU 62; and in the fourteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main MPU 62).

According to feature D1, in a specific situation, the execution period of the game action that transitions to a special game state when the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined transition result is longer than a predetermined period. This makes it possible to ensure that in a specific situation, the period required for the special game state to occur as a result of the predetermined transition result is not shorter than the predetermined period, and makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the specific situation is when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage (third reference value).

According to feature D2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage, the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined transition result, and the operation execution period of the game operation that transitions to a special game state becomes longer than a predetermined period. This makes it possible to prevent the period required for the special game state to occur, which is triggered by the predetermined transition result, from being shorter than the predetermined period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, and makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or D2, characterized in that, in the specific situation, the long-term selection means sets the operation execution period of the game-use operation corresponding to the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result to the longest period of the operation execution period.

According to feature D3, in a specific situation, the action execution period of a game action that transitions to a special game state when the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined transition result is the longest period of the action execution period. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required for a special game state to occur as a result of the predetermined transition result in a specific situation, and prevents an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3, characterized in that the maximum period is longer than the longest period among the action execution periods determined by the action period determination means when the specific situation is not present.

According to feature D4, the action execution period of a game action that transitions to a special game state when the result of the decision by the predetermined decision means becomes a predetermined transition result in the case of a specific situation is longer than the longest action execution period selected when the specific situation is not present. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special game state to occur as a result of the predetermined transition result in the specific situation, and also makes it possible to set an action execution period that is different from the case of a non-specific situation.

Feature D5. A gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, characterized in that it is provided with a means (sound/light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92) for executing a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining time until the game operation is completed when the game operation is performed for the longest period of time.

According to feature D5, when a game-use action with the longest duration is performed, a notification is executed to allow the player to recognize the remaining period until the game-use action is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game-use action not completing when a game-use action with the longest duration is being performed.

Feature D6. Equipped with a predetermined transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result, a 2R high probability big win result, or a small win result) which is a game state advantageous to the player and less advantageous than the special game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the operation period determination means makes it possible for the operation execution period of the game-play operation that will transition to the specified game state to be a period of the specified length even in the specific situation.

According to feature D6, in a specific situation, the operation execution period of a game-use operation that transitions to a special game state as a result of the determination by the predetermined determination means becoming a predetermined transition result is set to a period longer than a predetermined length, whereas the operation execution period of a game-use operation that transitions to a predetermined game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player but less advantageous than the special game state, can be a period of a predetermined length. This makes it possible to prevent the operation execution period from becoming excessively long, while also preventing an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features D1 to D6. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A predetermined decision means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S505 in the master MPU 62) for deciding whether or not to transition to a special game state (high frequency winning mode opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a decision opportunity;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, or a 10R high probability big win result);
A number of times storage means (a consecutive win counter 181) for storing information corresponding to a specific occurrence number of times;
An update means (a function for executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) for updating information of the frequency storage means so that the specific occurrence frequency is increased when the special game state occurs or occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player;
A specific response determination means for determining a subsequent game status based on information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count storage means (in the third embodiment, a function for executing a period setting process in the master MPU 62, a function for executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2604 in the master MPU 62, and a function for executing a period adjustment process in the master MPU 62);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature E1, the number of specific occurrences, which is the number of times that a special game state occurs based on a predetermined transition result being achieved during an advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the number of specific occurrences. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes depending on the number of times that a special game state occurs based on a predetermined transition result being achieved during an advantageous period, so that it is possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature E2. The special transition means transitions the game state to the special game state based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being a specific transition result (2R high probability big win result or small win result);
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that the update means does not update the information of the count memory means to increase the number of times the specific occurrence occurs, even if the special game state occurs based on the determination result by the specified determination means being the specific transition result during the advantageous period.

According to feature E2, depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition to the special game state, the occurrence of the special game state may or may not be reflected in the specific occurrence count. This makes it possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to predetermined transition results, making it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, in which the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being the specific transition result is less advantageous to the player than the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result.

According to feature E3, even if a special game state with a low degree of advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special game state is not reflected in the specific occurrence count. This makes it possible to determine the subsequent game situation according to the number of occurrences of a special game state with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature E4. The configuration in which the predetermined determination means does not make a determination in the special game state,
As game states in which the determination trigger may occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state being interposed therebetween,
The gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the update means is provided with a means for updating the number of times storage means so that the specific occurrence number becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (a function for executing the processing of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment).

According to feature E4, the number of specific occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the game situation according to the number of times a special game state occurs within one advantageous period.

Feature E5. The target period (the firing period in the third embodiment, the variable duration of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode) varies, so that the period required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined profit-granting event occurs can vary.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the specific response determination means varies the target period according to information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count memory means.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs can vary by varying the target period, the subsequent target period varies depending on the number of times a special game state occurs during an advantageous period. And, by varying the target period, the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature E6. The gaming machine described in Feature E5, wherein the specific response determination means extends the target period when the specific occurrence count is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the specific occurrence count is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value).

According to feature E6, when the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value, or when the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before, and by making the target period longer than before, the period required from a predetermined timing until the occurrence of a predetermined benefit-granting event becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature E7: At least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is greater than the first reference value are set as the predetermined reference value;
The specific response determination means includes:
A means for extending the target period when the specific occurrence count is equal to or greater than the first reference value (a function for executing the processes of steps S2504, S2703, and S2704 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
A means for making the target period longer than before when the specific occurrence count becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value (a function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2706, and S2707 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature E6 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature E7, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of times the special game state occurs during the advantageous period. Therefore, the more times the special game state occurs during the advantageous period, the longer the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature E8. The device is provided with a supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a player is performing a supplying operation in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit-granting event is generated based on a game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning hole 31, special winning device 32, first operating hole 33, second operating hole 34) provided in the game area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that the target period is the specified cycle.

According to feature E8, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the number of times a special game state occurs during an advantageous period. And, by varying the predetermined cycle, the time required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined benefit-granting event occurs varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature E9. The game control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game, with one game being one in which the game operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and the game operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger,
The game control means includes an operation period determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of a game or an execution period of a game) during which the game operation is executed,
The profit-granting event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the grant of the profit is completed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E5 to E8, characterized in that the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution period.

According to feature E9, the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution period varies depending on the number of times the special game state occurs during the advantageous period. The variation in the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution period varies the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed, and the variation in the period varies the period required for the benefit to be awarded. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature E10. The gaming machine described in Feature E9, characterized in that the specific response determination means varies the determination manner of the action execution period by the action period determination means in accordance with information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count storage means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature E10, when the operation execution period of the game-use operation is changed according to the number of times a special game state occurs during an advantageous period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determination means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Feature E11. The information storage means (main ROM 63) stores a plurality of types of period information groups in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, and a first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 in the seventh embodiment),
The action period determination means determines the action execution period by referring to the period information group of a type corresponding to a game status,
the plurality of types of period information groups are set so that average periods of the operation execution periods determined by the operation period determination means are different from each other;
The gaming machine described in feature E10, wherein the specific response determination means changes the type of the period information group referenced by the operation period determination means based on information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count memory means.

According to feature E11, the type of period information group referenced by the operation period determination means is configured to vary depending on the number of times a special game state occurs during an advantageous period, making it possible to vary the average duration of the operation execution period with a simple configuration of varying the type of period information group to be referenced.

Feature E12: The information storage means stores, as the period information group, at least a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and a second period information group (reduced period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group;
The operation period determination means
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the first period information group in a first game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is less than two) (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
A means for determining the operation execution period by referring to the second period information group in a second game situation (when the game is in a high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information stored on the second special chart side is two or more) (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature E11 is characterized in that, when the number of times the specific occurrence is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the specific response determination means causes the first period information group to be referenced in the operation period determination means even in the second game status (a function of executing a positive judgment in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature E12, when the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the action execution determination means references the first period information group, instead of the second period information group, which has a shorter average action execution period than the first period information group, as would normally be referenced. This makes it possible to lengthen the average action execution period when the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, which lengthens the period required for the game action corresponding to the award of a benefit, and as this period fluctuates, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

The first period information group that is referenced by the operation period determination means even in the second game status when the number of times the special game status occurs during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value is the period information group that is referenced by the operation period determination means in the first game status. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated period information group for the case when the number of times the special game status occurs during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the required memory capacity.

Feature E13. The gaming machine described in Feature E9, characterized in that the specific response determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means in accordance with information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count storage means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments).

According to feature E13, when the operation execution period of the game-use operation is varied according to the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period, the determination manner of the operation execution period by the operation period determination means is not varied, but the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the operation execution period according to the number of times that a special game state occurs during an advantageous period, while maintaining the determination manner of the operation execution period by the operation period determination means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features E1 to E13. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. The device is provided with a benefit granting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62 and a payout control device 77 if the game ball is entered into one of the ball entry sections 31 to 34 as a benefit granting event, and a function for executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62 if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a benefit granting event) that grants a benefit to a player based on the occurrence of a benefit granting event (entry of a game ball into one of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, a game round corresponding to the jackpot result) by playing a game,
The target period (the average of the duration of the fluctuation of the firing cycle and the number of times of play in the seventh embodiment) fluctuates, so that the period required from a predetermined timing until the occurrence of a predetermined profit-granting event can fluctuate.
As transition triggers to an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than that of a normal game state, at least a first transition trigger (a 5R high probability jackpot result) and a second transition trigger (a 10R high probability jackpot result) exist;
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a target period determination means (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62) that differentiates the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger from the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger.

According to feature F1, the target period during an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state is different between the advantageous period based on the occurrence of a first transition trigger and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of a second transition trigger. The difference in the target period causes the period required from a specified timing until a specified benefit-granting event occurs to vary, and the variation in this period causes the period required from the specified timing until a benefit is awarded to vary. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature F2. It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs;
The gaming machine described in feature F1 is characterized in that the target period determination means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (a function of executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment).

According to feature F2, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for a player if the second transition trigger occurs than the first transition trigger, the target period in an advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than in the normal gaming state is longer for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger than for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the specified timing until the specified benefit-granting event occurs becomes longer, and as this period becomes longer, the period required from the specified timing until the benefit is awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature F3. The first transition trigger is a transition to a first special game state;
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to feature F3, the higher the degree of advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period can be made. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, wherein the target period determination means sets the target period to a period corresponding to the normal gaming state when the advantageous period ends.

Feature F4 makes it possible to limit the situation in which the target period changes to within the range of a single favorable period. This makes it possible to prevent the target period from becoming excessively long.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the target period determination means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to feature F5, the target period does not change during the favorable period, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F6: A lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S503 in the master MPU 62) for determining by lottery whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery trigger;
A special transition means (a function of executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a transition result corresponding to transitioning the game state to the special game state;
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery trigger may occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state in between.

Feature F6 makes it possible to continue the situation in which the target period has been changed if the situation favorable to the player continues.

Feature F7: A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) is provided to supply game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supplying operation is performed by a player in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit-granting event is generated based on a game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning hole 31, special winning device 32, first operating hole 33, second operating hole 34) provided in the game area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that the target period is the specified cycle.

According to feature F7, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is changed depending on the type of trigger for transitioning to the advantageous period. And by changing the predetermined cycle, the time required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined benefit-granting event occurs changes. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature F8. The game control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game round, with one game round being defined as a game round in which a game operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger,
The game control means includes an operation period determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of a game or an execution period of a game) during which the game operation is executed,
The profit-granting event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the grant of the profit is completed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution period.

According to feature F8, the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution period varies depending on the type of trigger for transitioning to the advantageous period. The variation in the action execution period or the average duration of the action execution period varies the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the profit to be completed, and the variation in the period varies the period required for the profit to be awarded. This makes it possible to appropriately award profits to players.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in Feature F8, wherein the target period determination means causes the determination manner of the operation execution period by the operation period determination means to differ between the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger.

According to feature F9, when the operation execution period of the game action is changed depending on the type of trigger for transition to the advantageous period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determination means is changed. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determination means.

Feature F10. The information storage means (main ROM 63) stores a plurality of types of period information groups in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, and a first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 in the seventh embodiment),
The action period determination means determines the action execution period by referring to the period information group of a type corresponding to a game status,
the plurality of types of period information groups are set so that average periods of the operation execution periods determined by the operation period determination means are different from each other;
The gaming machine described in feature F9, wherein the target period determination means makes the type of the period information group referenced by the operation period determination means different for the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger.

According to feature F10, the type of period information group referenced by the operation period determination means is configured to differ depending on the type of trigger for transition to the favorable period, so that it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period with a simple configuration of varying the type of period information group to be referenced.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features F1 to F10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1: A predetermined determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S505 in the master MPU 62) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode with the greatest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode) advantageous to the player;
a game control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, a display MPU 92) for controlling a game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game-round operation is executed in each game round, with one game round being defined as a game round in which a game-round operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger;
When the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result) and the game operation is terminated, a special transition means (a function of executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to the special game state;
Equipped with
The game control means includes an operation period determination means for determining an operation execution period (a variable continuation period of a game or an execution period of a game) during which the game operation is executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the master MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the master MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the master MPU 62 in the third embodiment),
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a period variation means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth and twelfth embodiments) that varies the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means in accordance with the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment).

According to feature G1, the action execution period of the game-use action determined by the action period determination means varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the action execution period varies the period required for the game-use action corresponding to the transition to the special game state to be completed, and the variation in the period varies the period required for the special game state to occur. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Furthermore, when the action execution period of a game action is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage, the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determination means is not varied, but rather the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's degree of advantage while maintaining the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determination means in a predetermined manner. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the action period determination means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's advantage, the period variation means varies the action execution period in a manner according to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determination means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature G2, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player, the variation is performed in a manner according to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determination means. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period so as to effectively optimize the awarding of benefits to the player.

Feature G3. The period varying means is
A means for lengthening the action execution period determined by the action period determination means by an additional period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) (a function for executing the processes of steps S2802 to S2804 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
a means for lengthening the action execution period determined by the action period determination means by a natural number multiple of 2 or more of the additional period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) that is higher than the first predetermined advantage (a function for executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, further comprising:

According to feature G3, when the player's advantage increases, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and as the action execution period becomes longer, the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed becomes longer than before, and as this period changes, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

In addition, the action execution period is gradually lengthened depending on the player's degree of advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's degree of advantage, the longer the action execution period becomes, and as the action execution period becomes longer, the period required for the game action corresponding to the awarding of the benefit to be completed becomes longer, and as this period becomes longer, the period required for the benefit to be awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

In addition, when the operation period determination means is lengthened in stages, the natural number is increased when adding a natural number multiple of the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determination means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which multiple types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's advantage, the period variation means varies the same period from the action execution period determined by the action period determination means, whether the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is a first action execution period or a second action execution period (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments).

According to feature G4, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage, the same period is varied from the action execution period determined by the action period determination means regardless of whether the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is the first action execution period or the second action execution period, so that it is possible to simplify the configuration for varying the action execution period.

Feature G5. The game control means controls the game execution means in accordance with a group of operation mode information (a data table for game round performance) previously stored in a specific storage means (sound/light side ROM 83) to execute the game round operation;
The gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the period variation means varies the action execution period according to the player's degree of advantage by processing the group of action state information corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to feature G5, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is changed according to the player's advantage by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period, so that it is possible to change the action execution period according to the player's advantage without increasing the number of action mode information groups pre-stored in the specified storage means.

Feature G6. A configuration in which a picture is displayed in a variable manner during the game play operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high discrimination display mode (slow variation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high variation display) are set in which the discrimination of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low,
As a mode of the variable display of the patterns, a mode is provided in which a state in which all patterns are displayed in the low discrimination display mode continues for a predetermined period of time, and then a predetermined pattern is switched to a state in which it is displayed in the high discrimination display mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the period variation means varies the period during which all images are displayed in the low discrimination display mode, thereby varying the action execution period determined by the action period determination means in accordance with the player's degree of advantage (a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to feature G6, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied in accordance with the player's degree of advantage by varying the period during which it is displayed in a low discrimination display mode, and therefore there is no need to store information for determining the mode of the variable display of the patterns corresponding to each pattern in which the action execution period can vary. Furthermore, since the period during which all pictures are displayed in a low discrimination display mode is varied when the action execution period is varied, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if the mode of the variable display of the patterns is processed to correspond to the variation in the action execution period.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features G1 to G6. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. The contents of the first predetermined target (any of the launching period of the game ball, the duration of the fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period in the first to fourth embodiments, any of the launching period of the game ball and the duration of the fluctuation of the game round in the seventh embodiment, any of the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period in the tenth embodiment, any of the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, any of the launching period of the game ball, the duration of the fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period in the fifteenth embodiment) that can affect the frequency of the provision of the benefit to the player per unit time, the advantageous degree of the player (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the existence of the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment) are displayed on the display screen. a first varying means for varying the number of rounds in the first to fourth embodiments, a function for executing a cycle setting process, a period adjustment process, a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments, a function for executing steps S3105 to S3109 in the master MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing a final stop period selection process, a process at the start of opening, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62 in the 11th embodiment, and a function for executing a cycle setting process, a period adjustment process, a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the master MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment;
a second varying means (first variable means) for varying the content of a second predetermined target (any of the shooting cycle of game balls, the duration of fluctuation of game times, the final stop period of a game time, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period in the first to sixth embodiments, any of the shooting cycle of game balls and the duration of fluctuation of game times in the seventh embodiment, any of the final stop period of a game time, the opening period, the opening period of the special electric winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period in the tenth embodiment, any of the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, any of the shooting cycle of game balls, the duration of fluctuation of game times, the final stop period of a game time, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period in the fifteenth embodiment) according to the advantage of the player; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of final stop period selection, processing at the start of opening, closing period selection, and ending period selection in the main MPU 62; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processes of opening period selection and ending period selection in the main MPU 62; in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of period setting, period adjustment, final stop period selection, opening period selection, interval period selection, and ending period selection in the main MPU 62).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H1, the content of a first predetermined event that can affect the frequency at which a player is awarded a benefit per unit time is varied according to the player's degree of advantage, and the content of a second predetermined event that can affect the frequency at which a player is awarded a benefit per unit time is varied according to the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players. In particular, because the content of multiple events, the first and second predetermined events, is varied according to the player's degree of advantage, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying the frequency at which a player is awarded a benefit per unit time according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature H2. The first variation means varies the content of the first predetermined target based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes a first target advantage (first reference value) or the player's advantage becomes a first target advantage (first reference value);
The gaming machine described in feature H1, wherein the second variation means varies the contents of the second specified target based on the player's advantage becoming a second target advantage (second reference value) or the player's advantage becoming a second target advantage (second reference value).

According to feature H2, the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the first target advantage, and the content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the second target advantage. This makes it possible to gradually change the frequency of granting benefits to a player per unit time according to the player's advantage, while preventing the content of a specific event from changing too frequently.

Feature H3. The first variation means varies the content of the first predetermined target based on the fact that the player's advantage has become a third target advantage (third reference value) or the player's advantage has become a third target advantage (third reference value);
The gaming machine described in feature H2, wherein the second variation means varies the content of the second specified target based on the player's advantage becoming the third target advantage or the player's advantage becoming the third target advantage.

According to feature H3, in a configuration in which the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the first target advantage, and the content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the second target advantage, both the content of the first predetermined target and the content of the second predetermined target are changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the third target advantage. This makes it possible to rapidly change the frequency of awarding benefits to players per unit time as needed.

Feature H4. The first predetermined target is a first target period, and the first target period varies to change the period required from a predetermined timing until the predetermined benefit is granted;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the second specified target is a second target period, and the second target period can vary to change the period required from a specified timing until the specified benefit is awarded.

According to feature H4, the first target period capable of affecting the frequency at which a benefit is awarded to a player per unit time is varied according to the player's degree of advantage, and the second target period capable of affecting the frequency at which a benefit is awarded to a player per unit time is varied according to the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately award a benefit to a player. In particular, because multiple periods, the first target period and the second target period, are varied according to the player's degree of advantage, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying the frequency at which a benefit is awarded to a player per unit time according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature H5. The first variation means is configured to make the first target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first target advantage (first reference value), or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a first target advantage (first reference value);
The gaming machine described in feature H4, wherein the second variation means makes the second target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second target advantage (second reference value) that is more advantageous than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second target advantage.

According to feature H5, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the first target advantage, the first target period becomes longer than before, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the second target advantage, the second target period becomes longer than before. As these target periods become longer, the frequency with which benefits are awarded to players decreases. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large benefits from being awarded to players in a short period of time. It also makes it possible to gradually reduce the frequency with which benefits are awarded to players per unit time according to the player's advantage, while preventing one target period from becoming too long frequently.

Feature H6. The first variation means makes the first target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a third target advantage (third reference value) that is more advantageous than the first target advantage and the second target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage (function of executing the processing of steps S4706 to S4708 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature H5 is characterized in that the second variation means makes the second target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage (a function of executing the processing of steps S4806 to S4808 of the main MPU 62 in the 11th embodiment).

According to feature H6, in a configuration in which the first target period becomes longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or is equal to the first target advantage, and the second target period becomes longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or is equal to the second target advantage, both the first target period and the second target period become longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or is equal to the third target advantage. This makes it possible to suddenly reduce the frequency of granting benefits to players per unit time as necessary.

Feature H7. The first variation means varies the first target period by a predetermined variation target period (the first common extension period or the second common extension period in the tenth embodiment, the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) when a predetermined variation opportunity of the first target period occurs based on the advantage of the player;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H4 to H6, wherein the second variation means varies the second target period by the specified variation target period when a specified variation trigger for the second target period occurs based on the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature H7, whether the first target period is varied or the second target period is varied, the variation is performed for a predetermined variation target period. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a variation target period is prepared corresponding to each of the first target period and the second target period.

Feature H8. Equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The special game state includes a first period during which a predetermined opportunity for providing the profit may occur (a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state), and a second period during which the predetermined opportunity for providing the profit does not occur (an opening period, a closing period, an interval period, an ending period),
A gaming machine described in any one of features H4 to H7, wherein the first target period and the second target period are both the second period.

According to feature H8, the second period in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the second period varies the period required until the first period occurs during which a predetermined benefit-granting event can occur. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player. In addition, since each of the multiple second periods in the special gaming state varies depending on the player's degree of advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods that are subject to variation, and it is possible to increase the total amount of variation of the second periods in the special gaming state without excessively increasing the amount of variation of any one second period.

Feature H9. Equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The special game state includes a first period during which a predetermined opportunity for providing the profit may occur (a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state), and a second period during which the predetermined opportunity for providing the profit does not occur (an opening period, a closing period, an interval period, an ending period),
A gaming machine described in any one of features H4 to H7, wherein one of the first target period and the second target period is the first period, and the other is the second period.

According to feature H9, both the first period and the second period in the special game state vary depending on the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to adjust each of the first period and the second period to an appropriate period depending on the player's degree of advantage.

Feature H10. A game control means (a function for executing steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, a function for executing steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, a display MPU 92) that controls a game execution means (special pattern unit 37, pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game, with one game being one in which a game operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) after the game operation is completed in a situation where the special transition condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features H4 to H7, characterized in that one of the first target period and the second target period is a period included in the game round, and the other is a period included in the special game state.

According to feature H10, both the duration of a game round and the duration of the special game state vary depending on the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to adjust the duration of each game round and the duration of the special game state to an appropriate period depending on the player's degree of advantage.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features H1 to H10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
a predetermined period varying means for varying a predetermined target period (opening period, period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, closing period, interval period, ending period) included in the special game state according to a player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target round number in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, and the consecutive win occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment) (a function for executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the first to sixth embodiments, a function for executing a process at the start of opening in the main MPU 62, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function for executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, the game state can be shifted to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game state will shift to the special game state. In this case, the specified target period included in the special game state varies according to the player's degree of advantage, so the period required to complete the special game state varies according to the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature I2. The special game state includes a period during which a predetermined opportunity for a profit may occur (a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state) and a non-period during which the predetermined opportunity for a profit does not occur (an opening period, a closing period, an interval period, an ending period),
The gaming machine described in feature I1, wherein the specified target period is the non-award target period.

According to feature I2, the non-award period in the special game state varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. The variation in the non-award period varies the period required until the award period occurs, during which a specific opportunity to award a benefit may occur. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature I3. The non-grant target period includes a first non-grant target period (any of an opening period, a closing period, an interval period, and an ending period) and a second non-grant target period (any of an opening period, a closing period, an interval period, and an ending period),
The predetermined period varying means is
a first predetermined period variation means for varying the first non-award target period in accordance with the player's degree of advantage (in the first to fourth embodiments, a function for executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing a process at the start of opening, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62);
a second predetermined period variation means for varying the second non-award target period in accordance with the player's degree of advantage (in the first to fourth embodiments, a function for executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing a process at the start of opening, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62; in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62);
The gaming machine described in feature I2 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature I3, the first non-award target period is varied according to the player's degree of advantage, and the second non-award target period is varied according to the player's degree of advantage. The first non-award target period and the second non-award target period vary, and thus the period required until the occurrence of the grant target period during which a predetermined opportunity for granting a benefit may occur varies. This makes it possible to appropriately grant a benefit to a player. In particular, because multiple non-award target periods, namely the first non-award target period and the second non-award target period, vary according to the player's degree of advantage, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying the frequency of granting a benefit to a player per unit time according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature I4. The first predetermined period change means changes the first non-granting target period based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage (first reference value) or the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage (first reference value);
The gaming machine described in feature I3, wherein the second specified period variation means varies the second non-granting period based on the player's advantage becoming a second target advantage (second reference value) or the player's advantage becoming a second target advantage (second reference value).

According to feature I4, the first non-grant target period is changed based on the player's advantage becoming the first target advantage, and the second non-grant target period is changed based on the player's advantage becoming the second target advantage. This makes it possible to gradually change the period required until the grant target period occurs, during which a predetermined opportunity to grant a profit may occur, according to the player's advantage, while preventing frequent changes in one non-grant target period.

Feature I5. The first predetermined period change means changes the first non-granting target period based on the fact that the player's advantage becomes a third target advantage (third reference value) or the player's advantage becomes a third target advantage (third reference value);
The gaming machine described in feature I4, wherein the second specified period variation means varies the second non-granting period based on the player's advantage becoming the third target advantage or the player's advantage becoming the third target advantage.

According to feature I5, in a configuration in which the first non-grant target period is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the first target advantage, and the second non-grant target period is changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the second target advantage, both the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period are changed based on the player's advantage becoming or becoming the third target advantage. This makes it possible to rapidly change the period required until the grant target period occurs, during which a predetermined opportunity to grant a profit may occur, as necessary.

Feature I6. The first predetermined period change means is configured to make the first non-granting target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first target advantage (first reference value),
The gaming machine described in any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the second specified period variation means makes the second non-granting target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a second target advantage (second reference value) that is more advantageous than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second target advantage.

According to feature I6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the first target advantage, the first non-grant target period becomes longer than before, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the second target advantage, the second non-grant target period becomes longer than before. As these non-grant target periods become longer, the period required until the grant target period occurs during which a predetermined opportunity to grant a benefit may occur becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being granted to a player in a short period of time. In addition, it is possible to gradually lengthen the period required until the grant target period occurs during which a predetermined opportunity to grant a benefit may occur according to the player's advantage, while preventing a non-grant target period from becoming longer too frequently.

Feature I7. The first predetermined period variation means makes the first non-granting target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a third target advantage (third reference value) that is more advantageous than the first target advantage and the second target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage (a function of executing the processing of steps S4706 to S4708 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature I6 is characterized in that the second specified period variation means makes the second non-granting target period longer than before when the player's advantage degree becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage degree or when the player's advantage degree becomes equal to or greater than the third target advantage degree (a function of executing the processing of steps S4806 to S4808 of the main MPU 62 in the 11th embodiment).

According to feature I7, in a configuration in which the first non-grant target period becomes longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or becomes equal to the first target advantage, and the second non-grant target period becomes longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or becomes equal to the second target advantage, both the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period become longer than before when the player's advantage becomes or becomes equal to the third target advantage. This makes it possible to rapidly lengthen the period required until the grant target period occurs during which a predetermined opportunity to grant a profit may occur, as necessary.

Feature I8. The first predetermined period change means changes the first non-award target period by a predetermined change target period (the first common extension period or the second common extension period in the tenth embodiment, the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) when a predetermined change trigger of the first non-award target period occurs based on the advantage of the player,
The gaming machine described in any one of features I3 to I7, characterized in that the second specified period variation means varies the second non-granting period by the specified variation period when a specified variation trigger for the second non-granting period occurs based on the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature I8, whether the first non-grant target period is varied or the second non-grant target period is varied, a predetermined amount of variation target period is varied. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a variation target period is prepared corresponding to each of the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period.

Feature I9. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (a special ball entry device 32) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable ball entry control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes variable ball entry control to switch the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state in the special game state;
a round generation means for generating a round game which ends when the variable ball entry control means generates the variable ball entry control in the special game state and when one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit period has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means has reached an upper limit number (a function for executing the processes of steps S903 to S907, S1103, and S1104 in the main MPU 62 in the first to sixth embodiments; and a function for executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth and eleventh embodiments);
Equipped with
The grant target period is a period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state,
The non-award target period is a period during which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state,
The predetermined target period is the non-award target period occurring in the round game,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I2 to I8, characterized in that the specified period variation means varies the specified target period in accordance with the player's degree of advantage without varying the upper limit period in the round of play.

According to feature I9, the non-award period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state during a round of play is changed according to the player's level of advantage without changing the upper limit period during the round of play, and as a result, the award period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state during the round of play is changed. This makes it possible to set the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means during a round of play appropriately according to the player's level of advantage.

Feature I10. As the round game, there is a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs multiple times (a round game in an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result in the 10th and 11th embodiments),
The gaming machine described in feature I9, wherein the specified target period is a non-award target period sandwiched between multiple grant target periods in the specified round of play.

According to feature I10, in a configuration in which variable ball entry control occurs multiple times in a specified round of play, a non-award target period sandwiched between multiple award target periods in the specified round of play is varied according to the player's degree of advantage. And, by varying the non-award target period in this manner in a situation in which the upper limit period of the round of play is not varied, the award target period occurring after the non-award target period will ultimately vary. Thus, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a specified round of play appropriate according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature I11. The gaming machine described in Feature I10, wherein the predetermined period variation means lengthens the predetermined target period when the player's degree of advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined degree of advantage.

According to feature I11, when a player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage, the non-award period sandwiched between multiple award periods in a predetermined round of play becomes longer. And, by lengthening the non-award period in this way while the upper limit period of the round of play is not changed, the award period that occurs after the non-award period becomes shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature I12. The gaming machine described in Feature I11, characterized in that the expected number of balls entering the variable ball entry means in the specified round of play decreases as the specified target period becomes longer in the specified round of play.

According to feature I12, the non-award period is lengthened in a situation where the upper limit period for a round of play is not changed, so that the award period that occurs after the non-award period is shortened, and based on that, the expected number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means in a given round of play is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature I13. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I9 to I12, wherein the predetermined period variation means varies the number of times the award period occurs between the non-award period in a round of play in accordance with the player's degree of advantage, without varying the upper limit period in the round of play, thereby varying the predetermined period of interest in accordance with the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature I13, the number of times that the award target period occurs between non-award target periods in a round game is changed according to the player's degree of advantage without changing the upper limit period in the round game, so that the specified target period changes according to the player's degree of advantage. Furthermore, in this configuration, the length of one award target period that occurs in the above-mentioned round game can also change. And, by changing the length of one award target period, the ease of game balls entering the variable ball entry means also changes. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a round game appropriate according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature I14. The gaming machine described in Feature I13, wherein the predetermined period variation means extends the predetermined target period by increasing the number of times the award target period occurs between the non-award target periods in the round of play without varying the upper limit period in the round of play when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or exceeds the predetermined advantage level, or when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or exceeds the predetermined advantage level.

According to feature I14, when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage level, the number of times that the round game will be in the grant-eligible period with a non-grant-eligible period in between is increased. And, by increasing the number of times that the round game will be in the grant-eligible period in this way while the upper limit period for the round game is not changed, the predetermined target period for the round game becomes longer, and as a result, the grant-eligible period for the round game becomes shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature I15. The gaming machine described in Feature I14, characterized in that as the predetermined target period becomes longer during the round play, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means during the round play decreases.

According to feature I15, the non-award period is lengthened in a situation where the upper limit period for a round of play is not changed, so that the award period that occurs after the non-award period is shortened, and based on that, the expected number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means in a given round of play is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features I1 to I15. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristic Group J>
Feature J1. A display means (pattern display device 41) for displaying a changing pattern;
a game control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, a display MPU 92) for controlling the display means so that the display of the patterns is changed in each game round, the change being counted as one game round, where the display of the patterns is changed when a start trigger occurs and the display of the patterns is ended when a termination trigger occurs;
A means for granting the predetermined profit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player after the game corresponding to the granting of the predetermined profit is completed (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62);
Equipped with
When the picture is being displayed in a variable manner, the picture is placed in a predetermined waiting area (waiting area SA1 to SA9) at a waiting time.
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a pre-end variation means (a function of executing a selection process for a final stop period in the main MPU 62 in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh and fifteenth embodiments, and a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment) that varies a pre-end period (the final stop period of a game round in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh and fifteenth embodiments, and the period during which a standby display is executed in the twelfth embodiment) included in the period from when the standby timing occurs in the game round to when the game round ends, depending on the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive wins counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, and the consecutive wins occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment).

According to feature J1, the pre-end period, which is included in the period from the standby timing in a game round to the end of that game round, varies according to the player's degree of advantage. The period required until the end of a game round varies as the pre-end period varies, and the frequency of the predetermined benefit being awarded per unit time also varies as the period varies. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players. Furthermore, in this configuration, because the pre-end period, which is the period after the image is waiting in the standby area, varies, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without making complex changes to the content of the image variation display.

Feature J2. In the game round, the image is waited in the waiting area, and then the image waiting in the waiting area is finally stopped and displayed, and the game round ends in the state where the image is finally stopped and displayed.
The gaming machine described in feature J1 is characterized in that the pre-end period is the period during which the final stop display is being displayed (the final stop period of a game round in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh and fifteenth embodiments).

According to feature J2, when the duration of a game round is changed according to the player's degree of advantage, it is only necessary to change the period during which the final stop display of the image is performed, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load for changing the duration of a game round according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature J3. In the game round, the image is placed on standby in the standby area based on the standby timing, a standby display is performed on the standby image, and then the image placed on standby in the standby area is finally stopped and displayed, and the game round ends in the state where the image is finally stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine described in feature J1, characterized in that the pre-termination period is a waiting period during which the waiting display is being displayed (a period during which the waiting display in the 12th embodiment is executed).

According to feature J3, when the duration of a play round is changed according to the player's degree of advantage, the period during which the waiting display is made before the final stop display of the image in the play round is changed. In this case, since the configuration is such that the period after the image is waiting in the waiting area is changed, there is no need to make complex changes to the content of the changing display of the image when changing the duration of a play round according to the player's degree of advantage, and furthermore, since the configuration is such that the period before the final stop display is made is changed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the play round has not yet ended even if the duration of the play round is extended.

Feature J4. A gaming machine according to feature J3, characterized in that the period during which the final stop display is being shown is not changed according to the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature J4, the period during which the final stop display of the pattern is performed is not changed according to the player's degree of advantage, so even in a configuration in which the period of a game round is changed according to the player's degree of advantage, it is possible to keep the period during which the final stop display of the pattern is performed constant.

Feature J5: A first control means (master MPU 62) having a period determination means for determining the execution period of the game round (a function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the master MPU 62) and the pre-termination variable means;
A second control means (a sound/light side MPU 82, a display side MPU 92) having the game control means and controlling the display means based on information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A means for transmitting start information (a command for changing) including information on the execution period determined by the period determination means when the game round is started (a function for executing the process of step S615 in the main MPU 62);
A means for transmitting final stop information (final stop command) instructing the start of the final stop display in the game round (a function for executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 62);
Equipped with
the game control means controls the display means so that the variable display of the patterns is started based on the reception of the start information, and the final stop display is started based on the reception of the final stop information,
The gaming machine described in feature J3 or J4, wherein the pre-end variation means varies the period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determination means to the transmission of the final stop information in accordance with the player's degree of advantage.

According to feature J5, the first control means determines the execution period of a game round and varies the period of the game round according to the player's advantage, and the second control means controls the display means, which makes it possible to distribute the processing load to multiple control means. In addition, when a game round is started, start information including information on the execution period is transmitted from the first control means, and the second control means starts the variable display of the patterns based on receiving the start information, and starts the final stop display of the patterns based on the final stop information transmitted from the first control means. As a result, the second control means controls the execution of the variable display of the patterns in accordance with the information transmitted from the first control means. In this case, the period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determination means to the transmission of the final stop information is varied according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to vary the period of a game round according to the player's advantage simply by adjusting the timing of transmitting the final stop information.

Feature J6. The gaming machine described in Feature J5, characterized in that the pre-termination variation means transmits the final stop information after a predetermined extension period has elapsed since the execution period determined by the period determination means has elapsed when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or exceeds a target advantage level (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or exceeds the target advantage level (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903, S4905, and S4907 of the main MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to feature J6, the waiting period is lengthened when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the target advantage. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature J7. The game control means is
A means for reading out a display mode information group (a data table for game presentation, a display data table) corresponding to the information on the execution period included in the start information from a first storage means (a sound/light side ROM 83, a display side ROM 93) to a second storage means (a sound/light side RAM 84, a display side RAM 94) based on receiving the start information (a function for executing the processing of step S5004 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment);
A means (display side MPU 92) for controlling the display means in accordance with the display mode information group read out to the second storage means to execute variable display of the picture;
means for continuing the standby display on the display means by performing control again using control information for performing the standby display in the display mode information group when the final stop information has not been received in a situation where control has been performed using the final control information in the display mode information group read out to the second storage means (a function for executing an extension setting process of the audio-visual side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature J6 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature J7, the waiting period is extended by processing the display mode information group corresponding to the execution period information included in the start information, so that it is possible to lengthen the waiting period according to the player's degree of advantage without increasing the number of display mode information groups pre-stored in the first storage means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features J1 to J7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Information acquisition means (function to execute the processing of steps S5203 and S5207 of the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment) for acquiring special information (reserved information on the first special chart side, reserved information on the second special chart side) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a game ball entering the first operating port 33, a game ball entering the second operating port 34);
Acquired information storage means (first special chart reserve area 125, second special chart reserve area 126) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that performs an assignment determination to determine whether the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information, and when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, performs the assignment determination for the plurality of pieces of special information in sequence;
A predetermined profit granting means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) that grants a predetermined profit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information in the grant determination;
a game control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, a display MPU 92) for controlling a game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game-use operation is performed in each game, with one game being defined as a game in which a game-use operation is started and the game-use operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the award determination;
a specific period selection means for setting the execution period of the game round to a period longer than a predetermined period when a predetermined special information, which is the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, is stored in the acquired information storage means and a game round is executed triggered by the special information that precedes the predetermined special information in the order of consumption; and
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature K1, in a situation where specific special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, when a game round is executed triggered by special information that precedes the specific special information in the consumed order, the execution period of that game round becomes a period longer than the specified length of time. This extends the period until the game round triggered by the specific special information is started, and accordingly the period required until the specific benefit is granted becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent the specific benefit from being repeated in a short period of time.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game round triggered by the special information that is the consumption order of the previous game round with respect to the specific special information to a period longer than the specific length of time.

According to feature K2, a game round in which the execution period of the game round is longer than a predetermined period due to the fact that the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means is a game round triggered by special information that is one play before the specified special information. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of a game round from becoming excessively long.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game round triggered by the specified special information to a period longer than the specified length of time.

According to feature K3, not only the play times triggered by special information that is consumed before the predetermined special information corresponding to the award correspondence information, but also the play times triggered by the predetermined special information have a period longer than the predetermined length of time. This makes it possible to extend the period required for the award of the predetermined profit.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, in which, when a game round triggered by special information that is earlier in the consumption order than the specific special information is executed in a situation where the specific special information, which is the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game round to the longest period of the execution period.

According to feature K4, when the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the execution period of the game round triggered by the special information that precedes the specified special information in the consumed order becomes the longest period of the execution period. As a result, in a situation where the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, it is possible to reliably extend the period required from the end of the game round triggered by the specified special information until the specified profit is awarded, and it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature K5. The gaming machine described in Feature K4, wherein the longest period is longer than the longest execution period of the game round that occurs when the specified special information is not stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature K5, when the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the execution period of the game round triggered by the special information that precedes the specified special information in the consumption order is longer than the longest execution period selected when the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means. As a result, in a situation where the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the game round triggered by the specified special information to end and the specified profit to be awarded, and it is possible to set an execution period different from that in a case where the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K5, in which the specific period selection means, when a game round triggered by special information that precedes the specific special information in the consumption order is executed in a situation where the specific special information, which is the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, is stored in the acquired information storage means, sets the execution period of the game round to a period longer than the specific length period and corresponding to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c).

According to feature K6, when the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the execution period of the game round triggered by the special information that precedes the specified special information in the consumption order is a period longer than the specified length of time and corresponding to the player's degree of advantage. As a result, in a situation where the specified special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, it is possible to not only simply lengthen the period required until the end of the game round triggered by the specified special information and the grant of the specified profit, but also to lengthen it in a manner corresponding to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature K7. The acquired information storage means stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the first acquisition condition being satisfied (the game ball entering the first operating port 33) as the first special information (reserved information on the first special chart side), and stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied (the game ball entering the second operating port 34) as the second special information (reserved information on the second special chart side),
This gaming machine includes a priority means (a function of executing the process of step S502 in the main MPU 62) for causing the award determination means to perform the award determination on the second special information when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, even if the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means;
The gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that when a game round is executed triggered by a predetermined second special information that corresponds to the grant corresponding information and that is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second special information is consumed earlier than the predetermined second special information, the specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game round to a period longer than the predetermined length of period.

According to feature K7, the execution period of a game round is extended as already explained for the second special information that is the subject of priority consumption. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of a game round from being extended excessively.

Feature K8. The gaming machine described in Feature K7, characterized in that the specific period selection means includes a means for setting the execution period of the game round triggered by the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means to a period longer than the predetermined length when the predetermined second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing the process of step S5409 in the main MPU 62 in the 13th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of steps S5511 to S5513 in the main MPU 62 in the 14th embodiment).

According to feature K8, when the specified second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the execution period of the game round triggered by the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means is also longer than the specified period. As a result, when a game round triggered by the specified second special information ends and a specified profit is awarded, and then a game round triggered by the first special information is executed, the execution period of that game round is longer than the specified period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a specified profit will be awarded in quick succession after the predetermined profit has been awarded.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features K1 to K8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A profit granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S903, S906, and S907 in the main MPU 62) that grants a player a predetermined profit (the opening and closing execution mode of the most number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode) based on the occurrence of a predetermined granting event (the end of a game of a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result in the 15th embodiment) by playing a game;
a status setting means (function for executing the processes of steps S5605, S5703, S5712, S5713, S5803, S5813, S5823 and S5833 of the master MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment) for setting the subsequent game status to a specific game status (a status in which the consecutive win occurrence flag of the master RAM 64 is set to "1") based on the occurrence of a profit-related event, which is either the occurrence of the predetermined awarding event or the awarding of the predetermined profit, between the occurrence of a specific opportunity (consumption of a consecutive win reference number of game plays) after the predetermined profit is awarded;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature L1, the game status thereafter becomes a specific game status based on the occurrence of a benefit-related event, which is either the occurrence of a predetermined benefit awarding event or the awarding of a predetermined benefit, between the time when a predetermined benefit is awarded and the occurrence of a specific opportunity. This makes it possible to set the game status to a corresponding situation when a predetermined benefit is repeatedly generated within a short period of time. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature L2. The target period (the ball launch period, the duration of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the interval period, the ending period) can vary, so that the period required from when the predetermined profit is awarded until the next occurrence of the predetermined award event can vary.
The gaming machine described in feature L1 is characterized in that the situation setting means sets the specific gaming situation to a situation in which the target period is longer than before, based on the occurrence of the profit-related event between the time the specified profit is awarded and the time the specific trigger occurs.

According to feature L2, the target period becomes longer than before when a specific game situation occurs based on the occurrence of a benefit-related event, which is either the occurrence of a predetermined benefit awarding event or the awarding of a predetermined benefit, between the awarding of a predetermined benefit and the occurrence of a specific trigger. As a result, if the predetermined benefit is repeatedly generated within a short period of time, the period required until the predetermined benefit is awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large benefit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature L3. The game control means (the function of executing steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound/light MPU 82, the display MPU 92) controls the game execution means (the special pattern unit 37, the pattern display device 41) so that the game operation is executed in each game, with one game being one in which the game operation is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger and the game operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end trigger,
The predetermined award event occurs after the game operation corresponding to the award of the predetermined benefit is completed,
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the specific trigger is that the game is played a target standard number of times (consecutive standard number of times) after the predetermined profit is awarded.

According to feature L3, the game status thereafter becomes a specific game status based on the occurrence of a profit-related event, which is either the occurrence of a predetermined awarding event or the awarding of a predetermined profit, between the awarding of a predetermined profit and the execution of a target reference number of game rounds. This makes it possible to set the game status to a corresponding status when the predetermined profit is awarded again in a situation where only a small number of game rounds have been played since the awarding of the predetermined profit.

Feature L4. The gaming machine described in Feature L3, characterized in that the situation setting means ends the specific gaming situation when the target reference number of times of play has been performed in the specific gaming situation (a function of executing the processing of step S5615 of the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment).

According to feature L4, it is possible to set both the number of play times that serve as the setting criterion for a specific game situation and the number of play times that serve as the release criterion for the specific game situation as the target reference number. This makes it possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store the reference number of play times, compared to a configuration in which the number of play times that serve as the setting criterion and the number of play times that serve as the release criterion are set separately.

Feature L5. The gaming machine described in Feature L4, wherein the situation setting means ends the specific gaming situation when a termination trigger occurs (consumption of the standard number of consecutive game plays) even if a favorable period (high frequency support mode) advantageous to the player continues.

According to feature L5, the specific game situation will end if an end trigger occurs even if the advantageous period is continuing. This makes it possible to prevent the specific game situation from continuing excessively.

Feature L6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L5, characterized in that the situation setting means does not set the subsequent gaming situation to the specific gaming situation if the profit-related event occurs after the specific opportunity occurs after the predetermined profit is awarded, even if a favorable period (high frequency support mode) advantageous to the player continues.

According to feature L6, even if the advantageous period continues, if a profit-related event occurs after a specific opportunity occurs after a predetermined profit is awarded, the game status thereafter is not set to a specific game status. This makes it possible to prevent the setting of a specific game status from occurring excessively.

Feature L7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L6, characterized in that the benefit awarding means transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state (high frequency winning mode with the greatest number of rounds) advantageous to the player as the awarding of the predetermined benefit.

Feature L7 makes it possible to change the game situation to a situation that corresponds to the repeated occurrence of a special game state in a short period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features L1 to L7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to a game area (a game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (a special ball entry device 32) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main side MPU 62) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means;
In the special game state, the variable ball entry control is generated by the variable ball entry control means, and a round generation means (in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62) generates a round game that ends when either of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit period has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means has reached an upper limit number;
a predetermined period variation means (a function of executing processing at the start of opening of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment and selection processing of the closed period) for varying a predetermined target period (closed period) during which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state during the round game in accordance with the player's advantage (the number of target rounds in the tenth embodiment) without varying the upper limit period during the round game;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature M1, the game state can be shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game state will shift to the special game state. In this case, the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state during a round of play is changed according to the player's degree of advantage without changing the upper limit period during the round of play, which results in the period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state during the round of play being changed. This makes it possible to set the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means during a round of play to an appropriate number according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature M2. As the round game, there is a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs multiple times (a round game in an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result in the tenth embodiment),
A gaming machine described in feature M1, characterized in that the specified target period is a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state, sandwiched between a period in which one of the variable ball entry means is in the open state and a period in which the next variable ball entry means is in the open state during the specified round of play.

According to feature M2, in a configuration in which variable ball entry control occurs multiple times in a given round of play, the period in which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state sandwiched between the period in which one variable ball entry means is in an open state and the period in which the next variable ball entry means is in an open state in the given round of play is varied according to the player's degree of advantage. And, by varying the period in which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state in this manner while the upper limit period of the round of play is not varied, the period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state that occurs after the period in which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state will vary as a result. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a given round of play appropriate according to the player's degree of advantage.

Feature M3. The gaming machine described in Feature M2, characterized in that the predetermined period variation means lengthens the predetermined target period when the player's degree of advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined degree of advantage.

According to feature M3, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage, the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state sandwiched between the period during which one variable ball entry means is in an open state and the period during which the next variable ball entry means is in an open state in a predetermined round of play when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the predetermined advantage becomes longer. And by lengthening the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state in this manner, the period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state that occurs after the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state becomes shorter. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature M4. The gaming machine described in Feature M3, characterized in that the expected number of balls entering the variable ball entry means in the specified round of play decreases as the specified target period becomes longer in the specified round of play.

According to feature M4, the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state is lengthened in a situation where the upper limit period for a round of play is not changed, which results in a shorter period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state following the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state, and as a result, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a given round of play is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Feature M5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M4, characterized in that the predetermined period variation means varies the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state during a round of play, including a period during which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state, during the round of play, in accordance with the player's advantage, without varying the upper limit period during the round of play, thereby varying the predetermined target period in accordance with the player's advantage.

According to feature M5, the upper limit period in a round game is not changed, and the number of occurrences of periods in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state sandwiched between periods in which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state in the round game is changed according to the player's advantage, so that the specified target period changes according to the player's advantage. In addition, in this configuration, the length of a period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state once in the above-mentioned round game can also change. And, by changing the length of a period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state once, the ease of balls entering the variable ball entry means also changes. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of balls entering the variable ball entry means in a round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature M6. The gaming machine described in Feature M5, wherein the predetermined period variation means extends the predetermined target period by increasing the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state during a round of play, without varying the upper limit period during the round of play, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value) or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value).

According to feature M6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds the predetermined advantage, the number of occurrences of periods in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, sandwiched between periods in which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state during a round of play, is increased. And, by increasing the number of occurrences of such periods in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in a situation where the upper limit period of the round of play is not changed, the predetermined target period in that round of play is lengthened, and as a result, the period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state during that round of play is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature M7. The gaming machine described in Feature M6, characterized in that the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means during the round of play decreases as the specified target period becomes longer during the round of play.

According to feature M7, the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state is lengthened without changing the upper limit period for a round of play, which results in a shorter period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state following the period during which the variable ball entry means is in a closed state, and as a result, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a given round of play is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent players from being awarded excessively large profits in a short period of time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features M1 to M7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A payout means (payout device 76) for paying out game media to a player;
A payout control means (payout control device 77) that drives and controls the payout means so that the gaming media is paid out based on the occurrence of a grant trigger;
Equipped with
The payout control means of this gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a speed variation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S6102 to S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) that varies the payout speed of the gaming media by the payout means in accordance with the player's advantage (number of target rounds).

According to feature N1, the payout speed of gaming media varies depending on the player's degree of advantage. This makes it possible to appropriately award benefits to players.

Feature N2. The gaming machine described in Feature N1, wherein the speed variation means makes the payout speed slower than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value) or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value).

According to feature N2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined advantage, the payout speed of the gaming media becomes slower than before. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature N3. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) that is higher in advantage for the player than the first predetermined advantage are set;
The speed varying means is
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage, a means for slowing down the payout speed (a function for executing the processing of step S6105 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment);
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage, a means for slowing down the payout speed (a function for executing the process of step S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature N2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature N3, the payout speed of gaming media is gradually slowed down depending on the player's degree of advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's degree of advantage, the longer the period in which gaming media is awarded becomes. This makes it possible to gradually increase the function of preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature N4. The game machine is provided with a supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (the game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supplying operation is performed by a player in a situation where game balls can be supplied as the game medium;
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, characterized in that the payout period of the gaming balls due to the payout speed fluctuated by the speed fluctuating means is shorter than the predetermined period.

According to feature N4, even if the payout speed of game balls is changed according to the player's degree of advantage, the payout period of game balls at that payout speed is shorter than a predetermined period, which is the supply period of game balls. This makes it possible to change the payout speed of game balls within a range that does not cause problems in the supply of game balls to the game area.

Feature N5. A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, characterized in that it is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing the processing of step S6111 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment) that outputs payout information to the outside of the gaming machine based on the gaming medium being paid out by the payout means.

According to feature N5, payout information is output to the outside based on the fact that gaming media have actually been paid out by the payout means. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the number of gaming media that have been paid out in a management device external to the gaming machine, even in a configuration in which the payout speed of the gaming media is changed depending on the player's degree of advantage.

Feature N6: The speed varying means is
information grasping means (target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment) for grasping predetermined history information (target round number in the tenth embodiment) based on a predetermined game history obtained by playing a game;
A means for determining the subsequent dispensing speed based on the predetermined history information (a function for executing the processing of steps S6102 to S6106 of the MPU of the dispensing control device 77 in the 16th embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features N1 to N5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature N6, predetermined history information is obtained based on a predetermined gaming history obtained by playing a game, and the payout speed of the gaming media is changed based on the obtained predetermined history information. This causes the payout speed of the gaming media to change in accordance with the predetermined gaming history, making it possible to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature N7. A gaming machine according to feature N6, characterized in that the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player.

According to feature N7, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player, the payout speed of the subsequent gaming media is determined based on the predetermined history information. This allows the payout speed of the subsequent gaming media to change according to the profit given to the player, making it possible to appropriately award the profit to the player.

Feature N8. The system includes a period generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for generating a second predetermined period (round play) in which the expected value of the profit to be awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined period (other than round play);
A gaming machine described in feature N7, characterized in that the specified history information varies depending on the number of occurrences of the second specified period.

According to feature N8, in a configuration in which the specified history information varies depending on the number of occurrences of a second predetermined period in which the expected value of the profit being awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined period, the payout speed of the subsequent gaming media is varied based on the specified history information. As a result, the payout speed of the subsequent gaming media changes depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to appropriately award profits to the player.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features N1 to N8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. An information storage means (management area 160 in the second embodiment, management area 203 in the tenth embodiment) having a plurality of unit storage areas (first to sixtieth storage areas 161 to 166 in the second embodiment, first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the tenth embodiment) capable of storing unit information (unit ball payout rate in the second embodiment, value of measurement round number counter 201 in the tenth embodiment) that enables identification of a player's advantage;
a memory execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1906 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3803 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for storing the unit information that enables the player's advantage at that time to be determined in the unit memory area to be stored among the plurality of unit memory areas based on the occurrence of a memory trigger (in the second embodiment, the total number of dispensed balls reaching a predetermined unit number or more, and in the tenth embodiment, the passage of a calculation trigger period);
a calculation means for calculating the player's advantage during a calculation period (a target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, and a target number of rounds in the tenth embodiment) based on the unit information stored in a plurality of the unit memory areas (a function for executing the processes of steps S1908 to S1910 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S3805 and S3806 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature O1, when a memory trigger occurs, unit information at that time is stored in the unit memory area to be stored, and the player's advantage in the calculation period is calculated based on the unit information stored in the multiple unit memory areas. This eliminates the need to redo all the unit information each time the player's advantage in the calculation period is calculated, and it is possible for the player's advantage in the next calculation period to be shifted from the player's advantage in one calculation period by the period until a single memory trigger occurs. This makes it possible to manage the player's advantage in detail, and therefore to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature O2. The unit information is information corresponding to a game value given to the player until the memory trigger occurs,
A gaming machine described in feature O1, characterized in that the player's advantage is information corresponding to the gaming value granted to the player during the calculation period.

Feature O2 makes it possible to precisely manage information corresponding to the gaming value granted to a player during the calculation period.

Feature O3. A gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the memory trigger occurs when the number of gaming values used by the player reaches a unit reference number.

According to feature O3, the player's advantage in the next calculation period compared to the player's advantage in one calculation period can be set to a range shifted by the period until the number of game values used by the player reaches the unit reference number.

Feature O4. Equipped with a period generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4402 to S4416 of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for generating a second predetermined period (a round game in the tenth embodiment) in which the expected value of the profit to be awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined period (other than the round game in the tenth embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that the unit information is the number of occurrences of the second specified period until the memory trigger occurs.

Feature O4 makes it possible to precisely manage information corresponding to the number of second specified periods that occurred during the calculation target period.

Feature O5. A supplying means (a game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (a special ball entry device 32) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
A variable entry control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4109, S4204 and S4306 in the main MPU 62) that executes variable entry control by switching the variable entry means to the open state and then to the closed state;
A special transition means (a function for executing a special call start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature O4, characterized in that the second specified period is a specified period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state.

Feature O5 makes it possible to manage in detail information corresponding to a specific period that occurred during the calculation target period.

Feature O6. The gaming machine described in Feature O5, characterized in that the special gaming states include at least a first special gaming state (an open/close execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big win result) and a second special gaming state (an open/close execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability big win result or a 10R high probability big win result) in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state occurs is different from that of the first special gaming state.

According to feature O6, in a configuration in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is in an open state occurs differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, information corresponding to the number of times a predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state occurs in the special game state is stored as unit information. This makes it possible to store information corresponding to the profit actually granted to the player as unit information, compared to a configuration in which information corresponding to the number of times the special game state occurs is stored as unit information.

Feature O7. As the predetermined period, there is at least a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small;
A gaming machine described in feature O5 or O6, characterized in that the second specified period includes the first specified period but does not include the second specified period.

According to feature O7, information corresponding to the number of occurrences during a predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable entry means is relatively large is stored as unit information, while the number of occurrences during a predetermined second period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable entry means is relatively small is not stored as unit information. This makes it possible to store information corresponding to the profit actually awarded to the player as unit information.

Feature O8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O7, characterized in that the memory trigger occurs based on the passage of a unit reference period that is shorter than the calculation target period.

According to feature O8, the player's advantage in the next calculation period can be set to a range shifted by a unit reference period compared to the player's advantage in one calculation period.

Feature O9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O8, characterized in that when the unit information that enables the memory execution means to determine the player's advantage at that time based on the occurrence of the memory trigger is stored in the unit memory area to be stored, the calculation means calculates the player's advantage during the calculation period based on the unit information stored in a plurality of the unit memory areas.

According to feature O9, each time a memory trigger occurs and unit information at that time is stored in the unit memory area to be stored, the player's advantage in the calculation period is calculated based on the unit information stored in the multiple unit memory areas. This makes it possible for the player's advantage in the next calculation period to be shifted by the range of advantage until the occurrence of a single memory trigger compared to the player's advantage in one calculation period. This makes it possible to manage the player's advantage in detail, and therefore to appropriately award benefits to the player.

Feature O10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for determining the subsequent game situation depending on the player's advantage calculated by the calculation means (a function for executing a period setting process and a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing a final stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, a process at the start of opening, a closing period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature O10, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's degree of advantage calculated by the calculation means, so that it is possible to appropriately award benefits to the player. In particular, since the configuration allows for detailed management of the player's degree of advantage, it is possible to appropriately adjust the game situation.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10 may be applied to the features O1 to O10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relates to the features of Feature A Group, Feature B Group, Feature C Group, Feature D Group, Feature E Group, Feature F Group, Feature G Group, Feature H Group, Feature I Group, Feature J Group, Feature K Group, Feature L Group, Feature M Group, Feature N Group, and Feature O Group, and is capable of solving the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to provide a performance that allows the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, a pachinko machine is known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the playing area, a changing display of pictures is performed on the display surface of the display device, and if the lottery results in a winning result, a combination of specific pictures is displayed in a final stopped state on the display surface, and the machine transitions to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. When the machine transitions to the special gaming state, for example, a ball entry device provided in the playing area starts opening and closing, and gaming balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device.

Here, it is preferable for gaming machines such as those exemplified above to award players with a moderate amount of profit, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 27... Game ball launch mechanism, 31... General winning port, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 37... Special symbol unit, 41... Symbol display device, 62... Main side MPU, 63... Main side ROM, 64... Main side RAM, 64c... Total round number counter, 76... Payout device, 77... Payout control device, 82... Sound/light side MPU, 83... Sound/light side ROM, 92... Display side MPU, 125... First special symbol reservation area, 126... Second special symbol reservation area, 160... Management area, 161-166... Memory area, 173... Counter Elephant payout rate area, 181... consecutive win counter, 185... first base arrangement table, 186... second base arrangement table, 187... third base arrangement table, 188... fourth base arrangement table, 191... normal period table, 192... shortened period table, 195... first base arrangement table, 196... second base arrangement table, 197... third base arrangement table, 201... measurement round number counter, 203... management area, 203a-203f... storage area, G3... remaining time image, SA1-SA9... waiting area.

Claims (1)

A game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into a game area based on an operation by a player;
A first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter;
A determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is established;
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
a display control means capable of controlling the display means so that the display means starts dynamic display of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the judgment result is statically displayed, which constitutes one game;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the display control means;
A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means through which the game ball can enter;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
a special game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result and the bonus game ends;
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a predetermined condition is established in the special game state, the display control means executes a special effect for a period longer than the shortest period required from the start to the end of the bonus game,
The special effect is an effect that is executed in the game round, and is configured not to be executed in the game round in the predetermined game state,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a notification that enables the player to know the remaining period of the special effect while the special effect is being executed.

Images